JP2023115154A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement.SOLUTION: A regular symbol win/lose lottery is performed on the basis of entry into a through-gate 35 and, on the basis of execution of the win/lose lottery, a regular symbol game round is performed. On the basis that a result of the regular symbol win/lose lottery becomes an opening result, opening/closing control of an electric accessory 66 is performed after the regular symbol game round is performed. In a Pachinko machine 10, entry into an electric accessory 66 is likely to occur when a holding number on a regular symbol side becomes a prescribed number or larger. When an upper variable winning device 710 on an upstream side of the through-gate 35 is in an opening state, no replenishment of the holding number on the regular symbol side is not performed and the state that entry into the electric accessory 66 is likely to occur is over.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 62

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a machine that has a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter, and performs a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (for example, patent Reference 1).

JP 2005-074175 A

Here, there is still room for improvement in terms of improving interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the players.

The present invention
variable ball entry means capable of switching between a first mode in which a game ball can enter and a second mode in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the first mode;
variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then executing variable ball entry control to the second mode;
specific state transition means for transitioning a game state to a specific state in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry means based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition;
In a gaming machine comprising
Based on the variable ball entry means being set to the first mode by the variable ball entry control means, it is possible to cause a specific event that is more disadvantageous than when the variable ball entry means is not set to the first mode. It is characterized by being equipped with possible means.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to improve interest.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) Explanatory diagram of the positional relationship between the through gate and the electric accessory, (b) and (c) are vertical cross-sectional views of the electric accessory and the second actuation opening as viewed from the side. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a schematic diagram showing a right or wrong table for the first special figure. It is a schematic diagram showing a right or wrong table for the second special figure. (a) Schematic diagram showing the general pattern correctness table, (b) Schematic diagram showing the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for low probability mode, (c) Schematic diagram showing the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for high probability mode be. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. It is a flow chart which shows a prize-winning process for operation openings. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing for 1st special figures. It is a flow chart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the first special figure. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display time setting process; (a) schematic diagram showing the first special figure fluctuation display time table for low probability mode, (b) schematic diagram showing the first special figure fluctuation display time table for high probability mode, (c) for low probability mode It is a schematic diagram showing a second special figure fluctuation display time table, (d) a schematic diagram showing a second special figure fluctuation display time table for high probability mode. It is a flow chart which shows control processing for the 2nd special figure. It is a flow chart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the second special figure. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. It is a flow chart showing normal figure game round control processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing normal figure game state transition processing. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the normal figure game. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the normal figure game. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the time difference A of the arrival timing with respect to the opening timing and the time difference B of the arrival timing with respect to the closing timing change. It is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. (a) special figure suitability table for low probability mode, (b) special figure suitability table for high probability mode, (c) distribution table for first special figure, (d) distribution for second special figure FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a table; It is a schematic diagram showing a normal figure open pattern. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation start processing. (a) schematic diagram showing the first variable display time table for normal maps, (b) schematic diagram showing the second variable display time table for normal maps, (c) third variable display time table for normal maps (d) is a schematic diagram showing a normal figure fluctuation display time table for high frequency support mode. It is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board in the third embodiment. (a) A longitudinal sectional view of the second variable winning device as seen from the side, (b) A longitudinal sectional view of the second variable winning device as seen from the rear. (a) A schematic diagram showing a right/wrong table for the first special figure, (b) A schematic diagram showing a right/wrong table for the second special figure. (a) A schematic diagram showing a low allocation mode, (b) A schematic diagram showing a high allocation mode. It is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for various jackpots. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing V allocation setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation start processing. (a) A schematic diagram showing a general figure fluctuation display time table for low frequency support mode, (b) A schematic diagram showing a general figure fluctuation display time table for high frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special effects performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st special effects. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 2nd special effect. It is a flow chart which shows processing for V winning a prize. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of production. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of production. It is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of a change of the normal figure reservation number. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board in the fourth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the positional relationship of an upper variable winning device, a through gate, and an electric accessory. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of opening time. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the opening and closing timing of the upper special winning opening and the easy winning state. 4 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the opening/closing timings of the upper and lower large winning openings and the easy winning state. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram showing a sorting table, and FIG. 11B is a flowchart showing a big winning opening opening/closing process in the first modification of the fourth embodiment. (a) A flowchart showing a round effect setting process executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device, (b) to (e) explanatory diagrams for explaining an outline of the effect. In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, (a) a schematic diagram showing the normal figure fluctuation display time table for the opening and closing execution mode, (b) a flowchart showing the opening time setting process, (c) the waiting time 4 is a flowchart showing setting processing; It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the opening and closing timing of the upper special winning opening and the easy winning state. In the 3rd modification of 4th Embodiment, (a) The schematic which shows the normal figure fluctuation display time table for opening-and-closing execution modes, (b) The schematic for demonstrating winning assistance duration. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a player HP setting table; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows round production setting processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of production. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of production. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of production. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram of the positional relationship of the upward variable winning device, the through gate, and the electric accessory in the fourth modified example of the fourth embodiment; (a) Explanatory view of the positional relationship of the movable accessory, the through gate, and the electric accessory, (b), (c) longitudinal section of the movable accessory viewed from the side in the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment It is a plan view. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram of the positional relationship among the rotating body, the through gate, and the electric accessory in the sixth modified example of the fourth embodiment; It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram of the positional relationship among the distribution valve, the through gate, and the electric accessory in the first modified example of the fifth embodiment; It is a schematic diagram of a rolling part in the 2nd modification of a 5th embodiment. FIG. 12A is a front view showing the configuration of a game board, and FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram showing a general-purpose right/wrong table in the third modification of the fifth embodiment; (a) A schematic diagram showing a normal diagram fluctuation display time table for the first state, (b) A schematic diagram showing a normal diagram fluctuation display time table for the second state. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that the reservation information by the side of a normal map is acquired in a 1st state. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that the reservation information by the side of a normal map is acquired in a 2nd state. It is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. FIG. 20 is a front view showing the configuration of a game board in the fourth modified example of the fifth embodiment; (a) Schematic diagram showing the general pattern correctness table, (b) Schematic diagram showing the general pattern fluctuation display time table for the first state, (c) Schematic diagram showing the general pattern fluctuation display time table for the second state be. It is a timing chart for explaining another example. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game board.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front side, and FIGS. In FIG. 2, the configuration inside the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main section 12 attached to the outer frame 11 .

The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting plate materials on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with the outer frame 11 on the island facilities of the game arcade.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Specifically, an upper supporting metal fitting 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. A side support fitting 18 is provided. A support mechanism is constituted by these upper support metal fittings 17 and lower support metal fittings 18, and the main part 12 of the game machine rotates to the outer frame 11 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front. , and can be rotated forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the right side as the leading end of the rotation (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the main part 12 of the game machine includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. a unit 15; In addition, the inner frame 13 of the game machine main portion 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable backward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view ( See Figure 3).

Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. there is A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame 20 so that substantially the entire game area PE, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front. It is closed from the rear side of the front door frame 14.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23 . A partition portion is formed in the glass holder to partition the holding area of the glass panel 23 in the front and rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. In other words, by securing a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the glass panels 23 doubly cover the game area PE from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加state.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20 . Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and security, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to face each glass panel in the front and rear with a predetermined gap therebetween. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a transparent synthetic resin panel member in place of the glass panel.

As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, along the periphery of the window portion 21, an annular decorative portion 26 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. The annular illumination portion 26 lights up or flashes in accordance with changes in the gaming state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined reach is reached. Further, an error display lamp part 27 is provided at the top of the pachinko machine 10 at the center of the annular illumination part 26 and lights up when a predetermined error occurs. A ball ramp portion 28 is provided. In addition, speaker units 29 are provided at positions close to the left and right winning ball lamp units 28 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31 , and a lower plate 34 that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 . The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, aligning them in a line, and guiding them to the side of a game ball shooting mechanism described later. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33 .

A game ball shooting handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower swelling portion 32 so as to protrude forward. By operating the game ball shooting handle 41, a game ball is shot from a game ball shooting mechanism which will be described later.

A passage forming unit 45 is attached to the rear surface of the front door frame 14 as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 45 is molded of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34 . In the passage forming unit 45, a receptacle projecting rearward and opening upward is formed at an upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the receptacle is divided into left and right by a partition wall to form an entrance of the front door side upper tray passage. A section and an entrance section of the front door side lower tray passage are partitioned. A game ball entering the front door side upper tray passage is guided to the upper tray 33, and a game ball entering the front door side lower tray passage is guided to the lower tray 34.例文帳に追加

Projection shafts are provided at the upper end and lower end of the rear surface of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13 . Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hook fittings 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the front end side of the rotation on the back surface of the front door frame 14 . These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13 .

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11 . The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11 . The resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11 , and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50 . A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the resin base 50 (specifically, its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate. .

Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to upper and lower ends of the front surface of the resin base 50 on the base end side of rotation. Axial holes are formed in the support fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the protruding shafts of the front door frame 14 into the axial holes. ing.

Insertion holes for inserting hook fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the front surface of the resin base 50 on the front end side of the rotation. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 3, a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened by engaging the hook fitting 49 with the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. The locking device 55 also has an inner frame hook member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13 . By hooking these inner frame hook members 57 on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11 , the main part 12 of the game machine is locked with respect to the outer frame 11 in a closed state.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 50 . The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned clockwise, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured to unlock the inner frame 13 from the outer frame 11 when the key is turned to the left.

A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 50 , and the window hole 54 is closed from behind by a game board 60 mounted on the resin base 50 . The game board 60 comprises a wooden plywood board and a sheet member covering the front surface of the plywood board. A game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed on the exposed portion, ie, the front surface of the game board 60 . The game board 60 is not limited to being made of wood, and can be made of synthetic resin.

The game board 60 (especially various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60. FIG.

The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-rear direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 61, a first operating opening 62, a second operating opening 63, a third operating opening 64, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 67, and the like.

When a ball enters the general winning port 61, the variable winning device 65, the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63 and the third operating port 64, it is detected by a detection sensor, and based on the detection result, a predetermined A privilege such as payout of a number of prize balls is given to the player. In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when a ball enters the general winning hole 61, and 15 game balls are paid out when a ball enters the variable winning device 65. is executed. Also, when a ball enters the first operating port 62, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the second operating port 63, ten game balls are paid out. is executed, and when a ball enters the third operating port 64, one game ball is paid out. Incidentally, even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out.

An out port 68 is provided at the bottom of the game board 60, and game balls that do not enter various ball entry portions are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. - 特許庁Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening portion, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening portion, but also the game ball passing through the opening portion. A mode in which it is not discharged later from the game area PE is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out hole 68, entering the general winning hole 61, the operation holes 62 to 64, the variable winning device 65 or the through gate 35 is It is also expressed as winning a prize.

The game board 60 is also provided with a large number of nails 69 for properly distributing and adjusting the flow paths of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. Various configurations such as the nail 69 and the windmill divide the flow path of the game ball, and are adjusted so that the winning to the above-described general winning opening 61 or the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

The variable display unit 67 is arranged in the center of the game board 60, and the operation ports 62 to 64 and the like are arranged around the variable display unit 67. As shown in FIG. The first operating port 62 is arranged below the variable display unit 67 and the second operating port 63 is arranged to the left of the variable display unit 67 . Also, the third operating port 64 is arranged on the right side of the variable display unit 67 . Both the first working port 62 and the third working port 64 are opened upward, and the second working port 63 is opened forward.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the second operation port 63 is formed as a rectangular opening that opens forward in a front view. The vertical and horizontal dimensions of the second working opening 63 are slightly larger than the diameter D of the game ball, and the second working opening 63 can pass one game ball when viewed from the front (front side). The size is. As shown in FIG. 5(b), behind the second operating port 63, there is a ball passage 240 that guides the game ball entering the second operating port 63 to the back side of the game board 60 and then downward. formed. A detection sensor 391c for detecting a game ball that has entered the second operation port 63 is arranged in the middle of the ball passage 240. As shown in FIG. The second operating port 63 is provided with an electric accessory 66 that changes the degree of opening of the operating port 63 .

The electric accessory 66 has a closed state (non-receiving state, non-supporting state or non-guiding state) in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second operating port 63, and it can enter the second operating port 63. It is possible to switch between different open states (receiving state, support state or guide state). As shown in FIGS. 5(b) and 5(c), the electric accessory 66 includes an opening/closing accessory 241 for opening and closing the second operating port 63, and a receiver for receiving a game ball flowing down in front of the second operating port 63. an object 242;

The opening/closing accessory 241 includes a rotating plate 243 that can rotate in the front-rear direction around a rotating shaft 243a provided at the upper end of the second operating port 63 as a fulcrum. The rotation plate 243 has a size that can make the opening area of the second operation opening 63 smaller than the projected area of the game ball by blocking at least a part of the second operation opening 63 . The rotary plate 243 is in a first position (see FIG. 5(b)) in which the second operating port 63 is closed in an upright posture, and is rotated backward from the first position to open the second operating port 63. It is displaceable to the second position (see FIG. 5(c)). The rotating plate 243 is driven by the driving portion 244 through a link mechanism (not shown) to switch between the first position and the second position. When the rotating plate 243 is displaced to the first position, the front surface 243b of the rotating plate 243 is substantially flush with the front surface 60a of the game board 60. When the rotating plate 243 is displaced to the second position, the rotating plate The entire plate 243 is housed within the ball passage 240 . Therefore, the rotary plate 243 does not protrude forward from the front surface 60a of the game board 60 at either the first position or the second position.

The receiver 242 includes a plate-like receiver member 245 that is provided below the second operation port 63 and moves back and forth. The receiving member 245 has a retracted position (see FIG. 5(b)) in which the entirety of the receiving member 245 is accommodated in the ball passage 240, and a portion of the receiving member 245 that moves forward from the retracted position and extends forward of the front surface 60a of the game board 60. It can be displaced to a projected forward position (see FIG. 5(c)). When the receiving member 245 is displaced to the forward position, it becomes possible to receive a game ball from above. It is guided to mouth 63 . The receiving member 245 is driven by the driving portion 246 through a link mechanism (not shown) to switch between the retracted position and the forward position.

Under such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 5C, when the rotating plate 243 is positioned at the second position and the receiving member 245 is positioned at the forward position, the electric accessory 66 is in the open state. A receiving area RA1 is formed in which a game ball can be received in the second operating port 63. As shown in FIG. The receiving area RA1 is formed in a specific area RA2 (see FIG. 5B) in front of the second operation opening 63 (in front of the rotating plate 243 when the electric accessory 66 is closed). The receiving area RA1 has the same shape and size as the second working opening 63 in a front view, and the winning of game balls into the second working opening 63 is allowed by forming the receiving area RA1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the rotating plate 243 is positioned at the first position and the receiving member 245 is positioned at the retracted position, the electric accessory 66 disappears from the receiving area RA1. As a result, the electric accessory 66 is in a closed state, and winning of game balls into the second operation opening 63 is restricted. At that time, since the second operation opening 63 is closed by the rotary plate 243, even if the flow of the game ball changes due to collision with the nail 69 or the like or collision between the game balls, the game ball can unexpectedly win a prize. is suppressed. Further, when the electric accessory 66 is in the closed state, the game ball can pass through the front (specific area RA2) of the electric accessory 66 (the second operation opening 63).

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make it impossible to win a prize to the second operation opening 63 when the electric accessory 66 is in a closed state, and it may be configured such that it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. For example, the rotating plate 243 may be omitted, or the receiving member 245 may protrude forward from the front surface 60a while the amount of protrusion from the front surface 60a of the game board 60 at the retracted position of the receiving member 245 is smaller than at the forward position. It can be configured to In short, it suffices if the easiness of winning to the second operation opening 63 is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

The through gate 35 is arranged to the left of the variable display unit 67 and above the second operating port 63 . The through gate 35 is configured as a pass-type winning hole, and game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 can continue to flow down the game area PE below the through gate 35 . In other words, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can also enter the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 thereafter.

Here, the positional relationship between the through gate 35 and the second operation opening 63 (electric accessory 66) will be described with reference to FIG. 5(a). The through gate 35 and the second operating port 63 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction with a predetermined gap therebetween. Specifically, both are arranged such that the central axis of the through gate 35 and the central axis of the second operating opening 63 are aligned in the vertical direction. Between the through gate 35 and the second operation opening 63, a pair of left and right game nails arranged in a horizontal direction are planted over two stages.

The distance between the upper left game nail 69a and the upper right game nail 69b is slightly larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the lower left game nail 69c and the lower right game nail 69d are separated from the upper left game nail 69a. and the upper right game nail 69b are arranged on the same vertical line. The distance between the lower end of the through gate 35 and the upper game nail pair 69a, 69b and the distance between the upper game nail pair 69a, 69b and the lower game nail pair 69c, 69d are smaller than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. there is For this reason, the game nails 69a to 69d form a prize-winning route that guides the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 toward the electric accessory 66 (second operation port 63), and at the same time, the game that has passed through the through gate 35 is formed. Game balls other than balls are suppressed from entering the winning route. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 can be stably directed toward the electric accessory 66, and the game ball that has just passed through the through gate 35 can collide with another game ball. is suppressed from moving toward the second operation opening 63 .

In this embodiment, the through gate 35 and the second operation opening 63 ( The positional relationship with the electric accessory 66) is defined. Specifically, the through gate 35 and the through gate 35 are arranged so that the time required for the game ball to reach the upper surface of the receiving member 245 (see FIG. 5(c)) in the forward position after passing through the through gate 35 is 0.6 sec. A distance from the receiving member 245 is set. In the following description, the arrival of the game ball to the specific area RA2 may be referred to as the arrival of the game ball to the electric accessory 66. FIG.

Incidentally, no electric accessory is provided for the first operating port 62 and the third operating port 64 . In other words, these operating ports 62 and 64 are always open upwards to allow game balls to win prizes. The sizes of the openings of the first operating port 62 and the third operating port 64 are set to a size that allows one game ball to win.

Returning to the explanation of the game board 60 in FIG. The variable winning device 65 is formed with a large winning opening 65a leading to the back side of the game board 60, and is provided with an opening/closing door 65b as opening/closing means for opening and closing the large winning opening 65a. The opening/closing door 65b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot or are difficult to win. It can be switched to an open state.

Here, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a big win or a special win (so-called small win) is won. The opening/closing execution mode will be described later in detail. As for the mode of opening the variable prize winning device 65, in the case of a jackpot, the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10) is regarded as one round, and multiple rounds (for example, 16 rounds) are variable as the upper limit. There is a mode in which the winning device 65 is repeatedly opened. In the case of a special win, the variable winning device 65 is opened once, and a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 sec) has passed or a predetermined number of prizes (for example, 10) have been won. It is set to continue until a certain point is reached.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be explained. The variable display unit 67 is provided with a symbol display device 75 that variably displays (variably displays) symbols triggered by the winning of the operation ports 62 to 64 .

The pattern display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents on the display screen 75a are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. On the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, for example, patterns are displayed side by side on the left, middle and right, and these patterns are scrolled in the vertical direction so as to be variably displayed. When a big win or a special win is achieved, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset effective line, and the opening/closing execution mode is entered. The pattern display device 75 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix display device or a 7-segment display device.

A center frame 76 is arranged in the variable display unit 67 so as to surround the pattern display device 75 . The center frame 76 is fixed to the game board 60 from the front side thereof, and in this fixed state, the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 stand upright from the front of the game board 60. It is configured so that the clearance dimension between and is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is prevented from colliding with the pattern display device 75, and the flowing path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is set to the right side of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the center frame 76). It is roughly divided into the above right route detouring from the left side and the left route detouring from the left side.

The third operating port 64 and the variable winning device 65 described above are arranged on the right route, and the game balls flowing down the left route are prevented from winning the third operating port 64 and the variable winning device 65. . On the upstream side of the third working port 64 on the right route, a game ball flow-down route (guidance route) is formed so as to guide most (approximately 70%) of the game balls launched on the right route to the third working port 64. It is

On the other hand, the through gate 35, the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 are arranged on the left route, and the game ball flowing down the right route is the through gate 35, the first operating port 62 and the second operating port Winning to 63 is avoided. When comparing the probability that a game ball shot to the left route enters the first operating port 62 and the probability that a game ball launched to the right route enters the third operating port 64, the former is higher than the latter. is lower than

The player can advance the game advantageously by selecting the launch destination of the game ball (flowing path of the game ball) from the right route/left route according to the game situation. The game ball launch destination can be selected by adjusting the launch force of the game ball, that is, the amount of operation (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41 .

The operation ports 62 to 64 are arranged at positions near the variable display unit 67 . Since a big win can occur with the winning of the operation ports 62 to 64 as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not the operation ports 62 to 64 win a prize, and at the same time, the pattern is used to grasp whether or not a big win will occur. It is believed that attention is directed to the display device 75 . The actuation openings 62 to 64 are provided near the variable display unit 67 as a means of concentrating on the area around the variable display unit 67 that the player wants to pay attention to.

In the present embodiment, the upper left portion of the center frame 76 is inclined downward to the left, and the left end portion of this portion protrudes toward the through gate 35 . With such a configuration, a guide portion 77 that guides the shot game ball to the through gate 35 is configured. A cushioning member 78 made of rubber or the like is arranged over the entire upper surface of the guide portion 77, that is, the portion with which the game ball abuts. The cushioning member 78 suppresses the bouncing of a game ball that collides with the guiding portion 77 and the breakage of the guiding portion 77 due to the impact. The upper surface of the cushioning member 78 is flat so that the flow of game balls rolling on the cushioning member 78 is less likely to be obstructed. The clearance dimension between the left end portion of the guiding portion 77 and the through gate 35 is larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the game ball can pass therebetween. For this reason, there is still room for the game ball guided by the guiding portion 77 to deviate from the prize-winning route to the through gate 35 . As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning the through gate 35 can be easily maintained until the game ball enters the through gate 35.例文帳に追加

In addition, as the game ball that wins through the through gate 35, there is a game ball that goes directly to the through gate 35 in addition to the game ball that is guided by the guide section 77. In other words, obstacle members (not shown) such as a plurality of game nails and protruding members are provided in the upper region of the through gate 35 to regulate or change the flowing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the guide portion 77. A flow-down path of the game ball is constructed by the obstructing member so that the game ball can reach the through gate 35 even if it abuts. In this embodiment, most of the game balls launched to the left route (for example, 80% or more) win the through gate 35 .

A main display unit 81 is arranged below the variable winning device 65 . The main display unit 81 is arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area PE, and projects from the front surface of the game board 60 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 . The front surface of the main display unit 81 faces the glass unit 22 (specifically, the glass panel 23 on the rear side) that allows the game area PE to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further faces the glass panel 23 on the rear side. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. This prevents game balls from falling in front of the front surface of the main display unit 81 . The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the content displayed on the main display section is controlled by the main control device.

A part of the main display unit 81 facing the glass unit 22 is provided with a main display section 43 and a character object display section 44 for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like. These display parts 43 and 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and movement of game balls in front of the various display parts 43 and 44 is avoided. Visibility is ensured by being The main display unit 43 has a first result display unit AS that displays the lottery result based on the winning at the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, and the result based on the winning at the third operating port 64. and a second result display part BS for displaying the result of the lottery performed.

In the first result display portion AS, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is displayed. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the mouth 63 is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display portion AS displays a variable display. After the game is stopped and a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result of the stop, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the second result display part BS, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning to the third operating port 64 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal display performed based on the winning to the third operating port 64 The results of the lottery will be displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the third operation port 64 is a winning result corresponding to a big win or a special win, the second result display part BS stops the variable display, and the stop result is a predetermined After the pattern is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode according to the result.

In the following, in order to distinguish between the pattern that is variably displayed upon winning the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 and the pattern that is variably displayed upon winning the third actuation port 64, The former is sometimes referred to as the first special design or the first special design, and the latter is sometimes referred to as the second special design or the second special design.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 62 to 64, the corresponding result display units AS and BS start variable display, display a predetermined stop result, and stop the variable display. It corresponds to one game time. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a prize is won in any of the operation ports 62 to 64, that single In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the time until the variable display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed is one game round. and

The main display section 43 of the main display unit 81 is provided with a pending number display section AM. The reserved number display portion AM corresponds to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 . The number of times the game ball wins the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reservations is displayed by lighting the reservation number display part AM. In addition, the number of times the game ball has won the third operation opening 64 is not reserved, and the reservation number display section corresponding to the third operation opening 64 is not provided.

The character item display section 44 is a display section for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 . In this case, in the character object display unit 44, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger. The result of is specified by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the support state for opening the electric accessory 66, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44. After it is displayed and the variable display is stopped, it moves to the support state. In the support state, the electric accessory 66 provided in the second operation port 63 is opened in a predetermined manner. It should be noted that the pattern that is variably displayed upon winning the through gate 35 may be referred to as a normal pattern or a normal pattern.

Here, based on the winning to the through gate 35, the variable display is started in the character object display unit 44, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game round in . Hereinafter, in order to distinguish from the game rounds in the result display portions AS and BS, the game rounds in the accessory display portion 44 are also referred to as normal figure game rounds. The times are also called special game times (first special game times, second special game times).

In addition, the accessory display section 44 is provided with a normal figure reserved number display section FM. The number display part FM of the normal figure reservation corresponds to the through gate 35 . The number of times the game ball wins the through gate 35 is reserved up to four times, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the normal figure reserved number display part FM.

Each of the result display units AS and BS and the character object display unit 44 in the main display unit 43 is composed of a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device or the like. display device may be used.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first special symbol game round based on the winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 and the second special symbol game round based on the winning to the third operating port 64 are duplicated. It is considered to be a configuration that can be implemented by Specifically, the winning to the third working opening 64 occurs while the variable display is being performed in the first result display portion AS based on the winning to the first working opening 62 or the second working opening 63. In this case, the variable display is started in the second result display section BS while the variable display in the first result display section AS is continued. Conversely, when a prize is won in the first working port 62 or the second working port 63 while the second result display portion BS is performing a variable display based on the winning in the third working port 64. Also in , the variable display is started in the first result display section AS while the variable display in the second result display section BS is continued. However, the open/close execution mode when winning the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, and the internal lottery based on the winning of the third operating port 64 It is designed not to overlap with the opening and closing execution mode in the case of These controls will be described later in detail.

Referring again to FIG. 2, the structure of the inner frame 13 will be described. Below the area where the game board 60 is mounted on the resin base 50, a game ball is projected toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball shooting handle 41. A game ball shooting mechanism 110 for shooting is provided. The game ball shooting mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 for shooting a game ball placed at a predetermined shooting standby position, a shooting rail 112 for defining the shooting direction of the game ball shot by the solenoid 111, and a game ball at the shooting standby position. A ball feeding device 113 that supplies balls and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components. integrated with respect to.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an oblique state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. At a position near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper is arranged to stop the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the launch standby position described above. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

Solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. By reciprocating the output shaft of the solenoid 111 in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply/shooting control device, the game ball placed at the shooting standby position moves to the game board 60 side, specifically the game It is driven out toward the guide rail 100 attached to the board 60 .

The guide rail 100 divides the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 which are arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. formed. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion opened to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion located above the game area PE. A game ball shot based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the shooting rail 112→the guide rail 100 (entrance part→exit part). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball shooting handle 41, it is possible to separate the hitting of the game balls into the area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE and the area on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the same game area PE. It is possible.

In addition, on the front side of the exit portion of the game board 60, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, a return prevention member 106 is attached to prevent the game ball that has reached the game area PE from returning into the guide passage 103. This prevents the game ball that reaches the game area PE first from hindering the launch of the following game ball.

The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other obliquely across the lower edge of the game board 60 . In other words, both rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are laterally shifted near the lower edge of the game board 60 . As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower edge of the game board 60, and a gap of a predetermined distance is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.例文帳に追加

A foul ball passage 46 is arranged below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 . If the game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return inside the guide passage 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 46 through the clearance. becomes. The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the front door side lower tray passage, and the game ball entering the foul ball passage 46 is discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next.

A through hole is formed in the resin base 50 on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14) to pass through the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction. 121 are provided. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has a main body side upper plate passage and a main body side lower plate passage. The upstream side of the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage communicates with a game ball distribution section which will be described later. Further, below the passage forming member 121, the socket portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted, and below the main body side upper tray passage, the front door side upper tray passage is arranged, A front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage.

Below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50, an opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage is attached. The opening/closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at its lower end so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction. is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure to close the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage or the main body side lower tray passage, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling can be prevented. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the open/close member 124 is pushed open by the receptacle provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage and the front door side upper tray passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage communicate with each other.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (the resin base 50 and the game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

Bearing metal fittings 132 are vertically arranged side by side on the rotation base end side of the back surface of the resin base 50 . Bearing portions are formed in the bearing metal fitting 132 so as to be vertically spaced apart, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

A plurality of locking metal fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking metal fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 arranged in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification/effect control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The notification/effect control device unit 142 includes a notification/effect control device 143 and a mounting base 144 , and the notification/effect control device 143 is mounted on the mounting base 144 .

The notification/effect control device 143 is equipped with a notification/effect control board that controls the voice, lamp display, and display control device in accordance with instructions from the main control device, which will be described later. It is configured to be accommodated in a board box 145 made of the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, a collective plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67 on the rear surface of the game board 60 . The gathering board 150 is provided with a game ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes, a detection mechanism for detecting entry of game balls into various winning holes, and the like.

To explain the game ball recovery mechanism, the assembly plate 150 is provided with recovery passages individually corresponding to various ball entry portions such as the general prize winning port 61 . These recovery passages descend along the back surface of the game board 60 from the ball-entering portions, and define the falling path of the game balls. Each recovery path joins near the lower end of the game board 60, and all the game balls that have passed through the ball entry part such as the general prize winning port 61 gather at the bottom of the game board 60 via the recovery path. becomes. An exit portion of each collection passage is opened downward, and a discharge passage, which will be described later, is provided on the tip side thereof (more specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered under the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. Incidentally, the out port 68 is similarly connected to the discharge passage, and game balls that do not win in any of the prize winning ports are led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

Describing the detection mechanism, the collective plate 150 is provided with detection sensors corresponding to various ball entry portions such as the general prize winning port 61 and the like. These various detection sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage connected to the ball entry portion such as the general prize winning port 61, and the game ball is dropped in a state where the falling path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects a game ball entering a ball entrance such as the general prize winning opening 61 by passing a game ball through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage. Specifically, a magnetic sensor is used to detect changes in the magnetic field that occur when a game ball passes through the detection area.

These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (more specifically, the main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these detection sensors are sent to the same main control device. It is configured to be output as The main controller unit 160 and its accompanying configuration will be described below.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the assembly plate 150 from the rear side, and is operated by a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is configured. The main control device 162 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a board box 163 made of, for example.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing portion as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner. It is designed to be inseparably joined. The sealing process by the sealing unit prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening should occur, such a situation can be detected early and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking pawl into at least one long hole of the plurality of sealing portions. When the circuit board box 163 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the main control circuit board housed therein, or when the main control circuit board is inspected, the connecting portion between the sealing portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing portion is removed. disconnect. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking pawl is inserted into the long hole of the other sealing portion. If the history of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is left in the circuit board box 163, it can be easily found that the circuit board box 163 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces correspond one-to-one with a plurality of connecting pieces formed on the mounting table 161, and sealing processing is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting table 161 by the connecting pieces and the connecting pieces. will be

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered with a back pack unit 15 from behind. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201 to which a payout mechanism 202, a discharge passage board and a controller assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 which protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. and The protective cover part 212 has a shape in which left and right sides and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67 .

An external terminal plate 213 is provided on the upper right portion of the base portion 211 . Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal plate 213, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. Also, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latching pins at the right end as viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the latching pins are inserted into the bearing metal fittings 132 (specifically, the bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, a fastener for fastening to a hole to be fastened provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the tip of the rotation of the base portion 211, and the fastener is fitted into the hole to be fastened. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 .

A payout mechanism part 202 is arranged on the base part 211 so as to bypass the protective cover part 212 . The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged on the top of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. be. A tank rail gently sloping downstream is connected to the lower portion of the tank 221, and a vertically extending case rail is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A dispensing device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution section provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 222 .

The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or a discharge passage to be described later, and the inner opening is the main body side described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper tray 33 via the upper tray passage and the front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage. .

As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage board and control device aggregate unit 204 is attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and rear direction. The discharge passage board 203 has a rearwardly open discharge passage formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204 , and the opening of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204 . The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facilities of the game hall, etc., and the game balls drawn out from the collection passage or the like to the discharge passage pass through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Ejected.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base, on which a payout control device 181 and a power supply/launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply/launch control device 191 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is accommodated in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box. For example, when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispenser 222, pressing the state recovery switch will clear the ball clogging.

The power supply/emission control device 191 has a power supply/emission control board housed in a board box. The launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle 41 is controlled. Also, the power/fire control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. The pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure is retained, and upon recovery from the power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be restored. It's becoming Therefore, if the power is cut off in the normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the cutoff is stored, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data will be initialized. It has become.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

A main control board 601 provided in the main controller 162 is equipped with an MPU 602 . The MPU 602 includes a ROM 603 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 602, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 603. A RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated. A part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the functions of the ROM 603 and the functions of the RAM 604 may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 602 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 605 provided in the main controller 162, a payout controller 181, various detection sensors, and the like. The power supply/emission control device 191 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605 , and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605 . In addition, as part of the various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for the general winning opening 61, a detection sensor 391b for the first operation opening 62, a detection sensor 391c for the second operation opening 63, and a detection for the third operation opening 64 A sensor 391d, a detection sensor 391e for the through gate 35, and a detection sensor 391f for the variable winning device 65 are connected. The MPU 602 executes the winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry section. In addition, the MPU 602 executes a jackpot generation lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63 and the third operating port 64, and executes the support generating lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35. do.

The output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 605, the payout control device 181 and the notification/production control device 143 (more specifically, the notification/production control board 651). A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181, for example, based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When the winning to the general winning opening 61 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the big winning opening 65a is specified, 15 game balls are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of is output, and when the winning to the first operation port 62 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and to the second operation port 63 When the winning is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the third operation port 64 is specified, the prize ball corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output. command is output.

In the notification / production control device 143, various production commands for special figures such as variation commands, type commands, fluctuation end commands, opening commands and ending commands related to special game times, variation commands related to normal game times, Production commands for various normal drawings such as a type command, a variation end command, an opening command and an ending command are output. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various types of information are included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 602, there are a variable prize winning drive unit 65c for opening and closing the opening/closing door 65b of the variable prize winning device 65, driving units 244 and 246 for opening and closing the electric accessory 66 of the second operation port 63, and a main display unit. 43 and a character object display unit 44 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 65c in the variable winning device 65 so that the big winning opening 65a is opened and closed. In addition, display control of the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS in the main display portion 43 of the main display unit 81 is executed in the MPU 602 at each special figure game round. When the normal figure game is played, the MPU 602 executes display control of the accessory display unit 44, and when the electric accessory 66 is in a support state in which the electric accessory 66 is elected in the open state, the accessory display unit 44 is in the support state. Display control indicating winning is executed.

Furthermore, an external terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602 . The external terminal plate 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal upon state transition. The MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal through a jackpot signal output terminal to the management control device on the game hall side when the game results in a jackpot result. Specifically, normally, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and a HI level signal is output when a jackpot result is obtained. Note that the output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The blackout monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power supply/launch control device 191, and also monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 191, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162 .

The power supply/launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 601, the payout control device 181, etc., generate the necessary operating power for each, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do.

The power/shooting control device 191 controls the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 110, and the game ball shooting mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. More specifically, an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball shooting handle 41 are connected to the power/shooting control device 191 . The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) of the game ball shooting handle 41. Based on the information from this operation level detection sensor, the game ball shooting intensity (shooting speed) of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is determined. ) will be determined. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player touches the game ball shooting handle 41, and the power/shooting control device 191 detects when the player touches the game ball shooting handle 41 based on this information. It is configured to be able to grasp whether or not When it is determined that the player is touching the game ball shooting handle 41 based on the information from the touch sensor and the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball shooting handle 41 is being operated, the game ball is shot. will be allowed.

Information from the touch sensor is transmitted to the main control device 162 , the notification/production control device 143 , and the display control device 660 via the power/emission control device 191 .

The notification/production control device 143 has a notification/production control board 651 on which an MPU 652 is mounted. A RAM 614, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the above, is incorporated.

The notification/production control device 143 drives and controls the lamp portions 26 to 28 and the speaker portion 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and controls the display control device 660. It is. More specifically, in the notification/production control device 143, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the pattern display device 75 changes the pattern display mode and the pattern stop display mode (for example, the pattern is stopped). The type of combination) is determined, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the content of reach effect, and the like are determined, and the determined content is added to the above command and transferred to the display control device 660 .

The display control device 660 has a display control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU stores various control programs and fixed value data in a ROM, and various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM. etc., a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM storing image data, a video RAM temporarily storing image data read from the character ROM, etc. there is The MPU executes display control of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the pattern display device 75) based on the command input from the notification/effect control device 143. FIG.

Here, the display contents of the pattern display device 75 will be described. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, three symbol rows of left, middle and right are set. On the display screen 75a, the symbols in each symbol row are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) with periodicity.

In addition, the display screen 75a is designed to stop-display one symbol for each symbol row, so that a total of three symbols are stopped-displayed. The variable display stops in the order of the left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row, and when the variable display of all symbol rows is completed in a state in which a predetermined symbol combination is formed on the active line, the result of the jackpot or special win will be determined. A moving image or the like showing transition to the corresponding special game state is displayed.

Considering that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the left symbol row is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the right symbol row is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). row), and the middle symbol row can be called a third symbol row (or third symbol row).

By the way, the pattern display device 75 is not limited to the above-described pattern variable display mode, and is arbitrary, and includes the number of pattern rows, the direction of pattern variable display in the pattern row, the number of symbols in each pattern row, and the like. can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be arranged vertically, and the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows may be set in the horizontal direction.

A pending display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. The reservation display area is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit reservation display areas as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball wins the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63 are arranged in the left and right direction. It consists of a number display area.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63, the maximum number of reservations is four. In the pending number display area, a first unit pending display area, a second unit pending display area, a third unit pending display area, and a fourth unit pending display area are set. For example, when the number of reserved game balls when winning the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63 is one, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area, and the game is played. When the number of reservations when the ball wins the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63 is 4, the predetermined reservation image is displayed in all of the first unit reservation display area to the fourth unit reservation display area. It is configured to be displayed.

<About various counters>
Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 7, the configuration relating to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

During the game, the MPU 602 uses various counter information to set the lottery for transition to the special game state, set the display of the main display unit 81 (main display section 43), set the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 75, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of a big win or a special win, a winning type counter C2 used to determine the type of winning (more specifically, a big winning), and a symbol. The reach random number counter C3 used for the generation of the reach display when the display device 75 is lost and fluctuating, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the win random number counter C1, and the main display section 43 of the main display unit 81 and a variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 75 and the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 75 . Furthermore, an open random number counter C4 used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 66 should be placed in the support state (open state), and a general controller for determining the variable display time of the pattern in the accessory display section 44 of the main display unit 81. A figure fluctuation type counter C5 is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4, and C5 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 641 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604 . In the lottery counter buffer 641, information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS is sent to the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, or the third operating port 64. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 as acquired information storage means.

In the reserved ball storage area 642, there is a first result display section reserved area Ra for storing reserved information based on the winning of the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63, and a first special figure execution area AE1. is provided. The reservation area Ra for the first result display section includes a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, and a fourth area Ra4, and a winning history to the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63. At the same time, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 641 is stored in one of the areas as reserved information. . Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4, when the winning to the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→ Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. By providing four areas in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 are reserved and stored.

The first special figure execution area AE1 is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area Ra when starting the variable display of the main display unit 43. At the start of the game round, a winning/failing determination is made based on various numerical information stored in the first special figure execution area AE1. The reservation information stored in the first special figure execution area AE1 is erased when the game round being executed and the open/close execution mode based on it are terminated.

Further, in the reserved ball storage area 642, a second special figure execution area AE2 is provided as an area for storing the reserved information based on the winning to the third operation port 64. In the second special figure execution area AE2, when the winning to the third operation port 64 occurs, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS is displayed on the second special figure side Stored as pending information. Using these stored reservation information, the success or failure determination and allocation determination of one game round related to the second special figure are performed. The pending information stored in the second special figure execution area AE2 is erased when the game cycle being executed and the opening/closing execution mode based thereon are terminated.

In this embodiment, since it is configured not to reserve the number of winnings for the winning to the third operating port 64, the third operating port 64 during execution of the second special figure game round and the opening and closing execution mode based on it Even if a new winning prize is generated, the pending information is not stored in the second special figure execution area AE2. That is, the second special figure execution area AE2 is configured to store each of the above numerical information only once. Therefore, in the execution area AE2, reservation information is stored only when a prize is won in the third operation port 64 in a situation where the game round on the second special figure side and the opening and closing execution mode based on it are not performed. will be In the second special figure execution area AE2, it is possible to perform right/wrong judgment based on the reservation information and erase the reservation information independently of the first special figure execution area AE1.

Furthermore, the total reservation number storage area is provided in the reservation ball storage area 642, and in the total reservation number storage area, the number of holding and storing the winning history of the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63 Information for specifying is stored.

More specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "199" and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=“0” to “199”). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation holes 62-64. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63, and the timing when the game ball wins the third operation port 64. is stored in the second special figure execution area AE2 of the RAM 604.

Random number values for jackpot winnings and random number values for special winnings are stored as win/fail tables (win/fail information groups) in win/fail table storage area 621 as win/fail information group storage means in ROM 603 . Here, the contents of the success/failure table will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the first special figure (see FIG. 8) and a success/failure table for the second special figure (see FIG. 9) are provided. In the lottery based on the ball entering the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, the success or failure table for the first special figure is referred, and in the lottery based on the entering ball into the third operating port 64, the second special figure The success/failure table for is referred to.

In the success/failure table for the first special figure that is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. is one. That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 ranging from "0" to "199", "7" corresponds to the result of a big win, and the probability of winning a big win is 1/200. In the low-probability mode corresponding success/failure table for the first special figure, there is no random number value corresponding to the special winning result (so-called small winning), and the lottery result is out except for the random number value that becomes the big winning result. correspond to the results.

In the success/failure table for the first special figure, which is referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 11". That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 ranging from "0" to "199", "7" to "11" correspond to the result of the big win, and the probability of winning the big win is 5/200. The high-probability mode correspondence table for the first special figure does not have a random number value corresponding to the special winning result, and other than the random number value that becomes the big winning result, the lottery result is out. there is

In the success/failure table for the second special figure that is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. is one. That is, "7" among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of "0 to 199" corresponds to the result of a big win, and the probability of winning a big win is 1/200. In the success/failure table for the second special figure, ``0'' to ``6'' and ``12'' to ``198'' correspond to special winning results, and the probability of special winning results is 194/200. . It should be noted that the lottery result is set to be a losing result except for the random number values that result in the big win result and the random number values that result in the special win result.

In the success/failure table for the second special figure, which is referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 11". That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 ranging from "0" to "199", "7" to "11" correspond to the result of the big win, and the probability of winning the big win is 5/200. In the success/failure table for the second special figure, ``0'' to ``6'' and ``12'' to ``198'' correspond to special winning results, and the probability of special winning results is 194/200. . That is, regardless of whether the lottery mode is the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode, the probability of a special winning result in the win/loss determination based on the winning to the third operation opening 64 is the same. It should be noted that the lottery result is set to be a losing result except for the random number values that result in the big win result and the random number values that result in the special win result.

In this way, the probability of winning a big win is the same regardless of whether the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 or the third operating port 64 is won. However, when comparing the first working port 62 or the second working port 63 with the third working port 64, the third working port 64 is set to have a higher possibility of a special winning result. In other words, the third working opening 64 is given preferential treatment over the first working opening 62 or the second working opening 63 in terms of the probability that a certain number of balls can be expected to come out.

Returning to the description of FIG. 7 again, the win type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0" to "99" and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). there is Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of big winning results are set by providing different lottery modes in the win/fail lottery means after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in the present embodiment, although the electric accessory 66 is provided, the function of the high-frequency support mode (so-called electric chew support mode or time saving game state) that shifts when the opening and closing execution mode ends is not provided.

The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation openings 62-64. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63, and the timing when the game ball wins the third operation port 64. is stored in the second special figure execution area AE2 of the RAM 604.

The distribution destination of the game result for the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 622 as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603 . In this embodiment, 16R normal jackpot results and 16R variable jackpot results are set as the types of jackpot results. All of these jackpot results have 16 rounds to be executed, but the 16R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning/failure lottery mode is a low probability mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the 16R probability variable jackpot result. is a jackpot result in which the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In the present embodiment, both the probability of being assigned to the 16R normal jackpot result and the probability of being assigned to the 16R variable variable jackpot result are both set to 50%.

The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball enters the operating holes 62-64. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63, and the timing when the game ball wins the third operation port 64. is stored in the second special figure execution area AE2 of the RAM 604. Based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603, it is determined whether or not to generate the reach display (reach state).

Here, the ready-to-win display is provided with a pattern display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and the game result is a game result corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. In a gaming machine in which a stop display result after display can be a special display result, after the start of variable display (or variable display) of patterns (pictures) on the pattern display device 75, before the stop display result is derived and displayed, This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established. It is a display state in which possible combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in this state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step prior to ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established on a preset effective line in the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying combinations of possible ready-to-win patterns, and to perform variable display of patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

The contents displayed on the display screen 75a will be explained in more detail. First, when the variable display of symbols in the left symbol row is finished, and then the variable display of symbols in the right symbol row is finished, the player hits one of the effective lines and the symbols are displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols to which the numbers that make up the combination are attached. displayed. When a big win occurs, the main patterns forming the reach line and the main patterns attached with the numbers forming the combination of the winning patterns are stopped and displayed on the reach line to display the patterns in the middle pattern row in a variable manner. is terminated.

In addition, in the ready-to-win display, while the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. Rendering is performed, and a ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a after reducing or hiding the combination of ready-to-win symbols. Also, when the ready-to-win display is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. may

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS calculates the variation display time of the pattern in the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS of the main display unit 81 (main display portion 43) and the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 75. It is used for making decisions in the MPU 602 . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS (at the start of variation of the symbols by the symbol display device 75).

In the lottery counter buffer 641, the information corresponding to the open random number counter C4 and the general pattern fluctuation type counter C5 is stored in the electric officer holding area as the acquired information storage means on the general pattern side when winning to the through gate 35 occurs. 643.

The electrician reservation area 643 includes an electrician reservation area Rc and a general map execution area AE3. The electrical reservation area Rc includes a first area Rc1, a second area Rc2, a third area Rc3, and a fourth area Rc4. Each numerical value information of the open random number counter C4 and the normal figure fluctuation type counter C5 is stored in one of the areas as reserved information.

In this case, in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4, when winning to the through gate 35 occurs multiple times in a row, the first area Rc1→second area Rc2→third area Rc3→fourth area Each numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Rc4. By providing four areas in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored.

The normal figure execution area AE3 is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Rc1 of the reservation area Rc when starting the variable display of the character object display unit 44. At the start of the game round, based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE3 for normal figure, open determination and the like are performed.

For details about each counter on the general map side, the open random number counter C4 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric work holding area 643 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a general pattern success or failure lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 66 to the open state based on the stored value of the open random number counter C4.

The value of the random number resulting in the opening of the electric accessory 66 is stored as a general figure right/wrong table (right/wrong information group) in the right/wrong table storage area 621 as a right/wrong information group storage means in the ROM 603 . Here, the contents of the normal figure right/wrong table will be described.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in the general-purpose right/wrong table, there are 999 random numbers from "0" to "998" corresponding to the opening result. That is, among the values of the open random number counter C4 ranging from "0" to "999", "0" to "998" correspond to the open result, and the probability of the open result is 999/1000. In other words, the probability of an open result is set to about 1/1, and most of the game ball winnings to the through gate 35 are linked to the open result that the electric accessary 66 shifts to the support state. there is

Here, in the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 66 in the support state, the opening/closing of the electric accessory 66 is performed once. Specifically, the electric accessory 66 is opened only once from the start to the end of the support state, and the opening continues for 0.1 sec or until the electric accessory 66 (second operation port 63) wins. Continue until the number reaches 5.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the game ball shooting handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is driven so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PE every 0.6 seconds. controlled. In other words, the open period of the electric accessory 66 is shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, even if the electric accessory 66 is opened, the game ball does not necessarily win the second operation opening 63, and the opening timing of the electric accessory 66 and the arrival of the game ball to the electric accessory 66 (specific area RA2) Only when the timing is well matched, the prize will be awarded. In addition, since the opening period is set to a very short period of 0.1 sec, even if a prize is won, it is extremely difficult for a plurality of prizes to be won. In other words, although up to five prizes are internally permitted, the number of prizes to be won into the second operating port 63 in the support state is substantially limited to one.

By the way, the normal pattern opening period, which is a waiting period until the electric accessory 66 is switched to the open state after the end of the normal pattern game round, is set to 0 sec. For this reason, if the result of the general pattern winning lottery is the open result, after the end of the general pattern game round (more specifically, after the end of the stop display time in the general pattern game round), the electric accessary 66 is controlled to be opened immediately. be. In addition, after the electric accessary 66 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the normal ending period, which is a waiting period until the next normal game round is started, is set to 0 sec. Therefore, if the normal pattern reservation information is stored in the first area Rc1 of the electric service reservation area Rc, the next normal pattern game round is started immediately after the electric accessory 66 is switched to the closed state. . It should be noted that at the closing timing of the electric accessory 66, that is, at the end timing of the support state, if the normal pattern reservation information is not stored in the first area Rc1, the normal pattern is displayed until the next winning to the through gate 35 occurs. The game round does not start.

No lottery results other than the opening result and the losing result are set in the normal figure success/failure table, and the value other than the random number value that becomes the opening result corresponds to the losing result. However, as already explained, the probability that the result of the winning lottery will be open is set to 999/1000. It should be noted that this normal figure success/failure table is commonly used when the success/failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

Normal figure fluctuation type counter C5 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 999, and has a configuration that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). The general pattern fluctuation type counter C5 is used in the MPU 602 to determine the fluctuation display time of the general pattern in the character product display section 44 of the main display unit 81 . The normal figure fluctuation type counter C5 is updated once each time the normal process described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter C5 is acquired when determining the fluctuation display time at the start of the fluctuation display in the character product display unit 44.

The distribution destination of the normal pattern fluctuation display time for the normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5 is stored as a normal pattern fluctuation display time table (variation display time information group) in the distribution table storage area 622 as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603 It is As the normal pattern fluctuation display time table, the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 10 (b)) and the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 10 (c)) is provided.

In the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. It is defined. Specifically, when the number FN of reserved memory for normal patterns is 1 to 3 and when the number of reserved memory for normal patterns FN is 4 (upper limit number), the selectable variable display time and the number of types , and the mode of selection thereof are different. It should be noted that the case where the normal map pending storage number FN is 4 means the case where the normal map pending information is stored in all of the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 in the electric service holding area Rc.

If the normal pattern pending memory number FN is 1 to 3, two types of 0.05 sec and 10 sec are prepared as selectable fluctuation display times, and one of those fluctuation display times is the normal pattern fluctuation type It is selected and set according to the value of the counter C5. Specifically, when the normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5 is "0" to "998", the fluctuation display time is set to 0.05 sec, and when the normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5 is "999", The variable display time is set to 10 sec. That is, the probability that the variable display time is 0.05 sec is 999/1000, and the probability that it is 10 sec is 1/1000. In other words, when the number FN of reserved memory for normal patterns is 1 to 3, the fluctuation display time for normal patterns is set to 0.05 sec, which is mostly short-term fluctuations, and is rarely set to 10 sec, which is long-term fluctuations. be done.

On the other hand, when the number of normal-pattern pending memories FN is four, one type of 0.6 sec is prepared as a selectable variable display time. That is, when the number of normal pattern pending storage FN is 4, regardless of the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5, the fluctuation display time of 0.6 sec is always selected and set.

In addition, the stop display time (fixed display period) in the general game round, that is, the duration of the state in which the general figure is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the general figure success or failure lottery, regardless of the length of the variable display time It is set to 0.4 sec uniformly.

On the other hand, in the normal figure fluctuation display time table for the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10(b), one type of 20.0 sec is prepared as a selectable fluctuation display time. That is, when the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, regardless of the value of the general pattern variation type counter C5, the variation display time of 20.0 sec is always selected and set. The stop display time in the high-probability mode is uniformly set to 0.4 sec as in the low-probability mode.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by MPU 602 of Main Control Unit 162>
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing which are executed in advancing the game in each game round by the MPU 602 in the main control device 162 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 602 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). , the description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 602 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors, for example (the detection sensors 391a to 391f) is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first working opening 62, the winning detection flag for the first working opening is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 604, and the ball entering the second working opening 63 is stored. When it is determined that has occurred, the winning detection flag for the second operating port is stored in the same various flag storage area, and when it is determined that the ball has entered the third operating port 64, the same various types of storage are stored. A winning detection flag for the third operation opening is stored in the flag storage area. Also, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35, a prize winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various storage flag storage area.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604 .

In the subsequent step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM604.

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 35 is executed. After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in this step S105, the winning process for the operating ball part accompanying the winning to the operating openings 62 to 64 is executed, and this timer interrupt process exit. The winning process for through and the winning process for working opening will be described in detail below.

<Prize processing for through>
First, with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 12, the winning process for through will be described.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (winning a prize). When it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35, the prize winning process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the ball has entered the through gate 35, in step S202, an external signal is sent to output information indicating that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 to the management control device on the gaming hall side. Perform setting processing.

In step S203, read out the value stored in the holding number storage area for storing the number of normal drawing reservation information in the electric service holding area Rc, the normal drawing reservation storage number FN is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) It is determined whether or not. When the negative determination is made in step S203, the winning processing is terminated as it is, and when the affirmative determination is made in step S203, the normal pattern reservation storage number FN is incremented by 1 in step S204. Then, in step S205, the process of storing the values of the open random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter C5 is performed, and then the winning process is terminated.

<Winning process for working mouth>
Next, the prize winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

In step S301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first operation opening 62 (winning a prize). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first operating port 62, the process proceeds to step S302, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls is set.

In the following step S303, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is read, and the first special figure start-up stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra is held and stored. Set the number of reserved memories RaN. In step S304, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side of information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating hole 62. FIG. After that, in step S305, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is performed, and the winning process ends.

In the information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not the starting hold storage number RaN set in step S303 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). 1 increments the number N of start-up reserve storage in the reserve area Ra. Then, each value of the winning random number counter C1 and the like is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first result display section reservation area Ra. If the starting pending memory number RaN is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated without incrementing the starting pending memory number N and storing the winning random number counter C1 and other values.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not entered the first operation opening 62, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second operation opening 63 in step S306. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operation hole 63, the process proceeds to step S307, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out 10 game balls is set. After that, the processes of steps S303 to S305 are executed, and the winning process ends.

If it is determined in step S306 that the game ball has not entered the second operation opening 63, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the third operation opening 64 in step S308. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the third operating port 64, the process proceeds to step S309, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out one game ball is set. After that, the processes of steps S304 and S305 are executed, and the winning process ends. In addition, in the information acquisition process of step S305, when each value of the random number counter C1 etc. is already stored in the execution area AE2 for the second special figure, the information acquisition process is performed without changing (overwriting) those values. finish.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S308, that is, if the ball does not enter any of the operation holes 62 to 64, the winning process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S401 to S408 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S409 and S410 is executed during the remaining time.

In the normal process, in step S401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181 . In addition, when command for special figure such as command for fluctuation, type command, command for end of fluctuation and production command for general figure are set, it is transmitted to notification/production control device 143 . Also, according to the information set in the external output buffer of the RAM 604, the output setting for the external terminal board 213 is performed.

Next, in step S402, update of the fluctuation type counter CS and the normal figure fluctuation type counter C5 is executed. Specifically, each variation type counter CS, C5 is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 604. FIG.

In the subsequent step S403, a game round control process is executed to advance the game of each game round. In this game round control process, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is won and the distribution of the jackpot type are performed, and the setting of the fluctuation display of the pattern by the pattern display device 75 and the result display portion AS in the main display unit 81 (main display portion 43) are performed. , BS, etc. are displayed.

Thereafter, in step S404, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the like by this game state transition processing.

In the following step S405, an electric role support process for controlling the game in the normal game round is executed. In this electric role support process, the support determination on the normal figure side, the setting of the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display device 75, the display control of the accessory display unit 44, the electric accessory 66 provided in the second operation port 63 drive control, etc.

Thereafter, in step S406, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, on the condition that a shooting permission signal output from the power/shooting control device 191 is input based on the shooting operation being performed on the game ball shooting handle 41, a predetermined The solenoid 111 of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is excited once during the shooting period (0.6 sec in this embodiment). As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area. In other words, when irregular hitting such as so-called stop hitting is not performed, the shooting operation of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle on the condition that the shooting operation is performed.

In the following step S407, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM604. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when power failure occurrence is confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 605 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602, and is cleared in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. That is, while performing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI in step S409, in step S410 update of the variation type counter CS and normal figure variation type counter C5 is performed.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The fluctuation type counters CS and C5 can also be updated randomly.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S407 that the power failure flag has been set, it means that a power failure has occurred, so the power failure processing from step S411 onwards is executed. That is, in step S411, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then in step S412, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and in step S413, access to the RAM 604 is prohibited, and then the power supply is completely cut off. continues in an infinite loop until it can no longer run.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 15 to 21, the game round control processing in step S403 will be additionally explained. As shown in FIG. 15, in the game round control process shown in the present embodiment, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag (opening/closing execution state information) is stored in the opening/closing execution mode flag storage area (opening/closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 . do. The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S501, this game round control process is terminated as it is. When a negative determination is made in step S501, the game round control processing (first special figure control processing) for the game round relating to the winning of the first operation opening 62 or the second operation opening 63 is performed in step S502. After executing and executing the game round control process (second special figure control process) for the game round relating to the winning to the third operation port 64 in step S503, this game round control process is terminated. These two control processes have a common basic flow. 16 to 19, the first special figure control processing will be described below, and then the second special figure control processing will be described with reference to FIGS. The special figure control processing will be described.

<Control processing for the first special figure>
As shown in FIG. 16, in the first special figure control process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress with respect to the first operating opening 62 or the second operating opening 63 (first special figure). judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first result display portion AS of the main display unit 81 is between variable display and fixed display, that is, whether or not one game is being executed. In addition, this determination is performed by storing (storing) the variable display flag (variable display information) for the first special figure in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not The flag during variable display for the first special figure is stored when the variable display is started in the first result display portion AS, and is erased when the pattern is stopped and the fixed display ends.

If it is not during the game rotation related to the first special figure, a negative determination is made in step S601, and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress with respect to the third operating port 64 (second special figure). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second result display portion BS of the main display unit 81 is in the process of variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game is being executed. In this determination, the variable display flag (variable display information) for the second special figure is stored (stored) in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not The flag during variable display for the second special figure is stored when the variable display is started in the second result display part BS, and the pattern etc. corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is stopped and the fixed display is finished. is erased when

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the second special figure corresponds to the jackpot result. When an affirmative determination is made in step S603, the control processing for the first special figure is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S603 or step S602, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, with reference to the total pending number storage area of the pending ball storage area 642, it is determined whether or not the number of pending information related to the first special figure is "0". When the number of pending information related to the first special figure is "0", the control processing for the first special figure is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of pending information related to the first special figure is not "0", the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process related to the first special figure, first, the number of pending information related to the first special figure is decremented by one. After that, the data stored in the first area of the first result display portion reservation area Ra is moved to the first special figure execution area AE1, and the data stored in the storage area of the first result display portion reservation area Ra Execute the process of shifting the

This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, and so on. Then, one of the LEDs in the pending number display portion AM in the main display portion 43 is turned off.

After performing the data setting process, in step S606, the first special figure variation start process ( After executing the first special figure fluctuation start process), the first special figure control process is terminated. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the first special figure fluctuation start process of step S606 will be described.

<First special figure fluctuation start process>
In the first special figure fluctuation start process, first, in step S701, the propriety determination process is executed. In the success/failure determination process, referring to the success/failure table for the first special figure (see FIG. 8), the information for the success/failure determination among the information stored in the first special figure execution area AE1, that is, from the hit random number counter C1 It is determined whether or not the acquired numerical information matches the above-described jackpot numerical information. In step S701, when the current success/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 8(b)) pertaining to the first special figure, and the high probability If it is not the mode, that is, if it is the low-probability mode, the propriety determination is performed with reference to the propriety table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 8(a)) pertaining to the first special figure. When the determination result in step S701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S703, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, among the information stored in the first special figure execution area AE1, the information for type determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. In addition, referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, whether the grasped information for type determination corresponds to the information corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot result, or the 16R normal jackpot Identify what corresponds to the result.

In step S704, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 43 (first result display section AS) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is selected from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 603. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604 . A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 are set in the stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S704, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM604. Further, in step S704, information for specifying whether the current game result is the 16R probability variable jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result in the MPU602 is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM604. Specifically, in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot result, a 16R probability variable flag is stored, and in the case of a 16R normal jackpot result, a 16R normal flag is stored.

After executing the setting process in step S704, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the game round relating to the second special figure is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, the second forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. FIG. The second forced termination flag is a flag indicating that the variable display of the second special figure should be terminated forcibly.

Returning to the description of step S702, if the determination result in step S701 is an outlier, a negative determination is made in step S702, and the process proceeds to step S707. In step S707, a stop result setting process for the deviation result is executed. Specifically, the first special figure (picture) to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion 43 (first result display portion AS) of the main display unit 81 in the game turn related to the start of this variation is stored in the ROM 603 in advance. It is specified from the stored stop result table for outlier results, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604 .

After executing the processing of steps S706 and S707, or when a negative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S708. In step S708, processing for setting a variable display time (display continuation period) is executed. Here, the processing for setting the variable display time will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the variable display time setting process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high-probability mode flag (high-probability state information) is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 . The high-probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening/closing execution mode related to the occurrence of any probability variable jackpot result, and is erased when the normal jackpot result occurs after that.

It is not the high probability mode, that is, if it is determined to be the low probability mode, in step S802, the first special figure fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 to acquire the change display time corresponding to the current value of the change type counter CS. In the first special figure fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. The relationship between the normal figure fluctuation type counter C5 and the fluctuation display time is defined in association with the result of the winning lottery so that the fluctuation display time is 3 to 20 seconds. Specifically, if the current game cycle corresponds to the ready-to-win display, it will be 16 to 20 seconds, and if it does not correspond to the ready-to-win display, it will be 3 to 8 seconds. In addition, when it does not correspond to the reach display, the variable display time becomes shorter as the number of pending information of the first special figure increases. As a result, smooth progress of the game is achieved.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, when the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S803, the first special figure fluctuation display for the high probability mode stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 623 By referring to the time table, the change display time corresponding to the current value of the change type counter CS is acquired. In the first special figure fluctuation display time table for the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. ~20 sec. However, if the current lottery result is a lost result, the variable display time is set to 3600 seconds, which is much longer than in the low probability mode.

After execution of steps S802 and S803, in step S804, the variable display times obtained in steps S802 and S803 are set in variable display time counter areas provided in various counter areas 633 of RAM 604. FIG. The value of the variable display time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started. After that, the variable display time setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the first special figure variation start processing in FIG. 17, after the execution of step S708, the command for variation and the type command are set in step S709. The variation command and the type command contain information indicating that these commands correspond to the first special figure. The command for variation and the type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the notification/production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The notification/effect control device 143 determines the contents of the effect in the special figure game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. . The content of this effect includes the variable display mode of the symbols on the symbol display device 75 . In addition, the variation command is transmitted to the display control device 660 via the notification / effect control device 143, and the display control device 660 receives the variation command, so that the pattern corresponding to the special figure game round The pattern display device 75 is controlled so that the variable display is performed.

The variable command includes information on the variable display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time when the reach display is supported is different from the variable display time when the reach display is not supported, so the variable command includes information on whether the reach has occurred. Even if not, it is possible to specify the presence or absence of reach generation from the information of the variable display time in the notification / effect control device 143 which is a control device on the sub side. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach occurrence.

After executing the setting process of step S709, the process proceeds to step S710, and after starting the variable display of the first result display portion AS in the main display unit 81, this first special figure variable start process ends. In the process of step S710, the variable display flag for the first special figure is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM604. As a result, it becomes possible to specify that the game round (for example, variable display) relating to the first special figure is being executed in subsequent processes.

Returning to the description of FIG. 16, when the affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, when it is determined that the game is in the middle of the game according to the first special figure, the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variable display time set in step S708 of FIG. 17 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S607, it is determined in step S608 whether or not the first forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. FIG. The first forced termination flag is a flag indicating that the variable display relating to the first special figure should be forcibly terminated, and in the case where the game round relating to the second special figure corresponds to the jackpot result or the special winning result. It is stored when there is and the game round relating to the second special figure is started during execution of the game round relating to the first special figure (see step S1106 in FIG. 21 to be described later).

If the first forced termination flag is not stored, after executing the variable display processing in step S609, the first special figure control processing is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S608, that is, if the first forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604, then in step S610, a special hit is made in the game round related to the second special figure. It is determined whether or not it is time to stop display the pattern corresponding to the result. When a negative determination is made in step S610, it is determined in step S611 whether or not it is the game round related to the second special figure and the start timing of the game round corresponding to the big hit result. If a negative determination is made in step S611, the process advances to step S609 to execute the variable display process.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S610 or step S611, fluctuation end processing is executed in step S612. In the fluctuation ending process, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed in the first result display section AS in a manner determined in advance. That is, for example, the final display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is executed. It should be noted that the variable display flag for the first special figure stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 is erased when the final display is completed.

After setting the fluctuation end command in the following step S613, the first special figure control processing is terminated. The fluctuation end command set at step S613 is transmitted to the notification/production control device 143 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The notification/effect control device 143 executes processing for ending the effect in the game round based on the reception of the fluctuation end command. In addition, the fluctuation end command is transmitted to the display control device 660 via the notification/production control device 143, and the display control device 660 receives the fluctuation end command, and responds to the game results of the game round. The symbol combination obtained is determined and displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. - 特許庁In addition, without transmitting the fluctuation end command, the notification/effect control device 143 or the display control device 660 may end the effect for the game cycle independently.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S607, that is, if the variation display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S612, and the variation end processing and the variation end command setting processing in step S613 are sequentially performed. 1 End the special figure control process.

<Second Special Figure Control Processing>
Next, with reference to FIG.20 and FIG.21, the control processing for 2nd special figures is demonstrated.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the second special figure control process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a game round relating to the third operation opening 64 (second special figure) is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second result display portion BS of the main display unit 81 is in the process of variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game is being executed. In this determination, the variable display flag (variable display information) for the second special figure is stored (stored) in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not The flag during variable display for the second special figure is stored when the variable display is started in the second result display section BS, and is erased when the pattern is stopped and the fixed display ends.

If it is not during the game round related to the second special figure, a negative determination is made in step S901 and the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the game is in the middle of a game round relating to the first special figure. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first result display portion AS of the main display unit 81 is between variable display and fixed display, that is, whether or not one game is being executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the first special figure corresponds to the big hit result. If the affirmative determination is made in step S903, the control processing for the second special figure is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S903 or if a negative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the second special figure pending information (each value of the hit random number counter C1, etc.) is stored in the second special figure execution area AE2 of the pending ball storage area 642. When the hold information of the second special figure is stored in the execution area AE2 for the second special figure, the control processing for the second special figure is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when the pending information of the second special figure is not stored in the execution area AE2 for the second special figure, the process proceeds to step S905. In step S905, data setting processing is performed. In the data setting process, the process of setting the pending information stored in the second execution area AE2 as the pending information for judging whether the game is right or wrong is performed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when a prize is won in the second operation opening 63, processing equivalent to the data setting processing described above is performed, so this processing can be omitted.

In the subsequent step S906, the variation start processing for the second special figure for starting the variation display of the pattern in the second result display unit BS and the variation display of the pattern in the pattern display device 75 (the variation start processing for the second special figure) After executing, this second special figure control process is terminated. Here, with reference to FIG. 21, the second special figure fluctuation start process of step S906 will be described.

<Second Special Figure Fluctuation Start Processing>
In the second special figure fluctuation start process, first, in step S1101, the propriety determination process is executed. In the success/failure determination process, with reference to the success/failure table for the second special figure (see FIG. 9), the information for the success/failure determination among the various information stored in the execution area AE2 for the second special figure, that is, the hit random number counter C1 matches the above-mentioned jackpot numerical information. In step S1101, if the current success/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 9(b)) pertaining to the second special figure, and the high probability If it is not the mode, that is, if it is the low-probability mode, the propriety determination is performed with reference to the propriety table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 9(a)) according to the second special figure. When the determination result in step S1101 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1102 and the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1103, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, the information for type determination among the various information stored in the second special figure execution area AE2, that is, the numerical information obtained from the hit type counter C2, and the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603. With reference to the distribution table, it is specified whether the grasped information for type determination corresponds to the information corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result.

In step S1104, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 43 (second result display section BS) of the main display unit 81 in the game cycle is selected from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 603. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604 . A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 are set in the stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S1104, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM604. Also, in step S1104, information for specifying whether the current game result is a 16R probability variable jackpot result or a 16R normal jackpot result in the MPU 602 is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM604. Specifically, in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot result, a 16R probability variable flag is stored, and in the case of a 16R normal jackpot result, a 16R normal flag is stored.

After executing the setting process in step S1104, the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the game round relating to the first special figure is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the first forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. FIG. The first forced termination flag is a flag indicating that the variable display of the first special figure should be terminated forcibly.

Returning to the description of step S1102, when the determination result in step S1101 is a special winning result, a negative determination is made in step S1102 and an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, and the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, a stop result setting process for special winning results is executed. Specifically, the stop result table for the special winning result in which the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion 43 (second result display portion BS) of the main display unit 81 in the game cycle is stored in advance in the ROM 603. , and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604 . A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 are set in the stop result table for the special winning result, and in step S1108, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the special winning result is stored in the RAM 604 . Incidentally, when the current game result is a special winning result, a special winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 . After executing the process of step S1108, the processes of steps S1105 and S1106 described above are executed.

If the determination result in step S1101 is an outlier, negative determinations are made in steps S1102 and S1107, and the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, stop result setting processing for the deviation result is executed. Specifically, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion 43 (second result display portion BS) of the main display unit 81 in the game turn related to the start of the current variation is set to the deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 603. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604 .

After executing the process of step S1106 or step S1109, or when a negative determination is made in step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1110. In step S1110, processing for setting a variable display time (display continuation period) is executed.

The variable display time setting process in step S1110 is performed in the same manner as the variable display time setting process for the first special figure already described (FIG. 18). When the setting process of the variable display time for the second special figure is explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. When the negative determination is made in step S801, that is, when it is determined that the low probability mode is determined, in step S802, the second special figure variation for the low probability mode stored in the variation display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 By referring to the display time table, the change display time corresponding to the current value of the change type counter CS is acquired.

In the second special figure fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. If the result is 3600 sec, the relationship between the general pattern fluctuation type counter C5 and the fluctuation display time is defined in association with the result of the success or failure lottery. That is, in the first special figure fluctuation display time table for low probability mode (see FIG. 19 (a)) and the second special figure fluctuation display time table for low probability mode, when the winning result is a jackpot result Although the variable display time is common, the variable display time when the winning result is a result other than the jackpot result is set to be extremely longer for the second special figure than for the first special figure. ing.

As already explained, the winning lottery of the second special symbol has a special winning result as one of the lottery results, and is treated more preferentially than the winning lottery of the first special symbol having no special winning result. Under such a configuration, the variable display time of the first special figure and the second special figure is set as described above, so that if the winning lottery mode is a low probability mode, the first special figure than the second special figure It is adjusted so that it is advantageous for the player to receive the winning lottery with the special figure.

That is, in the second special figure, since the variable display time for the special winning result is as long as 3600 sec, the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 is shifted from the winning timing to the third operating port 64. It is greatly delayed. Therefore, although the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 1.8 seconds, the player is unlikely to receive a profit. In addition, the probability of a jackpot result is 1/200, which is common between the first special pattern and the second special pattern. The fluctuation display time of the second special figure is extremely longer than the first special figure. Therefore, when comparing the execution frequency of the winning lottery per unit time (for example, one hour), the second special figure is much inferior to the first special figure. In other words, it is easier to win a jackpot in a short time by receiving the lottery for the first special symbol than by receiving the lottery for the second special symbol, and the time efficiency is excellent.

With such a configuration, it is possible to win game balls to the third operation port 64 at all times, and most of the game balls launched in the right route are guided to the third operation port 64, but the winning lottery mode The player is restrained from aiming to win a prize at the third operating port 64 under the low probability mode.

By the way, under the above configuration, when the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, the game ball may enter the third operation opening 64 unintentionally. At this time, if the configuration is such that the game round of the first special figure is started after the game round of the second special figure is completed, the game round of the first special figure is continued until the game round of the second special figure of 3600 seconds is completed. is not started, and the state in which the progress of the game is substantially stopped continues for a long time. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since each game cycle of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, the second special symbol can be executed while the second special symbol is being executed. A game round of one special figure can be started, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is preferably suppressed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 18, if the determination in step S801 is affirmative, that is, if the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S803, the high-probability mode With reference to the second special figure fluctuation display time table, obtain the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of this fluctuation type counter CS.

In the second special figure fluctuation display time table for high probability mode, as shown in FIG. If the result is 1 sec, the relationship between the normal figure fluctuation type counter C5 and the fluctuation display time is defined in association with the result of the winning lottery. That is, when the win/fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode, compared to the low-probability mode, the change display time for results other than the big win results is set to be shorter.

By such setting, when the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the winning lottery with the second special figure than with the first special figure. That is, in the high probability mode, in addition to being able to digest the second special game round per one time in a relatively short time, most of the winning lottery results are special winning results, so special winning results The open/close execution mode corresponding to . In other words, it is possible to increase the number of holding balls by continuing to receive the winning lottery on the second special figure side.

By the way, in the variable display time table of the first special figure in the high probability mode (see FIG. 19(b)), the variable display time is 3600 sec in the case of the result of being out. It is disadvantageous compared to the second special scheme when the result of the winning lottery of the first special scheme does not include the special winning result, and it is also disadvantageous compared to the second special scheme in terms of the variable display time. By doing so, it is possible to further clarify the difference in the degree of advantage between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

After execution of steps S802 and S803, in step S804, the variable display times obtained in steps S802 and S803 are set in variable display time counter areas provided in various counter areas 633 of RAM 604. FIG. After that, the setting process is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 21, after executing the variable display time setting process in step S1110, the command for variation and the type command are set in step S1111. The variation command and the type command contain information indicating that these commands correspond to the second special figure. The variation command and type command set in step S1111 are transmitted to the notification/production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14).

After performing the setting process of step S1111, it progresses to step S1112, and after starting the variable display of the 2nd result display part BS in the main display unit 81, this 2nd special figure variable start process is complete|finished. In the processing of step S1112, the variable display flag for the second special figure is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM604. As a result, in subsequent processing, it becomes possible to specify that the game round (for example, variable display) relating to the second special figure is being executed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 20, when the affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, when it is determined that the game is in the middle of the game according to the second special figure, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variable display time set in step S1110 of FIG. 21 has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S907, it is determined in step S908 whether or not the second forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. FIG. The second forced termination flag is a flag indicating that the variable display relating to the second special figure should be forcibly terminated, and the game round relating to the first special figure corresponds to the jackpot result, and the It is stored when the game round relating to the first special figure is started during execution of the game round relating to the second special figure (see step S706 in FIG. 17).

When the 2nd forced end flag is not stored, after executing the processing for fluctuation display in step S909, the control processing for this 2nd special figure is finished. In the variable display processing in step S909, display control (light emission control of the display segments) is performed so that the display segments are turned on and off in a predetermined order in the second result display section BS, thereby varying the pattern. display. On the other hand, if the second forced end flag is stored, it is determined in step S910 whether or not it is the start timing of the game round associated with the first special figure and the game round corresponding to the jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S910, the process advances to step S909 to execute the variable display process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, the process advances to step S911 to execute rewrite processing of the stop result. In the stop result rewriting process, first, it is determined whether or not the current game result related to the second special figure corresponds to the special winning result. If it does not correspond to the special hit result, that is, if it corresponds to the off result, the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the off result) determined in the second special figure fluctuation start process of step S906 is written. replacement is avoided.

On the other hand, if the current game result related to the second special figure corresponds to the special winning result, the stop pattern (corresponding to the special winning result) determined in the second special figure fluctuation start process pattern) is rewritten to a pattern corresponding to the result of deviation. By such processing, the special win result of the second special figure is invalidated, and the stop result (stop result corresponding to the jackpot result) displayed in the first result display section AS is prioritized. That is, while the stop picture corresponding to execution of the opening/closing execution mode is being displayed on the first result display section AS, the stop picture corresponding to execution of the opening/closing execution mode is also displayed on the second result display section BS. is avoided. Along with this, both the opening and closing execution mode based on the result of the winning lottery of the first special figure being the jackpot result and the opening and closing execution mode based on the result of the winning lottery of the second special figure being the special winning result. is prevented from running.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery for the opponent's game round is a jackpot between the first special figure and the second special figure, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game round. is determined (see step S910 and step S611 in FIG. 16), and if the start timing is reached, the player's own game cycle is immediately ended (see step S912 and step S612 in FIG. 16). Therefore, if one of the first special figure and the second special figure results in a big hit, the other game round will not start after the start of the one game round and during its execution. Both the winning lottery of the 1st special figure and the 2nd special figure will not result in a big hit at the same time. Therefore, the target of forced termination is the game corresponding to the result of losing one of the first special figure and the second special figure, except when the result of the winning lottery of the second special figure is a special hit result This is the case where the other winning lottery results in a big win while the round is being executed. In this case, the variation display time is shortened in the game round corresponding to one of the above-mentioned lost results, and the game ends. There is no stop result rewriting process in the first special figure control process of FIG. This is the reason why it is determined whether or not it corresponds (in other words, whether or not it corresponds to the outlier result). Note that the forced termination configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and may be configured to determine whether or not it is time to end the game round when the result of the lottery for the opponent's game round is a jackpot. good.

After execution of step S911, fluctuation end processing is executed in step S912. In the change ending process, the main display unit 81 is caused to stop display the pattern on the second result display section BS in the form determined in advance or in the form determined in the rewriting process in step S911. Control the display. After setting the fluctuation end command in the following step S913, this second special figure control processing is terminated. The fluctuation end command set at step S913 is transmitted to the notification/production control device 143 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S907, that is, if the fluctuation display time has passed, the process advances to step S912 to sequentially perform the fluctuation end processing and the fluctuation end command setting processing in step S913. Terminate the graphic control process.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing in step S404 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, in the present embodiment, there are provided a non-special game state in which the game progresses based on the balls entering the operation ports 62 to 64, and a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable winning device 65 is opened. ing. The non-special game state consists of a normal game state in which the winning lottery mode is a low probability mode and an advantageous gaming state in which the winning lottery mode is a high probability mode. Switching between these normal game state/advantageous game state is performed. In the advantageous game state, the probability of winning a big win is higher than in the normal game state, and in addition, the special win is repeated in a relatively short cycle, so that the game balls can be paid out. It is an advantageous playing state for

In the game state transition processing, first, at step S1201, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open/close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1202, and whether it is the timing at which the special figure game round of 1 is finished (timing at which the fluctuation display of the pattern in the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS is finished) determine whether or not When it is not the timing when the special figure game round ends, the present game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If the game round has ended, the process advances to step S1203 to determine whether or not the game result of the current game round (result of the win/loss lottery) corresponds to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 16R probability variable flag, the 16R normal flag, and the special hit flag is stored in the RAM 604 . If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, processing for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S1204. In the start process, first, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without starting the opening of the big winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is set for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604 .

In the subsequent step S1205, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode of this time corresponds to the big win result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, the process advances to step S1206 to set the round number counter RC provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604 to "16". On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1205, it means that the opening/closing execution mode of this time corresponds to the special win result, so in step S1207 the round number counter RC is set to "1".

After executing the processing of steps S1206 and S1207, the process advances to step S1208. In step S1208, an opening command setting process is performed. The set opening command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 660 at step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 75, and the determined display mode is output from the notification/effect control device 143 to the display control device 660 as a display content command. In the display control device 660, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/production control device 143, the display corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the pattern display device 75 is executed so that the moving image display of the character, etc., and the switching of the background image, etc. are performed.

After executing the opening command setting process in step S1208, the external signal setting process is executed in step S1209, and the game state transition process ends. In the external signal setting process of step S1209, it is determined whether or not any one of the various jackpot flags and the special hit flag is stored in the RAM604. A signal indicating that a big win or a special win has occurred is output to the management control device on the side. By receiving this external signal, the relevant management control device recognizes that the opening/closing execution mode has been entered.

Returning to the description of step S1201, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, and the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. When the standby time for opening has passed, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S1211.

In the big winning opening opening/closing process, when the big winning opening 65a is closed, the variable winning driving section 65c is brought into a driven state on the condition that the round number counter RC is "1" or more. The mouth 65a is opened. In addition, when the big winning opening 65a is being opened, a predetermined time (30 sec or 1.8 sec in this embodiment) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening 65a, or a predetermined number (this embodiment On the condition that 10 game balls have won in the form of (1), the drive state of the variable winning driving unit 65c is stopped and the big winning opening 65a is closed.

After executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S1211, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, it is determined whether or not the round number counter RC is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1212, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, the process proceeds to step S1213. In step S1213, it is determined whether or not the standby time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the round number counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has passed, at step S1214, after executing the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the present game Terminate state transition processing.

In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 . When the 16R probability variable flag is stored, if the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604, it is maintained, and if not stored, the high probability mode flag is stored. Further, when the 16R normal flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604, if the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604, it is erased. maintain it. After that, various flags (16R probability variable flag, 16R normal flag, special hit flag) related to the opening and closing execution mode are erased. In addition, regarding the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result, the game state before the start of the opening/closing execution mode is restored, and the win/fail lottery mode and the like are not changed.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support in step S405 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the electric role support process, the normal game round control process is first executed in step S1301, the normal game state transition process is executed in the subsequent step S1302, and the support process ends. Each of these processes will be described in detail below.

<Normal map game turn control processing>
First, the normal game round control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In normal figure game round control processing, in step S1401, it is determined whether it is in the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 . The support state flag is stored in the case of shifting to the support state for opening and closing control of the electric accessory 66 in the general pattern game state transition processing described later, and when the support state is ended in the general pattern game state transition processing. erased to

If it is in the support state, the normal game round control processing is terminated as it is. That is, when it is in the support state, regardless of whether or not winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, the normal game cycle is not started.

If it is not in the support state, in step S1402, it is determined whether or not it is in the middle of the regular game. It should be noted that this determination is performed by determining whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 . The normal figure variable display flag is stored when the variable display of the character product display unit 44 is started, and is erased when the variable display ends.

When the general pattern game is not in progress, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the general pattern reservation storage number FN is 0. When the number FN of the normal pattern reservation storage is 0, the normal pattern game round control processing is terminated as it is.

When the number FN of the normal map reservation storage is not 0, in step S1404, normal map data setting processing is executed to set the data stored in the electric service reservation area Rc for variable display. In the normal map data setting process, the normal map reservation storage number FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area Rc1 of the electric service reservation area Rc is moved to the normal map execution area AE3. Then, a process of shifting the data stored in each storage area of the electrician's holding area Rc is executed. That is, this is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 to the lower area side. , third area Rc3→second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4→third area Rc3, and so on. Then, one of the LEDs lit in the normal figure reserved number display section FM in the character product display section 44 is turned off.

After the execution of step S1404, after executing normal pattern fluctuation start processing in step S1405, this normal pattern game round control processing is terminated. Here, normal figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25 .

In the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the normal pattern propriety determination process is first executed in step S1501. In the general pattern correctness determination process, the general pattern correctness table (see FIG. 10(a)) is referenced, and the value of the open random number counter C4 stored in the general pattern execution area AE3 is equal to the numerical information corresponding to the open result. Determine whether or not they match. When the result of the normal figure propriety determination in step S1501 is an open result, it determines affirmatively in step S1502 and progresses to step S1503.

In step S1503, stop result setting processing for the release result is executed. Specifically, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the accessory display unit 44 in the game cycle is specified from the stop result table for the release result stored in advance in the ROM 603 , and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604 . do. Also, in step S1503, the MPU 602 stores an open flag in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 as information for specifying in the MPU 602 that the current game result is the open result.

On the other hand, if the determination result in step S1501 is an outlier, a negative determination is made in step S1502, and the process proceeds to step S1504. In step S1504, stop result setting processing for the deviation result is executed. Specifically, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the accessory display unit 44 in the game round is specified from the stop result table for the outlier result stored in advance in the ROM 603, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. do.

After executing step S1503 or S1504, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not the current lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the determination in step S1505 is negative, in step S1506, refer to the normal figure fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 (see FIG. 10(b)) Then, obtain the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5 this time. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1505 is affirmative, in step S1507, the normal figure fluctuation display time table for the high probability mode stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 (see FIG. 10(c)) , to obtain the variation display time corresponding to the value of the normal figure variation type counter C5 this time.

After executing step S1506 or S1507, in step S1508, the normal figure fluctuation display time acquired in each step of steps S1506 and S1507 is set in the fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM604. The value of the normal figure fluctuation display time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started.

In the following step S1509, to set the general figure variation command and the general figure type command. The general pattern variation command includes information on the general pattern variation display time, and the general pattern type command includes information on the game result (whether or not it is an open result). These set commands are transmitted to the notification/production control device 143 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). In the notification / production control device 143, based on the received general pattern variation command and general pattern type command, the content of the production in the general pattern game round is determined, and various Control your equipment. The content of this effect includes the variable display mode of the symbols on the normal symbol display section (not shown) of the symbol display device 75 . In addition, the normal figure variation command is transmitted to the display control device 660 via the notification / effect control device 143, and the display control device 660 receives the normal figure variation command, corresponding to the normal figure game round The symbol display device 75 is controlled so as to perform the variable display of the selected symbols.

After that, in step S1510, the variable display of the pattern is started in the character product display unit 44, and the normal figure variation start process is finished.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, if the affirmative determination is made in step S1402, that is, if it is determined that it is in the normal game round, in step S1406, whether or not the fluctuation display time of the current normal game round has elapsed determine whether When the fluctuation display time has not elapsed, the fluctuation display process is executed in step S1407, and then the normal figure game round control process is terminated. In the variable display processing, display control is performed on the character object display unit 44 so that each display segment in the character object display unit 44 is turned on and off in a predetermined order.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation display time has passed, the fluctuation end processing is executed in step S1408, and then the normal figure game round control processing is ended. In the variation ending process of step S1408, the information stored in the RAM 604 in the process of step S1503 or S1504 of FIG. It controls the character object display unit 44 .

<General game state transition processing>
Next, normal game state transition processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In normal game state transition processing, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the support state. If it is not in the support state, the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the fluctuation display of the pattern of the normal game round has ended. When it is not the end timing of the normal pattern fluctuation display, this game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the end timing of the normal pattern fluctuation display, the process proceeds to step S1603, and it is determined whether or not the game result of the normal pattern game round this time corresponds to the transition to the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an open flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 . If the open flag is not stored, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If the release flag is stored, support state start processing is executed in step S1604. In the processing concerned, the waiting time for the normal figure opening is set. As already explained, in the present embodiment, 0 sec is set as the waiting time. In the following step S1605, "1" is set to the second round number counter RC2. The second round number counter RC2 is for counting the number of times the electric accessory 66 is opened, and is decremented by one each time the electric accessory 66 is opened.

After that, in step S1606, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side of information indicating that the support state has occurred. After execution of step S1606, this game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the support state in step S1601, it is determined in step S1607 whether or not the waiting time for the opening of the general pattern has elapsed. If the standby time has passed, the accessory opening/closing process is executed in step S1608.

In the accessory opening/closing process, when the electric accessory 66 is closed, the driving units 244 and 246 are set to the driving state on condition that the second round number counter RC2 is "1" or more. The accessory 66 is switched to the open state. Further, when the electric accessory 66 is being opened, a predetermined time (0.1 sec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the opening of the electric accessory 66, or a predetermined number (in this embodiment 5) game balls have entered the second operation port 63, the driving states of the driving units 244 and 246 are stopped, and the electric accessory 66 is switched to the closed state. In addition, in the accessory opening and closing process, the standby time for the normal drawing ending is set when the electric accessory 66 is switched from the open state to the closed state. set.

After executing the accessory opening/closing process in step S1608, it is checked in step S1609 whether or not the value of the second round number counter RC2 is 0, that is, whether or not the electric accessory 66 has been opened once. judge. If the determination in step S1609 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1610 whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1610, end processing of the support state is executed in step S1611, and then this game state transition processing is ended. In the processing of step S1611, the release flags stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 are erased. If a negative determination is made in steps S1607, S1609 or S1610, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In addition, in the present embodiment, each standby time for the normal pattern opening and the normal pattern ending is set to 0 sec, so the processing of steps S1607 and S1610 may be omitted.

<Regarding the Flow of the Universal Figure Game>
Next, the flow of the normal game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing the flow of the normal game.

In this embodiment, the flow of the game is different depending on the presence or absence of the normal pattern reservation information when the variable display of the normal pattern is started. Here, the case where the general pattern reservation storage number FN is 0 (when there is no general pattern reservation information) and the case where it is 1 or more (when there is general pattern reservation information) will be described separately. Here, for the sake of convenience, it is assumed that all game balls launched to the left route enter the through gate 35 .

Here, when the normal map pending storage number FN is 0, regardless of whether or not there is any pending information in the normal map execution area AE3 of the electric power holding area Rc, the first area Rc1 It means a state in which normal map reservation information is not stored in the fourth area Rc4. In addition, when the general pattern reservation memory number FN is 1 or more, the general pattern reservation information that is not yet the execution target of the general pattern game round is the above-mentioned first It means a state of being stored in at least one of area Rc1 to fourth area Rc4. In addition, as in the case where the winning to the through gate 35 occurs in a situation where the normal game round is not executed and there is no pending information in any of the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4, If the general pattern reservation storage number FN becomes 1 only for an instant, it shall be included in the state in which the general pattern reservation storage number FN is 0.

<Regarding the case where the normal pattern pending memory number FN is 0>
First, with reference to FIG. 27(a), the case where the normal pattern reserved storage number FN is 0 will be described. Here, numbers in square brackets in FIG. 27(a) indicate the order of game balls. For example, in [1] in FIGS. 27(a1) and (a4), the first (first ball) game ball passes through the through gate 35 at timing t1, and the game ball passes through the electric accessory at timing t4. 66 (specific area RA2). As already explained, since most of the fluctuation display time in the normal game round is set to 0.05 sec (see FIG. 10 (b)), the fluctuation display time in FIG. 27 (a) is all 0.05 sec shall be In addition, since most of the results of the general figure success or failure lottery are open results (see FIG. 10 (a)), the results of the general figure success or failure lottery in FIG. 27 (a) are both open results.

When the first game ball wins the through gate 35 at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 27(a2), a normal pattern win/loss lottery is performed and a normal pattern fluctuation display is started. After the lapse of 0.05 sec, which is the variable display time, the normal chart is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the opening result, and this state is maintained for 0.4 sec, which is the stop display time.

When the stop display time elapses at timing t2, the electric accessory 66 is immediately switched from the closed state to the open state, as shown in FIG. After this state is maintained for 0.1 sec, which is the open time, it returns to the closed state. That is, 0.45 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35, the electric accessory 66 shifts to the open state, and 0.55 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35, the electric accessory 66 enters the closed state. (timing t3).

On the other hand, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 to reach the electric accessory 66 (specific area RA2) is set to 0.6 sec as already described (see FIG. 5A). . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(a4), the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 reaches the specific area RA2 at timing t4, which is 0.05 sec behind timing t3 at which the electric accessory 66 returns to the closed state. do. That is, the time difference (phase difference) A between the opening timing of the electric accessory 66 and the arrival timing of the game ball is 0.15 sec, and the time difference B between the closing timing and the closing timing is 0.05 sec. That is, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 cannot reach the specific area RA2 (receiving area RA1) while the electric accessory 66 is open, and does not enter the second operation opening 63.

Here, in the present embodiment, one normal game period (period from the start of the normal game round to the start of the next normal game round) based on the winning of the through gate 35 is, The variable display time (0.05 sec) in the normal game round, the stop display time (0.4 sec) in the same game round, and the open time (0.1 sec) in the electric accessory 66 are totaled to 0.55 sec. (See FIG. 27(a3)). On the other hand, the winning cycle (winning interval) from when the first game ball (preceding ball) enters the through gate 35 until the second game ball (following ball) enters the through gate 35 is It approximates 0.06 sec, which is the firing cycle (shooting interval) of the ball, and is the same or substantially the same as the same cycle (see FIGS. 27(a1) and (a4)).

Thus, in the present embodiment, one normal game period is shorter than the winning period of the through gate 35 (shooting period of the game ball). For this reason, the normal game (a series of games consisting of the normal game round and the support state) started based on the winning of the first game ball to the through gate 35, the second game ball to the through gate 35 Finish earlier than winning. Therefore, after the first game ball wins the through gate 35, the second game ball does not enter the through gate 35 until the support state of the electric accessory 66 based on the win ends. No normal map reservation information is added. As a result, after the electric accessory 66 returns to the closed state at the timing t3, there is a standby time for waiting for the second game ball to enter the through gate 35.

Then, when the second game ball wins the through gate 35 at the timing t4, the general figure winning lottery and the general figure game round are executed based on the winning, and the electric accessory 66 is 0 after 0.45 sec from the winning. .1 sec. After the electric accessory 66 is closed, it is in a state of waiting for the third game ball to enter the through gate 35 as in the case of the first game ball. Such a flow is the same for the winning of the third and subsequent game balls, and regardless of the winning, the normal game based on the winning of the preceding ball ends earlier than the winning of the following ball to the through gate 35. relationship is maintained.

That is, under the condition that the number FN of the normal pattern reserved storage is 0, the opening timing of the electric accessory 66 always depends on the winning timing to the through gate 35 . Therefore, the opening cycle of the electric accessory 66 (the period from one opening timing to the next opening timing) is 0.6 sec according to the winning cycle of the through gate 35 (see FIG. 27(a3)). On the other hand, the arrival period (arrival interval) of the game ball passing through the through gate 35 to the electric accessory 66 (specific area RA2) is reduced to 0.6 sec, which is the prize winning period to the through gate 35 (game ball launch period). It approximates and becomes the same or substantially the same as the same period (see FIG. 27(a4)).

In this way, since the opening cycle of the electric accessory 66 and the arrival cycle of the game ball are equal, the time difference A with a delay of 0.15 sec and the time difference B with a delay of 0.05 sec are applied to any prize. occur similarly. Therefore, when the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is 0, although the electric accessary 66 is opened each time, the state where the game ball does not win in the second operation opening 63 continues.

<Regarding the case where the normal pattern pending memory number FN is 1 or more>
Next, with reference to FIG. 27(b), a description will be given of the case where the number FN of the normal pattern reserved storage is 1 or more. Here, for the sake of convenience, the description will be made on the assumption that the number FN of reserved storage of the normal pattern is 3 or less, and the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to 0.05 sec as in the case of FIG. 27(a). Note that the flow from timing t1 to timing t3 in this case is the same as in the case of FIG.

When the electric accessory 66 returns to the closed state at the timing t3, since the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is 1 or more, the second game ball enters the through gate 35 as shown in FIG. Without waiting for , the next normal game round is started. In the present embodiment, since the normal pattern ending period is set to 0 sec, the next normal pattern game round is started as soon as the closing of the electric accessory 66 is completed. For this reason, when the normal pattern reservation memory number FN is 1 or more, compared to the case where the normal pattern reservation memory number FN is 0, the next normal pattern game round is advanced by the above waiting time (0.05 sec). will be started with As a result, as shown in FIG. 27(b3), the opening cycle of the electric accessory 66 becomes 0.55 sec, which is shortened by the standby time. On the other hand, the arrival period (arrival interval) of the game ball passing through the through gate 35 to the electric accessory 66 is 0.6 sec as in the case of FIG. 27(a).

Thus, when the number FN of normal pattern reservation storage is 1 or more, a deviation of 0.05 sec occurs between the release cycle of the electric accessory 66 and the arrival cycle of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(b4), the time difference A of the arrival timing of the game ball with respect to the opening timing of the electric accessory 66 and the time difference B of the arrival timing with respect to the closing timing of the electric accessory 66 are, in the case of the first game ball, As in the case of FIG. 27(a), the delays are 0.15 sec and 0.05 sec, respectively, while the second game ball has a delay of 0.2 sec and 0.1 sec, respectively. Become. That is, the arrival timing is further delayed by 0.05 sec from the opening timing and the closing timing, and the time differences A and B change according to the difference (0.05 sec) between the opening period and the arrival period.

Such changes in the time differences A and B are generated and accumulated by 0.05 sec each time the normal game is repeated. For this reason, the opening period and the arrival timing will eventually match in the process of repeating the normal game, and the game ball will enter the second operation opening 63. By the way, in the case shown in FIG. 27 (b), since the change width per game round in the time difference A and B (difference between the opening period and the reaching period) is 0.05 sec, the normal figure game is performed 11 times As a result, the same amount of change as one cycle of the open cycle (0.55 sec) occurs, and the cycle is completed. Since the opening time of the electric accessory 66 is 0.1 sec, which is twice the change width, the specific area RA2 (receiving area It becomes possible for the game ball to reach RA1). That is, the game ball can enter the second operating port 63 with a probability of 2/11 (approximately 1/6).

By the way, in the above configuration, it is possible to win the game ball in the second operation opening 63 by repeating the normal game in the state that the number FN of the normal diagram reservation storage is 1 or more. In order to provide it appropriately, it is desirable that there is an opportunity to reliably accumulate the normal pattern reservation memory number FN, and that the normal pattern reservation memory number FN accumulated by the opportunity can be stably maintained thereafter. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by devising the normal pattern fluctuation display time in relation to the normal pattern reserved memory number FN, it is possible to appropriately secure the opportunity to increase the normal pattern reserved memory number FN and the normal pattern reserved memory number FN It enables the stable maintenance of This point will be described below with reference to FIGS. 10, 28 and 29. FIG.

FIG. 28 is a timing chart showing the flow of the normal game, and FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the time difference A of the arrival timing with respect to the opening timing and the time difference B of the arrival timing with respect to the closing timing change. In FIG. 29, when the arrival timing leads the opening timing or the closing timing, the phase is positive, and when the arrival timing lags, the phase is negative.

As already explained, in a situation where the lottery mode is a low probability mode, if the normal pattern retention memory number FN at the time of normal pattern fluctuation disclosure is 1 to 3, the normal pattern fluctuation display time with a probability of 1/1000 is set to 10 sec (see FIG. 10(b)). When the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to 10 sec, one normal pattern game period (period from the start of the normal pattern game round to the start of the next normal pattern game round) is the variable display time A certain 10 sec, 0.4 sec which is the stop display time, and 0.1 sec which is the opening time of the electric accessory 66 are totaled, resulting in 10.5 sec. Winning to the through gate 35 during this period is suspended with an upper limit of 4, and the shooting cycle of game balls is 0.6 sec. In other words, about 17 game balls can be fired during the above period, and the number of normal pattern retention memories FN can be comfortably increased to the upper limit number (4) (Fig. 28 (a), (b) (see timings t11 to t12).

In this way, by setting the normal pattern fluctuation display time so that the normal pattern game period is longer than 4 times the firing cycle of the game ball (the winning cycle to the through gate 35), the normal pattern retention memory number Opportunities to increase FN can be preferably provided. In addition, it is usually configured so that the general pattern reservation does not accumulate (or is difficult to accumulate), and the general pattern reservation accumulates (or becomes easier to accumulate) due to the extension of the variable display time, so whether the general pattern reservation accumulates It is possible to control whether or not by setting the probability using random numbers. This makes it easier to grasp the winning expected value for the second operation opening 63 at the stage of designing the gaming machine, making it possible to facilitate the adjustment of the ease of winning.

After maximizing the normal pattern reservation memory number FN as described above, the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to 0.6 sec with a probability of 1000/1000 (see FIG. 10(b)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28, after the variable display time of 10 sec is set, the variable display time is set to 0.6 sec without exception. In FIGS. 28 and 29, for the sake of convenience, the start timing of the first game round after the end of the game round whose variable display time is set to 10 seconds coincides with the winning timing of the first game ball to the through gate 35. I am assuming.

When the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to 0.6 sec, as shown in FIGS. 28(c) and (d), one normal pattern game period is the fluctuation display time of 0.6 sec and the stop display. 0.4 sec, which is the time, and 0.1 sec, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 66, are totaled to 1.1 sec. Since the winning cycle to the through gate 35 (the firing cycle of the game ball) is 0.6 sec, it is possible to win one or two game balls to the through gate 35 in the normal game period of 1.1 sec. It is possible to replenish the normal map reservation information for that amount. In other words, after the number of normal pattern pending memories FN reaches 4, the normal pattern game period for one time becomes longer than the winning cycle to the through gate 35, so that the digestion cycle of normal pattern pending information (normal pattern game It is possible to replenish the general map reservation information in a cycle shorter than the execution cycle of ). As a result, it is possible to proceed with the game while maintaining the normal pattern holding memory number FN at the upper limit just by continuing the natural shooting operation.

The opening period when the normal pattern fluctuation display time is 0.6 sec is the same as the normal pattern game period, as shown in FIG. 1.1 sec. On the other hand, the arrival cycle of the game ball passing through the through gate 35 to the electric accessory 66 (specific area RA2) is 0.6 sec. Therefore, the release cycle of the electric accessory 66 in this case is shorter by 0.1 sec than two cycles (1.2 sec) of the arrival cycle of the game ball.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29, the time difference A of the arrival timing of the game ball with respect to the opening timing of the electric accessory 66 and the time difference B of the arrival timing with respect to the closing timing are 0 in the case of the first game ball, respectively. The advance is 0.4 sec and 0.5 sec, while the third game ball advances 0.3 sec and 0.4 sec, respectively. That is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time is 0.6 sec, each time the normal pattern game is performed, the time differences A and B change by 0.1 sec every other ball. In this case, the normal game is played 11 times, and the time difference A and B changes by one cycle of the open cycle (1.1 sec), and the required number of game balls reaches 22 (( 1.2 sec×11)/0.6 sec).

However, as shown in FIG. 29, the time difference A of the 9th game ball and the time difference A of the 22nd game ball are both 0 and equal. Such a relationship occurs in the same way, for example, in the case of the seventh game ball and the case of the twentieth game ball. In other words, the time differences A and B for the odd-numbered game balls are the same as the time differences A and B for the even-numbered game balls after the half-cycle change of the open period has occurred. Therefore, the change of the time differences A and B is completed by the change of the half cycle of the open cycle. Since the opening time of the electric accessary 66 is 0.1 sec, which is the same as the width of change per one game in the time differences A and B, there is a half-cycle change of the opening period (11 games While the ball reaches the electric accessory 66, the game ball can reach only once while the electric accessory 66 is open. That is, on the condition that the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is maintained at 4, the game ball continues to enter the second operating port 63 with a probability of 1/11 (approximately 1/10).

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. , two arrival periods of the game ball to the electric accessory 66, the second arrival period (long side time) is configured to be a non-integer multiple of the release period (short side time). For example, if one of the long sides is an integral multiple of the other of the short sides, the two will synchronize, so the time differences A and B will not change even if the normal game is repeated. However, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably suppress this and appropriately secure the winning opportunity to the second operation opening 63 .

By the way, as shown in FIG. 27(b), such a relationship can be established even when the number of normal-pattern pending storage FN is 1-3. In other words, in the opening cycle of the electric accessory 66 when the number FN of the normal pattern reserved storage is 1 to 3 and the arrival cycle of the game ball to the electric accessory 66, the arrival cycle is a non-integer multiple of the open cycle. is configured to be

As described above, in the configuration in which the winning to the second operation port 63 is easy due to the occurrence of normal pattern suspension, considering the stable operation in the game hall, the number of normal pattern suspension memory unexpectedly In order to avoid FN becoming 1 or more, it is ideal to make the winning interval to the through gate 35 constant. For example, if the flow of game balls entering the through gate 35 is made regular, such as by unifying the winning route to the through gate 35, such a configuration can be realized. However, the flow of game balls becomes uniform, which may lead to monotony of the game or excessively narrow the room for technical intervention by the player. For this reason, it may be practical to give some degree of irregularity to the flow of game balls, and it may be necessary to allow variations in winning intervals.

27 to 29, the winning interval of the game ball to the through gate 35 is assumed to be a constant cycle, but the interval is not limited to this, and may have a certain degree of variation (indefiniteness). may be Even in such a situation, by making the normal game period for one time shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball, it is possible to reduce the risk of increasing the number of normal game retention memories FN against the design intention. , it is possible to suppress an unexpected transition to an easy-to-win state.

Further, in the above configuration, 10 sec was exemplified as the variable display time for setting the number of normal-pattern pending memories FN to 4, but it is not limited to this. That is, if the regular game period is longer than 4 times the winning cycle (the firing cycle of the game ball) to the through gate 35, it can be set to any time. Furthermore, the probability that such a variable display time is selected does not have to be 1/1000, and can be any probability.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to have a configuration that can maintain the number of reservations after increasing the number of normal diagram reservation storage FN to the upper limit number. That is, it suffices if at least one suspension occurs as a trigger for transition to the winning easy state. In this case, when the normal pattern holding memory number FN is 0, for example, a variable display time of 0.2 sec with a predetermined probability ) is selected, and a variable display time of 0.6 sec is set when the number of normal pattern pending storage FN is 1. In this case, the variable display time when the number of normal pattern reserved memories FN is 2 or more may be the time when the number of normal pattern reserved memories FN can be maintained or easily maintained as in the case of 1, or the normal pattern reserved The memory number FN may be set to a time that is unmaintainable or difficult to maintain.

However, in the case where the number FN of the general pattern pending memory, which triggers the transition to the easy winning state, is reduced, for example, if the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball is shortened and the ball enters the through gate 35, the winning of the trailing ball is suspended. Therefore, regardless of the length of the variable display time, there is a risk of shifting to the winning easy state. Based on this point, as in the present embodiment, the number of normal figure pending storage FN, which is the trigger for transition, is set to the upper limit number, or even if it is not the upper limit number, it is set to a plurality to secure a margin, and unexpected It is preferable to adopt a configuration capable of suppressing the transition to the winning easy state due to the occurrence of suspension.

In addition, the variable display time for maintaining the normal pattern holding memory number FN is not limited to 0.6 sec. ) is sufficient.

<Regarding the overall flow of the game>
Next, it demonstrates, referring FIG. 30 for the flow of the whole game including both the normal figure game and the special figure game. FIG. 30 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of game states.

In the normal game state in which the success/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode, as already explained, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the success/failure lottery with the first special symbol than with the second special symbol. Therefore, when the game state is the normal game state, the game ball is launched to the left route (see FIG. 4), and the through gate 35, the second operation opening 63 (electric accessory 66) and the first operation opening 62 You will be playing with the aim of winning a prize.

Here, in the present embodiment, most of the game balls (for example, 80% or more) launched toward the left route enter the through gate 35, and the game balls entering the through gate 35 66 (see FIG. 5(a)). Furthermore, on the downstream side of the electric role product 66, the game ball that passed in front of the electric role product 66 (the game ball that did not win the second operation opening 63) flows down toward the first operation opening 62 side. , a flow-down path is formed by a nail 69 or the like. In other words, the configuration is such that the game ball can flow down in the order of the through gate 35 →electric accessary 66 →first operating port 62 . For this reason, under the situation where the game ball is launched toward the left route, while receiving the general drawing lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35, the winning to the second operating port 63 or the first operating port 62 It is possible to receive a winning lottery for the first special figure based on.

In the normal game state, when the number FN of reserved memory is 0, as already explained, the electric accessory 66 is opened each time a game ball wins the through gate 35, but the second operation port 63 is opened. is the first normal game state (winning non-support state) in which the game ball does not win or does not win. In the first normal game state, the winning to the second operating port 63 is unlikely, so regarding the special symbol game, the winning lottery of the first special symbol based on the winning to the first operating port 62 is substantially performed. The game is played with the aim of winning a jackpot while receiving.

Here, the probability that the game ball shot to the left route will enter the first operating port 62 is kept lower than the probability that the game ball launched to the left route will enter the through gate 35. - 特許庁Specifically, when 10 to 15 game balls are launched toward the left route, one game ball can win the first operation opening 62 (winning probability=7 ~10%). Since the number of game balls to be paid out when a prize is won in the first operation port 62 is three, in the first normal game state, the number of paid-out balls continues to be smaller than the number of shot balls, and the game is played. Players will advance the game while reducing the number of balls they have.

In addition, it is also possible to shoot the game ball to the right route when the first normal game state is set. As already explained, most (70% or more) of the game balls launched in the right route enter the third operation hole 64. FIG. However, since the number of game balls to be paid out when a prize is awarded to the third operating port 64 is one, the decrease speed of the possessed balls is suppressed, but there is no change in the decrease. Moreover, since the variable display time is set to the special time (36000 sec) for the game round related to the third actuation port 64 in the normal game state, the execution frequency of the winning lottery for the second special figure is greatly reduced, There are fewer benefits for players.

In the case of the first normal game state, the variation display time of the game round related to the first operation port 62 is 3 sec at the shortest (see FIG. 19 (a)), while the normal game related to the through gate 35 is 0.55 sec (see FIG. 27(a3)). That is, the required period of the normal pattern game is sufficiently shorter than the variable display time of the game times related to the first operation port 62 . In addition, since the winning probability to the through gate 35 is higher than the winning probability to the first operating port 62, in the first normal game state, the normal game based on the winning to the through gate 35 is fast. While it is repeated, the winning lottery of the first special figure related to the first operation port 62 is performed less frequently than that.

By the way, since the execution cycle of the normal pattern game turn when the normal pattern retention memory number FN is 0 is 0.6 sec (see FIG. 27 (a)), all the game balls fired to the left route are through Assuming that the gate 35 is won, 1000 normal game rounds can be executed in 10 minutes. Since the probability that the normal pattern fluctuation display time of 10 sec is selected is 1/1000 (see FIG. 10 (a)), the normal pattern is held at a probability of about 65% while the game ball is continued to be shot for 10 minutes. The number of memories FN can be four.

When the normal pattern reservation memory number FN becomes 4, as already explained, the game ball can win (or win easily) in the second operation opening 63 (see FIG. 29). That is, the game shifts to the second normal game state (winning support state) in which the winning lottery of the first special figure is easily received by the second operating port 63 in addition to the first operating port 62 . In this case, the game ball can enter the second operating port 63 with a probability of about 1/10, and the number of game balls to be paid out when the winning occurs to the second operating port 63 is 10. . Therefore, the player can continue playing the game without reducing the number of balls in his possession or reducing the number of balls in his possession.

The second normal game state can be continued as long as the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is 1 or more. In the present embodiment, after the normal pattern reserved memory number FN becomes 4, the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to 0.6 sec, which is longer than when the normal pattern reserved memory number FN=0. As a result, it is possible to maintain the normal figure holding memory number FN at 4 (1 or more) just by continuing to shoot the game ball with a natural shooting operation (Fig. 10 (b), See Figure 29).

In the first normal game state or the second normal game state, when the winning/failure lottery result of the first special figure becomes a big hit result, the variable winning device 65 is shifted to the special game state in which it is opened. The variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the variable display unit 67, and is configured so that a prize can be won on the condition that the game ball flows down the right route. Therefore, the player plays the game by shooting the game ball in the right route, thereby avoiding the winning of the game ball into the through gate 35.例文帳に追加In this case, in order to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the right route, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 or the like should be notified in a manner suggesting that the right route should be flowed down (right-handed notification).

In this embodiment, when shifting to the special game state, the round game is repeated 16 times regardless of the jackpot type distribution result. For this reason, the shooting operation of the game ball to the right route is continued over a period longer than the period during which the four times of the general pattern game is performed, and the general pattern reservation storage number FN becomes 0 and the second normal The game state (winning support state) ends. That is, once the state is shifted to the second normal game state, the state can be continued until the result of the special figure success/failure lottery becomes the jackpot result.

When the jackpot type distribution result is the 16R probability variable jackpot, after the special game state ends, the success/failure lottery mode shifts to an advantageous game state in which the high probability mode. In the advantageous game state, as already explained, the variable display time of the second special figure game round related to the third operation opening 64 is shortened (see FIG. 19(d)). In addition, most of the game balls shot to the right route win the third working hole 64, and most of the winning lottery results of the second special figure related to the third working hole 64 are special winning results. Become. For this reason, if the game is advanced with the aim of winning the third operation opening 64 in the advantageous game state, the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result will occur frequently. That is, the right route is more advantageous than the left route, and the player shoots a game ball to the right route to play. Incidentally, the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right route side like the third operating port 64, and the game ball that did not win the third operating port 64 can win. Therefore, it is not necessary to switch the shooting direction during the advantageous game state, and it is sufficient to continue the shooting operation to the right route side.

In the open/close execution mode corresponding to the special winning result, the variable prize winning device 65 is kept open for 1.8 sec, but since the game ball shooting cycle is 0.6 sec, 2 to 3 game balls win. is expected. To obtain payout of 30 to 45 game balls each time an opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a special winning result is performed when the number of game balls to be put out is 15 when a prize is awarded to the variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加becomes possible. In the advantageous game state, by repeating the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result, it is possible to aim for the big winning result of the winning or losing lottery of the second special symbol while increasing the number of balls held.

It should be noted that, in the advantageous game state, since it is assumed that the shooting operation to the right route is continued, the through gate 35 and the electric accessory 66 do not substantially function. However, it is also possible to shoot a game ball to the left route when shifting to an advantageous game state, and in this case, the game ball can enter the through gate 35 . In such a case, if the electric accessory 66 is frequently opened as in the first normal game state or the second normal game state, it may confuse the player and misguide the shooting operation to the left route. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game is in an advantageous game state, the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to 20.0 sec, which is rather long, and the frequency of opening the electric accessary 66 per unit time is kept low. .

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the number FN of the general pattern reserved memory is 0, the specific period from the game ball winning the through gate 35 to the end of the support state of the electric accessory 66 corresponding to the winning is determined from the game ball firing cycle. Also, the period required for the game ball that has won the through gate 35 to reach the specified area RA2 is made longer than the specified period. As a result, under the situation where the normal pattern pending memory number FN is 0, the normal pattern pending does not occur (or It is possible to maintain a state in which winning to the second operation opening 63 does not occur (or is unlikely to occur) under such circumstances. Then, when the number FN of the normal pattern reserved storage becomes 1 or more, the electric accessory 66 is opened regardless of the winning timing of the game ball to the through gate 35, resulting in the opening period of the electric accessory 66 and the game ball. The arrival timing to the specific area RA2 can be matched, and an easy-to-win state (second normal game state) to the second operation opening 63 can be generated. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a game property in which the state can be shifted to the easy winning state even if the result is not a big win. As a result, it is possible to provide players who have not yet won a big prize with an opportunity to play in an easy-to-win state, thus making it possible to improve ease of play and friendliness.

In addition, in the above configuration, when the general pattern reserved storage number FN is increased, it not only secures the number of lotteries corresponding to the increase, but also provides the advantage of changing to an easy winning state that is advantageous for the player. be able to. As a result, the interest in increasing the number of normal-pattern pending memories FN is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably arouse the desire to win a prize to the through gate 35 .

Furthermore, in the case that the number of normal-pattern pending storage FN is 0, the time required for the game ball that has won the through gate 35 to reach the specific area RA2 is set to be longer than the specific period, so that the following You can expect results. In such a configuration, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 reaches the specific area RA2 after the electric accessory 66 is switched from the open state to the closed state. It is possible to make it impossible (or difficult) to enter the operating port 63 . For this reason, it is possible to increase opportunities to open the electric accessary 66 even though it is configured to perform the payout of game balls and the winning lottery of the second special figure based on the winning to the second operation port 63. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that winning is likely to occur while suppressing troubles in operation at the game arcade. In addition, since the electric accessory 66 (rotating plate 243 and receiving member 245) continues to move continuously, this can be used as an element of liveliness, and a dramatic effect can be expected. By these means, it is possible to arouse the player's interest and arouse the desire to play.

Under the situation where the number of normal pattern pending storage FN is 0, the normal pattern pending does not occur (or does not occur) Under the game property, if such a state persists, the same game will be repeated endlessly, and the game will become monotonous. There is a risk. In view of this point, in the present embodiment, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (1/1000 lottery in the normal pattern fluctuation display time) is established, the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to 10 sec and the above specific period is set to be longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball. For this reason, even though the general pattern holding memory number FN is difficult to increase, the opportunity to increase it can be appropriately secured. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation in which there is no hold from being perpetuated, and to suppress the monotony of the game.

When the normal pattern holding memory number FN is 4, the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to 0.6 sec to make the specific period longer than the game ball launch cycle. In this case, when the normal pattern reservation storage number FN becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it is possible to stably maintain such a state thereafter. As a result, frequent switching between the case where the opening timing of the electric accessory 66 depends on the winning timing of the game ball to the through gate 35 and the case where it does not is suppressed. As a result, the player can proceed with the game in a calm manner, or proceed with the game with peace of mind, and can easily play the game.

When the number of normal pattern reserved memories is 1 or more, the length of the release period of the electric accessory 66 and the period of arrival of the game ball to the specific area RA2 are different, and one of the longer ones is a non-integer multiple of the short side. In this case, by repeating a series of normal game from the winning of the game ball to the through gate 35 to the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 66, the opening timing (or closing timing) of the electric accessory 66 and the specific area RA2 It is possible to change the time difference A (or time difference B) from the arrival timing of the game ball. As a result, the ease of winning the game ball to the electric accessory 66 (second operation port 63) can be varied depending on whether the number FN of the normal pattern reserved memory is 1 or more and when it is not, It is possible to realize a game property in which the number FN of the normal pattern reserved memory and the easy winning state are closely related.

The length of the opening time of the electric accessory 66 (0.1 sec) is equal to or longer than the difference (0.05 sec or 0.1 sec) between the opening cycle of the electric accessory 66 and the arrival cycle of the game ball to the specific area RA2. It was configured to be. Since the above-mentioned difference becomes a change width for one time in the process of cumulatively changing the time differences A and B, the length of the opening time of the electric accessory 66 is equal to or greater than the change width. , the arrival timing of the game ball to the specific area RA2 is suppressed from changing across the opening time of the electric accessory 66. As a result, when the number FN of normal pattern reserved storage is 1 or more, it is possible to properly secure the winning opportunity of the game ball to the electric accessory 66 .

When the number of normal pattern pending memories FN is 4, the normal pattern fluctuation display time (0.6 sec), the stop display time immediately after that (0.4 sec), and the opening time of the electric accessory 66 (0.1 sec) The structure is standardized and the opening interval of the electric accessories 66 is fixed. For example, if the opening intervals of the electric accessary 66 are diversified, the time differences A and B change irregularly while the series of games is repeated. In this case, it becomes difficult to grasp the winning rate of game balls into the electric accessory 66 (second operating port 63) at the design stage, which not only increases the design burden but also increases the winning rate unexpectedly during the game. Inconvenience such as In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the time difference A, B can be changed regularly because the opening interval of the electric accessory 66 can be stabilized. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the winning rate of the game ball to the electric accessory 66 (the second operation port 63), and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

By arranging the through gate 35 on the left route side and by arranging the variable prize winning device 65 on the right route side, winning to the through gate 35 is avoided when a game ball is shot aiming at the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加It was configured as follows. In this case, the open/close execution mode (jackpot game) corresponding to the jackpot result is performed, so that the normal pattern reserved memory number FN can be naturally reduced, and the winning easy state (second normal game state) of the electric accessory 66 can be terminated. As a result, it is possible to suitably avoid the easy winning state from being perpetuated. At that time, since the easy-to-win state ends in exchange for the jackpot game, it becomes easier to obtain the player's understanding compared to the case where the same state only ends, and it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction and disappointment of the player. become.

The winning rate of the game ball to the through gate 35 is made higher than the winning rate to the first operating port 62.例文帳に追加In this case, by simplifying the winning of the game ball to the through gate 35 than to the first operating port 62, the former becomes routine and the player's attention to the through gate 35 can be reduced. can. As a result, the player's consciousness can be easily directed to the first operation port 62, and as a result, the player is less likely to notice that the normal pattern holding memory number FN has become a predetermined number or more and the process up to that point. can do. As a result, the impression that the second normal game state has suddenly occurred can be easily given to the player, and the surprise and joy of the player can be suitably realized.

In that case, the above effect can be enhanced by further configuring the through gate 35 to be less conspicuous in appearance than the first operation opening 62 . As such a configuration, for example, the through gate 35 may be made transparent (translucent), or the through gate 35 may be made smaller than the first operation opening 62 in front view. In addition, the color of the through gate 35 is made the same as or similar to the color of the area where the through gate 35 is arranged or the surrounding area on the front surface of the game board 60, and the two are assimilated. It is good also as a structure which uses a different color between. In making the through gate 35 smaller than the first operation opening 62, it is not necessary to make the sizes of the winning openings different. , the through gate 35 may be smaller than the first operating port 62 .

<Second Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the support mode of the electric accessory 66 shifts to the high-frequency support mode when a big win is triggered. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 31 to 40. FIG. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 60 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 31, in the present embodiment, the right route is not provided with the third operation opening, and there are two lottery start openings, the first operation opening 62 and the second operation opening 63, related to special symbols. It has become. Further, in the present embodiment, the second operating port 63 corresponds to the second result display portion BS in the main display portion 43. As shown in FIG. That is, the first operation port 62 is the lottery start port for the first special symbol, and the second operation port 63 is the lottery start port for the second special symbol. In addition, the lottery start opening related to the special pattern is not arranged on the right route.

The number of game balls to be paid out when a prize is awarded to the second operation port 63 is one, which is less than the case of the first embodiment (10). The number of payouts to the winning openings other than the second operating opening 63 is the same as in the first embodiment.

In the main display unit 43 of the main display unit 81, the first reservation number display part AM for displaying the number of reservations related to the first special figure, and the second reservation for displaying the number of reservations related to the second special figure A number display BM is provided. The number of times the game ball enters the first operation hole 62 and the number of times the game ball enters the second operation hole 63 are respectively reserved up to four times, and the number of reservations is displayed by lighting of the reservation number display parts AM and BM. It is designed to be

Next, the reserved ball storage area 642 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 32, in the present embodiment, in the reserved ball storage area 642, a second result display section reserved area Rb for storing the reserved information based on the winning to the second operation opening 63 is provided. The second result display section reservation area Rb is the same as the first result display section reservation area Ra according to the first embodiment. , and a fourth area Rb4.

The reserved ball storage area 642 is provided with a special figure execution area AE. The special figure execution area AE is an area for moving the reserved information (numerical information) stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the reserved areas Ra and Rb when starting the variable display of the main display section 43. At the start of one special figure game round, success or failure determination is performed based on various numerical information stored in the special figure execution area AE. One special figure execution area AE is provided for each of the first result display portion reservation area Ra and the second result display portion reservation area Rb. That is, in the present embodiment, unlike the case of the first embodiment, the game round of the first special figure and the game round of the second special figure are performed one by one.

<Regarding the judgment of special figures and the distribution of jackpot types>
Next, it will be described with reference to FIG. 33 about the propriety determination for the special figure and the distribution of the jackpot type according to the present embodiment. Figure 33 (a) is a special figure propriety table for low probability mode, (b) is a special figure propriety table for high probability mode, (c) is a distribution table for the first special figure, (d) is the second It is the schematic which shows the distribution table for special figures.

When the success/failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the probability of a big hit is 1/200. As shown in (b), the probability of a jackpot result is 5/200. In both the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, all results other than the jackpot result are lost. These win/fail tables are commonly used in each win/fail lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, in the present embodiment, the special winning result is not set in the success/failure table of the second special figure.

When a jackpot result is obtained in the winning lottery of the first special figure, the type of jackpot result is distributed using the distribution table shown in FIG. 33(c). As the types of the jackpot result of the first special figure, a 5R probability variable jackpot result, a 5R normal jackpot result A, and a 5R normal jackpot result B are set. All of these have five rounds to be executed.

The result of the 5R probability variable jackpot is that after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode of the electric accessory 66 of the second operation port 63 after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state). or high-frequency guide state). The high-frequency support mode in this case continues until the next big win is won after the transition to the support mode.

The 5R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes a low probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended, and the 5R normal jackpot result B is a win/fail result after the opening/closing execution mode is ended. This is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state). The high-frequency support mode when the 5R normal jackpot result A is reached is the number of times the special game times are executed after the support mode shifts (for example, the total number of times of the first special game time and the second special game time ) reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 50 times). When the number of executions of the special game times reaches the end reference number of times, the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

In the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state winning in the electric role item open lottery using the open random number counter C4 is the same (both about 1/1), but the high frequency In the support mode, the period in which the electric accessory 66 is in the open state when winning the electric role open state is set longer than in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, the release time in the low-frequency support mode is 0.1 sec (similar to the first embodiment), whereas the release time in the high-frequency support mode is 0.1 sec. The open time is 3.0 sec. While the game ball firing cycle is 0.6 sec, in the high-frequency support mode, 4 to 5 game balls can be expected to win prizes per release of the electric accessory 66 once. In addition, the normal figure opening period and the normal figure ending period in the case of high frequency support are shorter than the opening time (for example, 0.2 sec).

In addition, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the normal pattern fluctuation display time is uniformly 0.1 sec (see FIG. 38(d)). This variable display time is longer than the normal pattern variable display time of 0.05 sec which is mainly selected in the low frequency support mode, but considering that the shooting cycle of the game ball is 0.6 sec, the game progress aspect It's a relatively short time. That is, in the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to repeat the transition of the electric accessory 66 to the support state in a relatively short cycle.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 62 is higher than in the second operation opening 63, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is more likely than the first operation opening 62. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 63 is increased. When a prize is won in the second operation port 63, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls in his possession. be able to.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the winning to the second operation opening 63 is one. In other words, the same number of game balls as the winning number to the second operating port 63 is paid out, and the number of winning balls to the second operating port 63 does not increase. Therefore, even though it is assumed that the electric accessary 66 picks up a considerable number of game balls, excessive privilege for the player is suppressed. In addition, the number of prize balls for winning a prize to the second operation port 63 is not limited to one, and the range in which the benefits are not excessive (for example, the total number of game balls paid out per unit time) can be arbitrarily changed within the range of less than or equal to the number of

When a jackpot result is obtained in the winning lottery of the second special figure, the type of jackpot result is distributed using the distribution table shown in FIG. 33(d). As the types of the jackpot result of the second special figure, a 16R probability variable jackpot result and a 5R normal jackpot result C are set. Of these, the 16R probability variable jackpot results are those in which the number of rounds to be executed is 16.

The 16R variable probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, and the 5R normal jackpot result C is the win/fail lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is finished. This is a jackpot result in which the mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot result continues until the next jackpot is won, and the high-frequency support mode in the case of a 5R normal jackpot result C is a special game cycle after the support mode shifts. continues until the number of times of execution reaches the end reference number of times.

In the present embodiment, the probability that the success or failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode is 50/100 in common for both the first special figure and the second special figure, but the second special figure jackpot result contains 16R jackpot results with a high number of rounds. In addition, the probability that the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode is also higher in the second special figure than in the first special figure. In other words, the winning lottery for the second special symbol is treated more preferentially than that for the first special symbol, and the second operating opening 63 is more advantageous for the player than the first operating opening 62. - 特許庁Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the second operation opening 63 will win a prize.

Next, each control process executed by MPU 602 of main controller 162 will be described in this embodiment.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing game round (special figure game round) control processing in the present embodiment. The process in the figure is performed in place of the game round control process of FIG. 15 according to the first embodiment.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol game round and the second special symbol game round are performed one by one. Therefore, unlike steps S502 and S503 in FIG. 15, the control processing for the first special figure and the second special figure are not separately provided, and the processing common to the first special figure and the second special figure is A game round control process of FIG. 35 is provided. In addition, there is no need to grasp the results of the mutual success or failure lottery and the execution status in the first and second special game rounds, and those processes are omitted. Except for these points, the game round control process in the present embodiment is substantially the same as in the case of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the game round control process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. If the determination in step S1801 is affirmative, this game round control process is terminated. If the determination in step S1801 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the main display section 43 is performing variable display.

When the main display unit 43 is not in variable display, in step S1803, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN, which is the sum of the pending storage numbers of the first special figure and the second special figure, is "0". . If the determination in step S1803 is affirmative, this game round control process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1803 is negative, in step S1804, the first result display portion reservation area Ra or the second result display portion reservation area A data setting process is executed to set the data stored in Rb for variable display. In continuing step S1805, a special figure variation start process is executed. Here, the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure fluctuation start process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the mode is not the high-probability mode, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 33(a)) in step S1902. On the other hand, if it is the high-probability mode, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 33(b)) in step S1903.

After execution of step S1902 or step S1903, it is determined in step S1904 whether the result of the lottery in step S1902 or step S1903 is a jackpot result. If the jackpot is won, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 in step S1905. The second special figure flag is information for identifying that the current game round is the second special figure game round, and is stored in the storage area 634 based on the winning to the second operation opening 63. It is.

If the second special figure flag is not stored, it means that the current game round is the first special figure game round. Refer to c)) to determine the allocation. Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE is included in any of the numerical ranges in the 5R probability variable jackpot result, the 5R normal jackpot result A, and the 5R normal jackpot result B determine whether there is On the other hand, when the second special figure flag is stored, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the second special figure distribution table (see FIG. 33(d)) in step S1907. Specifically, it is determined in which of the numerical ranges in the 16R jackpot result and the 5R normal jackpot result C the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE is included.

After execution of step S1906 or step S1907, in step S1908, it is determined whether or not the distributed game result is a probability variable jackpot result. In the case of the variable probability big win result, in step S1909, the stop result corresponding to the variable probability big win result is set as the stop result in the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS. Also, in step S1909, the 5R probability variable flag or the 16R probability variable flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 as information for specifying which probability variable jackpot result the current jackpot result is.

On the other hand, if the distributed game result is not the probability variable jackpot result, in step S1910, the stop result in the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS corresponds to the normal jackpot result (non-probability variable jackpot result). Set the stop result. Also, in step S1910, one of the 5R normal flags A to C is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 as information for identifying which normal jackpot result is the current jackpot result.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1904, the stop result corresponding to the deviation result is displayed as the stop result in the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS in the stop result setting process for the time of deviation in step S1911. set.

Step S1909, step S1910, step S1911 after executing any of the processing, in step S1912, the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS set the variable display time of the current special figure game round Executes variable display time setting processing for In the variable display time setting process, the value of the variable type counter CS is acquired, and the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS is selected from the variable display time table stored in the ROM 603 . In the following step S1913, the special figure variation command and the special figure type command are set as commands to be transmitted to the notification/production control device 143. The special figure variation command includes information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and information on the variation display time. In addition, information of the game result is included in the special figure type command.

After that, in step S1914, of the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS, the result display portion corresponding to the current special figure game cycle starts the variable display of the pattern. In this case, when the second special figure flag is not stored in the RAM 604, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to the current special figure game round is the first result display unit AS, and the second special figure flag is When it is stored, it specifies that the result display section corresponding to the special game round of this time is the second result display section BS. After that, the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 35), when the affirmative determination is made in step S1802, that is, when the main display unit 43 is in the process of variable display, in step S1806, the variable display of the current special figure game round is performed. Determine whether time has passed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S1807, and then the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S1808, and then a variation end command is set in step S1809. In the fluctuation end process of step S1808, the stop result set in one of the processes of steps S1909 to S1911 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 36) is grasped, and the main display unit displays the pattern as a stop display based on the result. 43. After execution of step S1809, this game round control process is terminated.

<Normal map fluctuation start processing>
Next, the normal pattern fluctuation start processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 37 . This processing is performed in place of the normal pattern fluctuation start processing of FIG. 25 according to the first embodiment.

The processing of steps S2101 to S2104 in FIG. 37 is the same as steps S1501 to S1504 in FIG. Briefly describing these processes, first, in step S2101, referring to the general figure correctness table (see FIG. 10(a)), using the value of the open random number counter C4 stored in the general figure execution area AE3 Normal figure right or wrong determination processing is executed. When the result of the normal figure right/wrong determination is the open result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2102 and the process advances to step S2103 to set the stop result corresponding to the open result as the stop result in the accessory display section 44 . On the other hand, when the result of the normal figure right/wrong determination is the result of the deviation, a negative determination is made in step S2102 and the process proceeds to step S2104 to set the stop result corresponding to the deviation result as the stop result in the character product display section 44.

After execution of step S2103 or step S2014, it is determined in step S2105 whether the current support mode is the high frequency support mode. If the determination in step S2105 is negative, it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the number of normal pattern pending storage FN is four. If the determination in step S2106 is negative, that is, if the general pattern pending storage number FN is 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2107.

In step S2107, referring to the first fluctuation display time table (see FIG. 38A) stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603, the value of the current normal diagram fluctuation type counter C5 Acquire the variable display time corresponding to . In this first fluctuation display time table, the number of normal pattern pending storage FN in the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 10(b)) is 1 to 3. It is similar to the case with That is, a variable display time of 0.05 sec is set with a probability of 999/1000, and a variable display time of 10 sec is set with a probability of 1/1000. Therefore, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, as long as the variable display time of 0.05 sec continues to be set, the normal pattern suspension does not occur (or is unlikely to occur), and the electric power is generated in each normal pattern game. Although the accessory 66 is opened, the state in which the winning to the second operation opening 63 does not occur (or does not occur) continues. Then, by setting the variable display time of 10 sec, the normal pattern suspension is accumulated, and the state shifts to the winning easy state to the second operation port 63.

Here, the winning probability to the second operating port 63 in the easy winning state based on the occurrence of the normal pattern suspension is lower than the winning probability to the second operating port 63 in the high frequency support mode. In other words, the former easy winning state is less advantageous for the player than the latter. Hereinafter, in order to distinguish between the two, the easy-to-win state based on the occurrence of the normal pattern suspension may be referred to as a medium-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S2106, that is, if the number of normal figure pending storage FN is four, in step S2108, it is determined as a big hit result in the special figure propriety determination process and the type is the opening and closing execution mode It is determined whether or not it is distributed to a jackpot result that does not shift to high frequency support after the end of. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 5R normal jackpot result B is won in the lottery pertaining to the first special figure. This processing is performed by determining whether or not the 5R normal flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 .

If a negative determination is made in step S2108, in step S2109, the second variable display time table for the normal map stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 (see FIG. 38(b)) is referred to, Acquire the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter C5 this time. This second fluctuation display time table is for the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 10(b)). is similar to That is, when the number of normal pattern pending storage FN is 4, the fluctuation display time of 0.6 sec is uniformly set regardless of the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the number of normal-pattern pending memories FN is four, and it is possible to continue the medium-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2108 is affirmative, in step S2110, the third variable display time table for the normal figure stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 (see FIG. 38(c)) , to obtain the variation display time corresponding to the value of the normal figure variation type counter C5 this time. In the third variable display time table, two types of selectable variable display time, 200 sec and 0.6 sec, are prepared. Of these, the variable display time of 200 sec is set so as to be at least longer than the execution period (digestion time) of the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot result B. Advantages of setting a variable display time of 200 sec will be described later.

When the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5 is "0" to "499", the fluctuation display time is set to 200 sec, and when the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5 is "500" to "999" , the variable display time is set to 0.6 sec. That is, the probabilities of selecting each variable display time of 200 sec and 0.6 sec are both 500/1000.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2105 is affirmative, that is, if the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, then in step S2111, the table for high-frequency support mode stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is displayed. With reference to the general pattern fluctuation display time table (see FIG. 38(d)), the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter C5 of this time is acquired. In the regular pattern fluctuation display time table for the high frequency support mode, a uniform fluctuation display time of 0.1 sec is set regardless of the value of the regular pattern fluctuation type counter C5.

Step S2107, S2109 ~ S2111 after any of the processing, in step S2112, set the normal figure fluctuation display time obtained in each step to the fluctuation display time counter area provided in various counter areas 633 of RAM604 . In the following step S2113, the general pattern variation command and the general pattern type command are set as commands to be transmitted to the notification/production control device 143. After that, in step S2114, the start processing of the normal pattern fluctuation display is executed, and the normal pattern fluctuation start processing is ended. The processing of steps S2112-S2114 is the same as that of steps S1508-S1510 in FIG.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of game states.

In this embodiment, the operating ports 62, 63 and the through gate 35 are arranged on the left route side, and the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right route side (see FIG. 31). Therefore, in game states other than the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable winning device 65 is opened, the game ball is launched in the left route, and the through gate 35, the second operation port 63 (electric accessory 66) and the second The game is played with the aim of winning a prize in the 1 operation port 62. - 特許庁

In the normal game state in which the success/failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, if the number of normal pattern reserved memories FN is 0, each time a game ball wins the through gate 35, as in the first embodiment. , Although the electric accessary 66 is opened, the game ball does not win in the second operation port 63 or the first normal game state (low frequency support mode) is entered. In the first normal game state, the winning to the second operating port 63 is unlikely, so regarding the special symbol game, the winning lottery of the first special symbol based on the winning to the first operating port 62 is substantially performed. The game is played with the aim of winning a jackpot while receiving.

Then, when the variable display time of 10 sec is set in the normal game round, the normal pattern reservation storage number FN can be increased to 4 pieces. When the normal pattern reserved memory number FN becomes 4, as described in the first embodiment, the second normal game state (middle frequency support mode). By shifting to the second normal game state, both the winning lottery of the first special symbol by the first operating port 62 and the winning lottery of the second special symbol by the second operating port 63 can be received. That is, while receiving the winning support to the second operation opening 63, it is possible to continuously win the game ball to the first operation opening 62 and play the game.

In this embodiment, since the direction of the second operation port 63 is more advantageous than the first operation port 62, by shifting to the second normal game state, the chances of winning or not winning the special figure only increase. Instead, a chance to receive (or become more likely to receive) a winning lottery on the advantageous side is provided. Such a state is continued as long as the number FN of the normal pattern reservation storage is 1 or more, and is continued until the special game state is substantially executed.

In the first normal game state or the second normal game state, when the winning/failure lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol turns into a jackpot result, the variable winning device 65 is opened to shift to a special game state. At this time, under the situation where the normal pattern holding memory number FN is 4 (under the situation of the second normal game state), 5R normal jackpot result B (jackpot result that does not shift to high-frequency support after the end of the opening and closing execution mode) , the normal pattern fluctuation display time of 200 sec is set with a predetermined probability (500/1000). Here, the flow when the normal pattern fluctuation display time of 200 sec is set will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

At the start of the variable display of the first special figure at the timing t21, the winning result of the first special figure will be a big hit result, and when the type of the big hit result is distributed to the 5R normal big hit result B, the subsequent normal game This is grasped at timing t22, which is the start timing of the cycle. Grasping that the 5R normal jackpot result B has occurred is performed based on the fact that the 5R normal flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 as already described.

At the timing t22, the third fluctuation display time table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 38(c)) is referred to as the normal pattern fluctuation display time table, and the normal pattern fluctuation display time is 200 sec with a predetermined probability (500/1000). set. When the normal pattern fluctuation display time of 200 sec is set, the normal pattern fluctuation display is continued over 200 sec from the timing, and a new normal pattern game is not executed during this time. That is, the number FN of the normal pattern reservation memory does not decrease, and four states are maintained.

After the timing t22, at the timing t23 when the variation display time of the first special game round has passed, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot result B is started. In this embodiment, since the variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the right route side, the game ball is shot to the right route during the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode. That is, the game ball does not enter the through gate 35, and new normal pattern reservation information is not replenished.

Five round games are played during the execution period of the open/close execution mode, and the execution period per round is 30 seconds, which is the upper limit opening time of the variable winning device 65, at the longest (excluding the round interval period). The normal figure fluctuation display time of 200 sec is set based on this, and a predetermined surplus time (50 sec) is added to 150 sec, which is the opening time for 5 rounds. This spare time is the opening period in the opening and closing execution mode, the ending period and the interval period (waiting period) between each round, in addition to the fluctuation display time of the first special figure that will be the jackpot result (timing t21 to t23 fluctuation display time) is considered. That is, the margin time is set so as to be longer than the total time.

With such a configuration, the opening and closing execution mode ends earlier than the timing t25 at which the normal pattern fluctuation display ends (timing t24), and the normal pattern pending storage number FN remains four. It becomes possible to end the open/close execution mode. As a result, it is possible to continue playing in the second normal game state even after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and it is possible to continue the second normal game state across the opening/closing execution mode (transition route 401 in FIG. 39). ).

Note that the specific time length of 200 sec is merely an example, and is not limited to this. That is, it is sufficient if the normal figure game times can straddle the opening and closing execution mode, and the number of executions of the round game in the opening and closing execution mode, the upper limit opening time of the variable winning device 65, and the upper limit to the variable winning device 65 It can be arbitrarily set according to various parameters such as the number of winnings.

Incidentally, even if the 5R normal jackpot result B is won in the first normal game state, the third variable display time table is not referred to (see step S2106 in FIG. 37), so the variable display time of 200 sec is set. never That is, the variable display time of 200 sec can be set only when the 5R normal jackpot result B is won under the second normal game state.

In this way, by limiting the opportunity to shift to the second normal game state after the end of the opening/closing execution mode to the case where the jackpot is won under the second normal game state, the difference in the degree of advantage from the first normal game state. can be further clarified, and the attractiveness of the second normal game state can be further improved. In addition, in the second normal game state, not only the first special figure (first operating port 62) on the disadvantageous side but also the second special figure (second operating port 63) on the advantageous side can receive a winning lottery. It is also possible to use it as a mechanism to enable replaying in the second normal game state when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery on the disadvantageous side contrary to expectations.

Returning to the description of FIG. 39, when 0.6 sec normal pattern fluctuation display is set when 5R normal jackpot result B is obtained in the second normal game state, and 5R normal jackpot result B in the first normal game state In this case, as described in the first embodiment, the game ball does not enter the through gate 35 during the execution period of the open/close execution mode, so that the normal pattern reserved storage number FN is reduced to 0. becomes. That is, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game moves to the first normal game state (transition routes 402 and 403).

On the other hand, if the 5R probability variation jackpot result (first special figure) or the 16R probability variation jackpot result (second special figure) is reached, after the opening and closing execution mode is finished, the success or failure lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the first advantageous game state, which is the high-frequency support mode (transition route 405). In this case, even if the 16R probability variable jackpot result is obtained under the second normal game state, the normal value of 0.6 sec (0.05 sec or 10 sec with the decrease in the normal figure pending memory number FN) during execution of the opening and closing execution mode Since the figure fluctuation display time is set, the second normal game state ends during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. That is, once the medium-frequency support for the winning of the second operation port 63 ends, and after the support mode is reset, the high-frequency support is started.

Since the operation ports 62, 63 and the through gate 35 are arranged on the left route side, in the first advantageous game state, the game ball is returned to the left route and played. The high frequency support mode in the first advantageous game state is set so that the degree of support for the winning of the second operation port 63 is higher than the medium frequency support mode in the second normal game state. For this reason, in the first advantageous game state, it is possible to play the game with a higher rate of receiving the win/fail lottery in the second special symbol on the advantageous side than in the second normal game state. Such a state continues until the next jackpot is won.

In addition, when the 5R normal jackpot result A (first special pattern) or the 5R normal jackpot result C (second special pattern) is obtained, the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. It shifts to the second advantageous gaming state (transition route 404). Also in this case, as in the first advantageous game state, the game is played by returning the game ball to the left route. The second advantageous game state is continued until the specified number of times (50 times) of the special game is completed.

After the end of the second advantageous game state, the state is shifted to the normal game state (transition route 406). Whether to shift to the second normal game state is branched. As the end of the specified number of times is approached, it becomes easier to give up and the concentration on the game tends to be interrupted, but with the above configuration, the second advantageous game state is ended with the normal pattern reservation memory number FN increased. Motivation increases, and it becomes easier to concentrate on the game until the end of the second advantageous game state. Furthermore, in the above configuration, the transition destination after the end of the advantageous state is not uniform, and the transition destination changes based on the termination situation of the advantageous state even during the transition to the disadvantageous state. As a result, it is possible not only to reduce the disappointment of the player at the end of the advantageous state, but also to diversify the game.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

As a transition route to a game state that facilitates winning to the electric role product 66 (second operation port 63), apart from the first route triggered by the normal pattern holding memory number FN becoming a predetermined number or more, A configuration is adopted in which a second route is provided when the result of the win/fail lottery results in a big win. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode of transition to the winning easy state, and to expand the range of ways to enjoy the game. In this case, the advantageous degree of the winning easy state (medium frequency support mode) shifted through the first route is made lower than that of the winning easy state (high frequency support mode) shifted through the second route. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent the game from becoming excessively advantageous, but also to increase the chances of shifting to the easy-to-win state while restraining the reduction in the attractiveness of the big win.

When the 5R normal jackpot result B is won in the second normal game state and the prize is won by a predetermined lottery process (selection of normal pattern fluctuation display time), the game ball enters the through gate 35 and then the winning is dealt with. The specified period until the end of the support state of the electric accessory 66 is longer than the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot result B. In this case, the decrease in the normal pattern reserved memory number FN during execution of the opening and closing execution mode is suppressed, and the normal pattern reserved memory number FN can be maintained across the opening and closing execution modes. As a result, the second normal game state can be continued even after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the second normal game state can be continued.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that it has a function of generating a jackpot result (V jackpot) based on the winning of the game ball into the V winning hole. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 41 to 61. FIG. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the second embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 60 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 41 , in this embodiment, a second variable winning device 500 is provided separately from the variable winning device 65 . In order to distinguish between the two, the former may be referred to as the first variable winning device 65 hereinafter.

The second variable winning device 500 is provided below the variable display unit 67 and between the first operating port 62 and the out port 68 (lower center of the game board 60). A game ball flowing down the route can be reached. Incidentally, in the configuration of FIG. 41, the game ball can reach the second variable winning device 500 even from the right route side, but it may be configured to make this impossible or difficult. The configuration of the second variable winning device 500 will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), the second variable winning device 500 is formed with a distribution entrance 501 that is open in the front-rear direction and is large enough for game balls to pass through. A distribution member 502 is provided for switching between a closed state in which balls cannot or hardly pass and an open state in which game balls can pass. The distribution member 502 is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the driving unit 503 for the distribution entrance. The distribution entrance 501 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 504, and the game balls flowing in from the distribution entrance 501 flow down the guide passage 504 to the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), the guide passage 504 is bifurcated from its midway position, and constitutes one of an upstream region 505 forming the upstream side of the branching position and a downstream region of the branching position. V winning area (or useful area) 506, and discharge area (or unused area) 507 constituting the other on the downstream side of the branch position. In addition, at the branch position, a shutter 508 is provided as a distribution means for distributing game balls that have reached the branch position from the upstream area 505 to either the V winning area 506 or the ejection area 507 . When the shutter 508 is not driven by the shutter drive unit 509, the game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the discharge area 507, and when the shutter 508 is driven by the shutter drive unit 509 The game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the V winning area 506 (V winning).

A detection sensor 511 for counting is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which game balls that have flowed into the upstream area 505 always pass. When the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 511 for counting, the payout of the prize balls corresponding to the winning to the second variable prize winning device 500 is executed. The number of prize balls when the second variable prize winning device 500 wins is a predetermined number (for example, 3) smaller than that of the first variable prize winning device 65 . Also, a detection sensor 512 for V winning is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball that has flowed into the V winning area 506 always passes.

Based on the detection of the game ball by the detection sensor 512 for V winning, the opening/closing execution mode is started again after the opening/closing execution mode. More specifically, the opening/closing execution mode in which the second variable prize winning device 500 is opened is an opening/closing execution mode in which one round game is performed and a so-called small prize is won. By being detected by the detection sensor 512 for, after the opening and closing execution mode, the opening and closing execution mode for big wins in which a predetermined number of round games are performed is executed. Hereinafter, the opening/closing execution mode executed based on the detection (V detection) of the game ball by the detection sensor 512 for V prize may be referred to as the opening/closing execution mode for V jackpot.

Further, a detection sensor 513 for ejection is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball that has flowed into the area 507 for ejection always passes. Based on the detection results from the detection sensor 513 for discharge and the detection sensor 512 for V winning, it is determined whether or not the game ball remains in the second variable winning device 500 .

The driving unit 509 for the shutter is periodically driven and controlled from a predetermined timing. Specifically, the drive unit 509 for the shutter is driven and controlled at a predetermined cycle from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode at which the second variable winning device 500 is opened. As a result, the timing at which game balls that have won the second variable winning device 500 are distributed to the V winning area 506 side and the timing at which they are distributed to the ejection area 507 side are periodically switched.

The open/close execution mode in which the second variable winning device 500 is opened includes a plurality of open/close execution modes with different periods in which the distribution member 502 is in the open state. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, by varying the period in which the distribution member 502 is in the open state, the probability that the winning game ball is distributed to the V winning area 506 is relatively high or low. has been Hereinafter, the opening mode with a higher probability of being allocated to the V winning area 506 is referred to as a high distribution mode (high expectation mode), and the opening mode with a lower probability is referred to as a low distribution mode (low expectation mode). It says.

In addition, the total probability of the game ball passing through the V winning area 506 in the opening and closing execution mode of the low allocation mode and the opening and closing execution mode of the high allocation mode in which the game ball can win the second variable winning device 500 is set to be less than a predetermined probability (1/10). In other words, although the probability of passing through the V winning area 506 is increased in the opening and closing execution mode of the high allocation mode, when combined with the probability of passing through the V winning area 506 in the opening and closing execution mode of the low allocation mode, , the winning rate to the second variable winning device 500, the passing rate of the V winning area 506, and the second variable winning device 500 in the opening and closing execution modes of the high allocation mode and the low allocation mode so that the probability is less than the predetermined probability When the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the allocation ratio between the high allocation mode and the low allocation mode is set.

The second variable winning device 500 is preferably formed so that it is possible to visually recognize from the front of the pachinko machine 10 to which of the V winning area 506 and the ejection area 507 the winning game balls are distributed. Specifically, it is preferable that the front side of the second variable winning device 500 is formed to be colored and transparent or colorless and transparent.

<Regarding eligibility judgment for special figures>
Next, the propriety determination for special figures according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43 . FIG. 43(a) is a schematic diagram showing the success/failure table for the first special figure, and (b) the success/failure table for the second special figure.

This embodiment has a first special figure and a second special figure, and is similar to the above-described second embodiment in that each game round relating to them is executed one by one. It does not have a function (so-called probability variation function) to shift from low probability mode to high probability mode. In other words, the probability of winning a big hit by lottery is set to 1 (1/200). Therefore, there is no distinction between low-probability tables and high-probability tables for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In each win/fail table, a big win result, a special win result, and a losing result are set as the results of the win/fail lottery. The number of random numbers that result in a big hit is one in any of the success/failure tables for special symbols, and the probability of winning a big win is 1/200 for both the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side.

As shown in FIG. 43(a), the win/loss table for the first special figure is provided with a disadvantageous special win result. The disadvantageous special winning result is one type of special winning result, and when the disadvantageous special winning result is reached, the opening/closing execution mode of one round by the second variable prize winning device 500 is executed. Specifically, the opening and closing of the second variable winning device 500 is controlled in a low allocation mode in which game balls that have won the second variable winning device 500 are less likely to be distributed to the V winning area 506 . In the success/failure table for the first special figure, the probability of a disadvantageous special winning result is set to 198/200.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43(b), the success/failure table for the second special figure is provided with advantageous special winning results A and B as special winning results in addition to disadvantageous special winning results. For the sake of convenience, the advantageous special winning results A and B will be collectively explained here as advantageous special winning results. The disadvantageous special winning result is similar to the disadvantageous special winning result related to the success/failure table for the first special symbol, but the advantageous special winning result is more advantageous than the disadvantageous special winning result. That is, when an advantageous special winning result is obtained, the second variable winning device 500 is controlled to open and close in a high distribution mode in which game balls that have won the second variable winning device 500 are easily distributed to the V winning area 506 . In the success/failure table for the second special figure, the probability of an advantageous special winning result (total probability of the advantageous special winning result A and the advantageous special winning result B) is set to 99/200, and the probability of a disadvantageous special winning result is It is set to 99/200. In other words, when a special winning result is obtained in the success or failure lottery of the second special figure, it becomes an advantageous special winning result with a probability of 1/2.

Here, the low allocation mode and the high allocation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 44 . Incidentally, since the operation of the shutter 508 is the same in both the low allocation mode and the high allocation mode, the operation of the shutter 508 will be described first. As shown in FIG. 44(a3), at timing t31, which is the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode, the shutter 508 is in a position to distribute the game balls that have won the second variable winning device 500 to the discharge area 507 (outside). positioned. Then, at timing t34 after a waiting period of 1.0 sec has elapsed from timing t31, the shutter 508 is displaced to a position where the winning game ball of the second variable winning device 500 is distributed to the V winning area 506. After that, this state is maintained until a distribution period of 2.0 sec elapses from timing t34, and at timing t35 after the distribution period has elapsed, the position is returned to the position on the deviating side.

In this case, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low apportionment mode which is executed based on the disadvantageous special win result, 0.5 sec is set as the opening period after the start of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. (timing t32), and after the opening period has elapsed, the second variable winning device 500 is in an open state for 0.1 sec (timing t33). That is, in the opening and closing execution mode of the low distribution mode, the opening time (0.1 sec) of the second variable winning device 500 is shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec), and is extremely short. Even if the second variable winning device 500 is in an open state, it is difficult for a game ball to win. Even if the game ball wins, in the opening and closing execution mode of the low allocation mode, the shutter 508 is positioned on the discharge area 507 side from the timing t31 to t34 from the opening to closing of the second variable winning device 500 is completed, the winning game balls are distributed to the area 507 for discharge. That is, as shown in FIGS. 44(a2) and (a3), the period during which the shutter 508 is located on the V winning area 506 side and the period during which the second variable winning device 500 is in the open state do not overlap. Therefore, the game ball cannot pass through the V winning area 506 .

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode of the high distribution mode executed based on the advantageous special winning result, as shown in FIG. 44(b2), 0.5 sec is set as the opening period after the opening/closing execution mode starts. (Timing t42), after the opening period has passed, the second variable prize winning device 500 is opened for 1.8 seconds (timing t43). For this reason, in the open/close execution mode of the high distribution mode, as shown in FIGS. , to the V winning area 506 side. As a result, the period during which the shutter 508 is positioned on the V winning area 506 side overlaps with the period during which the second variable winning device 500 is in the open state, and the period is 1.3 sec. Since the game ball firing cycle is 0.6 sec, approximately two game balls can be won in the second variable prize winning device 500 during this period, so that one or more game balls can enter the V winning area 506. It is passable.

In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode of the high distribution mode, the period (0.5 sec) from when the second variable prize winning device 500 is opened to when the shutter 508 starts displacing toward the V prize winning area 506 side is , the period is shorter than the product of the game ball shooting cycle and the upper limit winning number (10) of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, before the shutter 508 is displaced to the V winning area 506 side after the second variable winning device 500 is opened, the upper limit winning number is reached and the opening/closing execution mode ends (V winning end of the open/close execution mode without being allocated to the use area 506).

It should be noted that the opening/closing control of the second variable winning device 500 in the opening/closing execution mode based on the results of both the advantageous special winning result A and the advantageous special winning result B is the same.

<Regarding the distribution of jackpot types for special figures>
Next, distribution of jackpot types for special figures according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45(a) is a schematic diagram showing a first special figure distribution table, (b) a second special figure distribution table, and (c) a V jackpot distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), 5R jackpot result A and 5R jackpot result B are set as the types of jackpot results of the first special figure. All of these have 5 rounds to be executed. In the 5R jackpot result A, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the end reference number of times in the high-frequency support mode is set to 50 times. On the other hand, the 5R jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The distribution probability to the 5R jackpot result A and the distribution probability to the 5R jackpot result B are both 50/100.

When the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, which is the same as in the second embodiment. In the form, the function of V jackpot based on V winning is installed. As described above, the result of the lottery for the second special figure (second actuation port 63) includes the advantageous special winning result that is likely to cause V winning, so in the high frequency support mode V jackpot is likely to occur. By the way, in the present embodiment, the probability of an advantageous special winning result in the winning or losing lottery of the second special figure is 99/200 (approximately 1/2) (see FIG. 43(b)). In the high-frequency support mode, it becomes a game in which the above-mentioned advantageous special winning result is drawn until the number of executions of the special game round reaches the end reference number (50 times), and it is possible to obtain the V jackpot almost certainly. ing.

As shown in FIG. 45(b), a 16R jackpot result and a 5R jackpot result C are set as the types of jackpot results of the second special figure. The former results in 16 rounds being performed, the latter results in 5. In the 16R jackpot result, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends (50 times as the end reference number), and in the 5R jackpot result C, the support mode changes to the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. This is the result. The distribution probability to the 16R jackpot result is 60/100, and the distribution probability to the 5R jackpot result C is 40/100.

When the V winning result results in a V jackpot result, the type of the V jackpot result is sorted using the V jackpot sorting table shown in FIG. 45(c). As the types of V jackpot results, 16RV jackpot results and 5RV jackpot results are set. The former results in 16 rounds being performed, the latter results in 5. The result of the 16RV jackpot is that the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends (50 times as a standard for ending). This is the result.

In the distribution table for the V jackpot, the type of the V winning flag and the type of the result of the V jackpot, which will be described later, are associated with each other. As will be described in detail later, the type of the V winning flag corresponds to the type of the advantageous special winning result that triggered the V jackpot. Therefore, the type of the V jackpot result is sorted based on the type of the advantageous special win result that substantially triggered the V jackpot. Specifically, if the opening and closing execution mode executed when the V winning occurs is based on the fact that the result of the winning lottery of the second special figure is the advantageous special winning result A, the 16RV jackpot When the opening/closing execution mode which is sorted to the result and executed when the V prize is generated is based on the advantageous special win result B, it is sorted to the 5RV jackpot result. Therefore, the probability of allocation to the 16RV jackpot result is 60/100, which is the same as the probability of the advantageous special winning result A among the advantageous special winning results, and the allocation probability to the 5RV jackpot result is the advantageous special winning result B It becomes 40/100 which is the same as the probability of becoming.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the winning lottery for the second special figure includes the advantageous special winning result, and the acquisition of the V jackpot can be expected, and the shift to the high frequency support mode. The probability of doing so is also higher in the second special figure than in the first special figure. In other words, the winning lottery for the second special symbol is treated more preferentially than that for the first special symbol, and the second operating opening 63 is more advantageous for the player than the first operating opening 62. - 特許庁Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the second operation opening 63 will win a prize.

Opening/closing execution modes corresponding to the 16R jackpot results, 5R jackpot results A to C, 16RV jackpot results, and 5RV jackpot results are performed by controlling the opening/closing of the first variable winning device 65 . Since the first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the right route side, the player shoots game balls to the right route to play while the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the result of the big win is executed.

Next, each control process executed by MPU 602 of main controller 162 will be described in this embodiment. In the following description, the description of the same processes as in the above embodiments will be simplified or omitted as appropriate.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing normal processing in this embodiment. This process is performed in place of the normal process of FIG. 14 according to the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, V allocation setting processing (processing for controlling the position of the shutter 508) in step S2306 is added to the normal processing in FIG. Details of the V allocation setting process will be described later.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, as in the case of the second embodiment, the first special figure game round and the second special figure game round are configured to be performed one by one, so the game of step S2303 As the spin control process, the game spin control process of FIG. 35 according to the second embodiment is executed.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
Next, the special figure fluctuation start processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is performed in place of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 36 according to the second embodiment.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, first in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM604. The second special figure flag is information for identifying that the current game round is the second special figure game round, and is stored in the storage area 634 based on the winning to the second operation opening 63. It is.

If the second special figure flag is not stored, the success or failure determination is performed with reference to the success or failure table for the first special figure (see FIG. 43 (a)) in step S2402, and the second special figure flag is stored. If it is, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the second special figure (see FIG. 43(b)) in step S2403. After execution of step S2402 or step S2403, in step S2404, it is determined whether or not the result of each of the above determinations is a jackpot result.

If the jackpot is won, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 in step S2405. If the second special figure flag is not stored, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the first special figure distribution table (see FIG. 45 (a)) in step S2406, and the second special figure flag is If it is stored, in step S2407 the distribution table for the second special figure (see FIG. 45(b)) is referred to for distribution determination.

After execution of step S2406 or step S2407, in step S2408, it is determined whether or not the distributed game result is a 16R jackpot result. If the result is the 16R big win result, the stop result corresponding to the 16R big win result is set as the stop result on the main display section 43 in step S2409. Also, in step S2409, the 16R flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 as information for identifying the type of the result of the big win this time.

If the distributed game result is not the 16R jackpot result, it means that it is one of the 5R jackpot results AC. In this case, in step S2410, the stop result corresponding to the 5R jackpot result is set as the stop result on the main display section 43. FIG. Also, in step S2410, one of the 5R flags A to C is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 as information for specifying the type of the result of the big win this time.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined in step S2411 whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in step S2402 or step S2403 is a special winning result. If it is a special winning result, it is determined whether or not the type of the special winning result is the advantageous special winning result A or B in step S2412. If it is one of these advantageous special winning results, the stop result corresponding to the advantageous special winning result is set as the stop result on the main display section 43 in step S2413. Further, in step S2413, as information for specifying the type of this special winning result, the advantageous special winning flag A (corresponding to the advantageous special winning result A) or the advantageous special winning flag B (corresponding to the advantageous special winning result B) is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 .

If the type of the special winning result is not the advantageous special winning result A or B, that is, if it is the disadvantageous special winning result, in step S2414, the stop result corresponding to the disadvantageous special winning result is displayed as the stop result on the main display unit 43. set. Moreover, in step S2414, as information for specifying the type of the special winning result of this time, a disadvantageous special winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM604.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2411, that is, if the result of the win/loss determination this time is neither a big hit result nor a special hit result, in step S2415, the stop result on the main display unit 43 corresponds to the out result. Set the stop result.

After steps S2409, S2410, S2413-S2415 are executed, the same processes as steps S1912-S1914 in FIG. 36 are executed in steps S2416-S2418, and then this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is performed in place of the game state transition process of FIG. 22 according to the first embodiment.

In this game state transition process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2502, and any of the 16R flag, any one of the 5R flags A to C, the advantageous special winning flags A and B, and the disadvantageous special winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. It is determined whether or not one of the special winning flags or one of the V winning flags A and B is stored. The V win flag is a flag stored at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the occurrence of the V winning in the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result. A new opening/closing execution mode is executed after the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result based on the storage of the V winning flag.

If the negative determination is made in step S2502, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is, and if the affirmative determination is made in step S2502, in step S2503, the end timing of the corresponding game round variation display or the corresponding opening/closing execution mode Determine whether or not it is the end timing. Specifically, if any jackpot flag or any special win flag is stored, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the corresponding game cycle, and if the V win flag is stored. determines whether or not it is time to end the corresponding open/close execution mode. If it is neither of the end timings, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it is either end timing, the flow advances to step S2504 to execute opening/closing execution mode start processing. This process is similar to step S1204 in FIG. In the subsequent step S2505, the presence or absence of a special hit flag is checked in order to set the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode of this time. That is, it is determined whether or not any one of the advantageous special winning flags A and B and the disadvantageous special winning flag is stored.

If none of these special winning flags are stored, it is determined whether or not the 16R flag or the V winning flag A is stored in step S2506. If any of these flags are stored, the round number counter RC is set to "16" in step S2507, and if none of them are stored, the round number counter RC is set to "5" in step S2508. to set. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, that is, if any of the advantageous special winning flags A and B or the disadvantageous special winning flag is stored, "1" is set to the round number counter RC in step S2509. .

After executing any of the processes of steps S2507 to S2509, the opening command setting process of step S2510 and the external signal setting process of step S2511 are executed. In addition, in the external signal setting process, whether or not the special winning signal output state may be changed depending on the type of the special winning result. For example, based on the advantageous special winning result among the advantageous special winning result and the disadvantageous special winning result, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special winning signal provided on the external terminal plate 213 is set to the special winning signal output state, and the disadvantageous winning result is selected. Based on the special winning result, it may be configured not to output the special winning signal. In this way, in the management control device on the game hall side, while it is possible to grasp that the opening and closing execution mode based on the advantageous special winning result has occurred, the opening and closing execution mode based on the frequently occurring disadvantageous special winning result can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicated data management and increase in processing load due to frequent signal output.

Returning to the description of step S2501, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, and the process proceeds to step S2512. In step S2512, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. When the waiting time for opening has passed, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S2513.

In the big winning gate opening/closing process, when the big winning gate 65a or the sorting gate 501 is closed, the variable gate for the first variable winning device 65 is set on the condition that the round number counter RC is equal to or greater than "1". By driving the winning driving unit 65c or the driving unit 503 for the second variable winning device 500, the big winning opening 65a or the distribution entrance 501 is opened. In addition, when the big winning opening 65a or the distribution entrance 501 is open, a predetermined time (30 sec for the big winning opening 65a, 30 seconds for the distribution entrance 501) 0.1 sec or 1.8 sec) has elapsed or a predetermined number of game balls (both 10) have won, the drive state of the variable winning driving unit 65c or the driving unit 503 is stopped. Then, the big winning opening 65a or the sorting entrance 501 is closed.

Further, in the big winning opening/closing process, it is determined whether or not a V winning has occurred based on the detection result of the V winning detection sensor 512 provided in the second variable winning device 500 . Thereby, when a game ball wins in the second variable prize winning device 500 in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the advantageous special winning result and the game ball flows into the V winning area 506, it is detected. When it is determined that V winning has occurred, the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 .

After the execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the determination processes of steps S2514 and S2515 are executed, and then the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S2516. Now, referring to FIG. 49, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described.

In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, first, in step S2601, the 16R flag, any one of the 5R flags A to C, and one of the V winning flags A and B are stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. It is determined whether or not the winning flag is stored. If any of them are stored, it is determined in step S2602 whether or not the 5R flag A, 16R flag or V win flag A is stored in the storage area 634. FIG.

As a result, if none of these flags is stored, the 5R flags B, C or V winning flag B (a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode) is displayed in the storage area 634. means stored. In this case, at step S2603, the 5R flags B, C or V winning flag B in the storage area 634 are erased, and then the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2602 is affirmative, the 5R flag A, 16R flag or V winning flag A in the storage area 634 is deleted in step S2604, and then a high frequency support flag is set in the same area 634 in step S2605. set. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. In the following step S2606, the value of the high frequency game number counter is set to "50". The high frequency game number counter is for counting the number of times the special figure game is executed in the high frequency support mode. clemented. Then, when the value of the high-frequency game number counter becomes "0", the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Next, in step S2607, a high-frequency support command (high-frequency support setting information), which is information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent to the notification/production control device 143. Set as a command to be sent to After that, the migration process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2601, that is, if none of the 16R flag, any one of the 5R flags A to C, and the V winning flags A and B are stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 , advantageous special winning flags A and B or disadvantageous special winning flags are stored. In this case, the process advances to step S2608 to determine whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the storage area 634. FIG. As already described, the V winning flag is stored when it is determined that a V winning has occurred in the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S2513 in FIG.

If the V winning flag is stored, in the following step S2609, after erasing the advantageous special winning flags A and B or the disadvantageous special winning flag stored in the storage area 634 together with the V winning flag, the process proceeds to step S2610. Then, the V winning flag A or B is stored in the same area 634 . At this time, when the advantageous special winning flag A is stored in the storage area 634 before the execution of step S2609, the V winning flag A is stored, and the advantageous special winning flag A is stored in the storage area 634 before the execution of step S2609. If the flag B is stored, the V winning flag B is stored. After that, in step S2611, a V winning command (V winning information) is set as a command to be transmitted to the notification/production control device 143 . Note that the process of step S2611 may be executed when it is determined that a V prize has occurred in the process of opening and closing the big winning opening of step S2513. After execution of step S2611, the transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2608, that is, when it is determined that the V winning flag is not stored in the storage area 634, the advantageous special winning flags A and B stored in the same area 634 or the disadvantageous special winning flags The flag is erased, and the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 48, after executing the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in step S2516, the opening/closing execution mode end processing is executed in step S2517, and then the transition processing of this game state is ended.

In the game state transition process described above, when the game ball passes through the V winning area 506 during the opening and closing execution mode of one round based on the special winning result, the V winning flag is stored based thereon, and then the V winning flag is stored. , a new opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the V jackpot is started after the opening/closing execution mode. In the new opening/closing execution mode, "16" or "5" is input to the round number counter RC in step S2507 or S2508, and 16 or 5 round games are played on the first variable winning device 65 side. It will happen. Since the number of prize balls when the first variable prize winning device 65 wins is 15, which is more than the second variable prize winning device 500 (three), the new opening/closing execution mode is By doing so, it is possible to expect to acquire a large number of game balls. On the other hand, if the V winning area 506 cannot be passed during the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result, the opening/closing execution mode is terminated as it is, and a new opening/closing execution mode is not started thereafter.

<V distribution setting processing>
Next, V allocation setting processing in step S2306 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing V allocation setting processing.

In the V distribution setting process, first, in S2701, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the open/close execution mode. If it is the start timing, the timer counter TC provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604 is set to "500" (that is, 1.0 sec) in step S2702. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, at a cycle of 2 msec. In the following step S2703, "1" is set to the distribution number counter HC provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604. FIG. The distribution number counter HC is a counter for the MPU 602 to grasp the number of operations of the shutter 508 .

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or if the process of step S2703 has been executed, the process advances to step S2704. In step S2704, it is determined whether or not the shutter 508 is located on the distribution side to the V winning area 506 by grasping the drive state of the driving section 509 for the shutter. If the shutter 508 is positioned on the side of distribution to the discharge area 507, it is determined in step S2705 whether or not the timer counter TC is "0".

If the timer counter TC is not "0", the main distribution setting process is ended. . If a negative determination is made in step S2706, that is, if the allocation number counter HC is "1", the shutter 508 is displaced to the allocation side position to the V winning area 506 in step S2707. At next step S2708, the timer counter TC is set to "1000". As a result, the period during which the shutter 508 is positioned on the distribution side to the V winning area 506 is set to 2.0 seconds. After execution of step S2708 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, the distribution setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2704 is affirmative, that is, if the shutter 508 is positioned on the side of allocation to the V winning area 506, it is determined in step S2709 whether or not the timer counter TC is "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the period for positioning the shutter 508 on the distribution side to the V winning area 506 has elapsed. If the determination in step S2709 is affirmative, the shutter 508 is displaced to the position on the distribution side to the discharge area 507 in step S2710, and then the distribution number counter HC is decremented by 1 in step S2711. After execution of step S2711 or when a negative determination is made in step S2709, the distribution setting process is terminated.

<Normal map fluctuation start process>
Next, it demonstrates, referring FIG. 51 for normal figure fluctuation start processing which concerns on this Embodiment. This processing is performed in place of the normal pattern fluctuation start processing of FIG. 25 according to the first embodiment. Specifically, steps S2805 to S2807 are executed instead of steps S1505 to S1507 in FIG.

Describing these processes, in step S2805, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode. If the determination in step S2805 is negative, in step S2806, refer to the normal figure fluctuation display time table for the low frequency support mode stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603, this normal figure fluctuation Obtain the variable display time corresponding to the value of the type counter C5. Here, the normal figure fluctuation display time table for the low frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 52(a).

In the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the low frequency support mode, the normal pattern reservation storage number FN in the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 10(b)) is It is the same as the case of 1 to 3. That is, a variable display time of 0.05 sec is set with a probability of 999/1000, and a variable display time of 10 sec is set with a probability of 1/1000. Therefore, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, as long as the variable display time of 0.05 sec continues to be set, the normal pattern suspension does not occur (or is unlikely to occur), and the electric power is generated in each normal pattern game. Although the accessory 66 is opened, the state in which the winning to the second operation opening 63 does not occur (or does not occur) continues. Then, by setting the variable display time of 10 sec, the normal pattern suspension is accumulated, and the state shifts to the winning easy state to the second operation port 63.

However, in the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the low frequency support mode according to the present embodiment, unlike the normal pattern fluctuation display time table of FIG. There is no association between the stored number FN and the variable display time. That is, even if the variable display time is not distinguished by the normal pattern reserved memory number FN, even if the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is 4, it is the same as when the memory number FN is 1 to 3 A selection of variable display times is made. That is, when the number FN of the normal pattern reservation memory is four, basically the variable display time of 0.05 sec is set. For this reason, in the present embodiment, after the normal pattern holding memory number FN becomes 4 by setting the variable display time of 10 sec, the memory number FN gradually decreases even if the game ball is continued to be shot. It is something that will be done. In addition, the stop display time (determined display period) of the normal figure game times in the low frequency support mode is uniformly set to 0.4 sec regardless of the length of the variable display time.

Returning to the explanation of the normal figure fluctuation display time in FIG. 51, if the affirmative determination is made in step S2805, that is, if the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, in step S2807, the fluctuation display time table storage area of ROM603 By referring to the general pattern fluctuation display time table for the high frequency support mode stored in 623, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter C5 of this time is acquired. As shown in FIG. 52(b), in the normal figure fluctuation display time table for the high-frequency support mode, one type of 0.05 sec is prepared as a selectable fluctuation display time. That is, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, regardless of the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5, the fluctuation display time of 0.05 sec is always selected and set. The stop display time in the high-frequency support mode is uniformly set to 0.4 sec as in the low-frequency support mode.

<Special effect processing>
Next, the special effect processing executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 58. FIG. The special effect processing is for performing a predetermined effect display triggered by the setting of the variable display time of 10 sec in the normal game round. This process is activated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec).

As shown in FIG. 53, in the special effect processing, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, whether or not a command indicating that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received, in other words, whether or not the above command is stored in the RAM 654 of the MPU 652 determine whether

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, this special effect processing is terminated as it is, while if an affirmative determination is made, it is determined in step S2902 whether or not the second variable winning device 500 is open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an open command (see step S2513 in FIG. 48) relating to the second variable winning device 500 from the main control device 162 is stored in the RAM 654 of the MPU 652. As described above, the second variable prize winning device 500 is a prize winning device whose opening and closing is controlled in the opening execution mode corresponding to the special winning result. is being executed.

When it is determined that the second variable prize winning device 500 is not open, it is determined whether or not the game cycle relating to the second special figure is being executed in step S2903. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation command (see step S2417 in FIG. 47) related to the second special figure transmitted from the main controller 162 is received. When the game round related to the second special figure is not executed, the process for the first special effect is executed in step S2904. Now, the first special effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the first special effect processing, first, in step S2911, it is determined whether or not the general pattern variation command (see step S2809 in FIG. 51) transmitted from the main controller 162 is received. judge. If you have received the normal figure fluctuation command, in step S2912, based on the normal figure fluctuation type command (see step S2809 in FIG. 51) transmitted from the main controller 162, the normal pertaining to the above fluctuation command It is determined whether or not the variable display time of the figure game round is set to 10 sec. If a negative determination is made in either step S2911 or S2912, the first special effect processing is terminated, while if an affirmative determination is made in step S2912, the variable display time is set to 10 seconds in step S2913. It is determined whether or not the regular game round is being executed.

If it is not being executed, that is, if it is time to start fluctuation of the normal game round, the display processing of the first special effect display is executed in step S2914, and then the first special effect processing is terminated. The first special effect display S1 will be described with reference to FIG. 57(a).

The first special effect display S1 prompts the player to shoot a game ball aiming at the through gate 35. FIG. That is, the variable display time of the normal game times is a special time that is much longer than the normal time (0.05 sec), and the situation is such that it is easy to accumulate the normal game retention memory number FN. By notifying that a prize should be awarded, the general pattern reserved memory number FN is induced to become the upper limit value (4 pieces). In the first special effect display S1, as shown in FIG. 57(a), for example, in the upper left part of the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, an arrow pointing to the through gate 35 is displayed together with an arrow pointing to the through gate 35. A configuration is conceivable in which a character display 521 such as "Let me do it" is displayed.

In addition, in the first special effect display S1, it is preferable to inform that the game ball should be shot or should be continued in combination with the character display 521 described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), a character display 522 of "Don't stop firing" may be displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 75a so as not to overlap with the character display 521 described above. As a result, although the variable display time of 10 seconds was set, the game ball did not enter the through gate 35 because the game ball was not fired, and the normal pattern holding memory number FN was sufficiently accumulated. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that there was not.

Returning to the description of the first special effect processing in FIG. 54, in the display processing of the first special effect display in step S2914, a command including the information of the content of the first special effect display S1 is output to the display control device 660. . The display control device 660 that has received the command reads the image data for the first special effect display S1 from the character ROM, and controls the pattern display device 75 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen 75a. .

In addition, since the first special effect display S1 is executed based on the general-purpose game round, at the execution start timing or after the execution, on the display screen 75a, the symbol (effect symbol) related to the first special figure is displayed in a variable manner. There are cases where it is In that case, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the character display 521 and the character display 522 should be displayed on the front side of the special effect symbol, and the first special effect display S1 should be executed. However, the character display 521 and the character display 522 are superimposed on the pattern within a range where at least the player can recognize that the effect pattern for the special figure is displayed in a variable manner. It only covers a part of the pattern row (variable display area) in the effect pattern. As a result, it is possible for the player to properly grasp whether or not the special game round is being executed, and to prevent the player from overlooking the first special effect display S1.

Returning to the description of FIG. 54, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2913, that is, when the normal game round is being executed, in step S2915, whether or not it is the start timing for starting the second special effect display S2. judge. The second special effect display S2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57(b) and (c).

In the second special effect display S2, two kinds of notifications are performed step by step. Specifically, the second special effect display S2-1 shown in FIG. 57(b) is executed as the first step, and the second special effect display S2-2 shown in FIG. 57(c) is executed as the second step. It is a thing. The second special effect display S2-1 of the first stage indicates to the player that a chance to win a V jackpot has arrived. As the second special effect display S2-1, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(b), it is conceivable to display a character display 523 of "V Challenge!!" in the central portion of the display screen 75a. At that time, the character display 523 should be displayed larger than the character displays 521 and 522 in order to attract the player's attention, but this impedes the visibility of the effect pattern for the special figure. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the display area 524 for variably displaying the effect pattern for the special figure is reduced, and the character display 523 and the display area 524 are displayed without overlapping, or the character display 523 A display area 524 may be provided in a blank area (a portion without characters) in . In that case, the display area 524 may be made smaller than the character display 523 so that the character display 523 is conspicuous.

The second special effect display S2-2 of the second stage suggests to the player that the game ball should be shot aiming at the electric accessory 66 (second actuation opening 63), and is the second actuation. It encourages the winning of game balls into the mouth 63 . The flow until the V jackpot is won is the winning of the game ball into the second operating port 63 → execution of the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing control of the second variable winning device 500) corresponding to the result of the special winning → second variable winning device The order of the winning of the game ball to 500→the passage of the game ball to the V winning area 506, the second special effect display S2-2 is for guiding the execution of the first step. As the second special effect display S2-2, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(c), it is conceivable to display a character display 525 of "step 1, aim for the electric chew!" be done. “Electric Chu” is an abbreviation for electric tulip, in other words, it is a common name for the electric accessory 66 and the second operating port 63 .

In this embodiment, the second special effect display S2 is started from a predetermined time (for example, 3 sec) before the end of the variable display of the normal game round, and in the process of step S2915 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the timing has come three seconds before the end of the variable display. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2915, display processing of the second special effect display S2 is executed in step S2916. In step S2916, a command including information on the content of the second special effect display S2 is output to the display control device 660, and the display control device 660 displays a pattern such that the second special effect display S2 is performed on the display screen 75a. It controls the display device 75 . After execution of step S2916 or when a negative determination is made in step S2915, the first special effect processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the special effect processing in FIG. 53, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2903, that is, when the game round relating to the second special figure is being executed, the second special effect processing is executed in step S2905. After that, the processing for this special effect is terminated. Here, the second special effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the second special effect processing, first, in step S2921, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery in the game round of the second special figure being executed is the special winning result. This process is performed based on the second special figure variation command transmitted from the main controller 162 . If the result of the winning lottery of the second special figure is the special winning result, it is determined in step S2922 whether or not it is time to start the third special effect display S3-A. The third special effect display S3-A will be described with reference to FIG. 57(d).

The third special effect display S3-A suggests to the player that the game ball should be shot aiming at the second variable prize winning device 500, and the game ball wins the second variable prize winning device 500. It encourages The third special effect display S3-A induces the execution of winning the game ball to the second variable winning device 500→passing the game ball through the V winning area 506 in the flow until the V jackpot is won. It is for As the third special effect display S3-A, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(d), it is conceivable to display a character display 526 of "step 2, aim for the lower attacker!" be done. The “lower attacker” refers to the second variable winning device 500 and is based on the fact that the winning device 500 is arranged in the lower center of the game board 60 . Also in this case, the character display 526 is displayed larger than the display area 524, as in the case of the second special effect display S2.

In this embodiment, the third special effect display S3-A is started from a predetermined time (for example, 2 sec) before the end of the variable display of the second special game round, and in the process of step S2922 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the timing has come 2 seconds before the end of the variable display of the second special figure game round. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2922, display processing of the third special effect display S3-A is executed in step S2923. In step S2923, a command including information on the contents of the third special effect display S3-A is output to the display control device 660, and the display control device 660 displays the third special effect display S3-A on the display screen 75a. The symbol display device 75 is controlled so as to be displayed. Further, when the third special effect display S3-A is executed, the effect pattern for the special figure (for example, 7*7) corresponding to the special winning result is stopped in the display area 524 corresponding to the end timing of the variable display. Is displayed. After execution of step S2923 or when a negative determination is made in step S2922, the process for the second special effect is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2921, that is, if the result of the winning lottery in the game round of the second special figure being executed is not a special winning result, whether the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot result in step S2924 determine whether or not If the result of the winning lottery is a big winning result, the display processing of the third special effect display S3-B is executed in step S2925. The third special effect display S3-B notifies the player that a big win has occurred. For example, as shown in FIG. A configuration is conceivable. The execution timing of the third special effect display S3-B can be the end timing of the variable display in the game round of the second special symbol, for example. Further, when the third special effect display S3-B is executed, a special effect pattern (for example, 777) corresponding to the big hit result is stopped and displayed in the display area 524. FIG. After execution of step S2925 in FIG. 55 or when a negative determination is made in step S2924, the second special effect processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the special effect processing in FIG. 53, if the determination in step S2902 is affirmative, that is, if the second variable winning device 500 is open, the V winning processing is executed in step S2906. Here, the processing for V winning will be described with reference to FIG.

In the V winning process, first, in step S2931, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main controller 162, that is, whether or not a V winning has occurred. If the V winning command has been received, display processing of the fourth special effect display S4 is executed in step S2932. The fourth special effect display S4 notifies the player that a V win has occurred, in other words, that a V jackpot has been won. As the fourth special effect display S4, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), it is conceivable to display a character display 528 of "V jackpot!!" in the central portion of the display screen 75a. Also in this case, the character display 528 is displayed larger than the display area 524, as in the case of the second special effect display S2. In the process of step S2932 in FIG. 56, a command including information on the contents of the fourth special effect display S4 is output to the display control device 660, and the display control device 660 displays the fourth special effect display S4 on the display screen 75a. The symbol display device 75 is controlled so as to be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2931, that is, if the V winning command from the main controller 162 has not been received, it is determined in step S2933 whether or not the second variable winning device 500 is closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a closing command (see step S2513 in FIG. 48) related to the second variable winning device 500 transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. If the second variable winning device 500 is not closed (if the second variable winning device 500 is open), this V winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second variable winning device 500 is closed, it is determined whether or not the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 0 in step S2934.

If the number of pending memories of the second special figure is not 0, that is, if it is 1 or more, there is a possibility that the second variable winning device 500 will be opened again, in this case the fifth special effect display at step S2935 The display processing of S5 is executed, and then this V winning processing is terminated. The fifth special effect display S5 informs the player that there is still a chance to win the V jackpot. As the fifth special effect display S5, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(c), it is conceivable to display a character display 529 of "Still!!" in the central portion of the display screen 75a. By the way, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls is set to four when the game ball enters the second operation opening 63, as in the second embodiment. Therefore, if the hold information of the second special figure can be stored up to the upper limit, the second variable winning device 500 can be opened four times.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2934 of FIG. 56, display processing of the sixth special effect display S6 is executed in step S2936. The sixth special effect display S6 informs the player that the V jackpot was not obtained. As the sixth special effect display S6, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(d), a configuration is conceivable in which a character display 530 of "Unfortunate..." is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a. In the processing of steps S2935 and S2936 in FIG. 56, a command including information on the contents of the fifth special effect display S5 or the sixth special effect display S6 is output to the display control device 660. FIG. The display control device 660 controls the pattern display device 75 so that the effect display S5 or S6 is performed on the display screen 75a.

Briefly summarizing the flow of the above special effect processing, when the fluctuation display time of the normal figure game round is set to 10 sec under the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the fluctuation start of the normal figure game round At the timing, the first special effect display S1 shown in FIG. 57(a) is displayed. After that, 3 sec before the end of the normal game cycle, the second special effect display S2-1 shown in FIGS. 57(b) and (c) is displayed, and then the second special effect display S2-2 is displayed. be done.

After the end of the general pattern game round, the general pattern reservation information stored in the execution period of the game round is digested, and the electric accessory 66 is released based on the result of the general pattern success or failure lottery becoming the release result. . At that time, when the game ball wins the second operation hole 63, the game round related to the second special figure is started. When the result of the winning lottery of the relevant game round is a special winning result, the third special effect display S3-A shown in FIG. 57(d) is displayed two seconds before the end of the variable display of the game round.

When the result of the winning/failing lottery related to the second special figure is the special winning result, the second variable winning device 500 is opened after the game round of the second special figure related to the winning/failure lottery is finished. Then, when the game ball wins the second variable winning device 500 and the game ball flows into the V winning area 506, the fourth special effect display S4 shown in FIG. 58(b) is displayed. Conversely, if the game ball does not win the second variable winning device 500, or even if the game ball wins the second variable winning device 500, it is distributed to the discharge area 507, the second special figure at that time The fifth special effect display S5 shown in FIG. 58(c) or the sixth special effect display S6 shown in FIG. 58(d) is displayed according to the number of pending memories. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery related to the second special figure is a jackpot result, the third special effect display shown in FIG. S3-B is displayed.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. FIG. FIG. 59 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of game states.

When the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the number of normal figure pending storage FN=0 (first normal game state), it is the same as the first normal game state in the second embodiment. That is, in the first normal game state, the game is advanced by winning substantially only to the first operation port 62 . Then, when the 5R jackpot result A is obtained in the success or failure lottery related to the first operation port 62 (first special figure), after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the support mode shifts to an advantageous game state in which the high frequency support mode. do. Since the ratio of the 5R jackpot result A to the jackpot results of the first special figure is 50/100 (see FIG. 45(a)), when a jackpot is achieved, the game shifts to an advantageous game state with a probability of 50%.

In the advantageous game state, winning to the second operation port 63 is likely to occur, and many of the results of the winning lottery related to the second operation port 63 (second special figure) are special winning results (Fig. 43(b)). Therefore, in the advantageous game state, the second variable winning device 500 is frequently controlled to open and close in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result. At that time, if the type of the special winning result is the advantageous special winning result A or B, the game ball winning the second variable winning device 500 is easily distributed to the V winning area 506, and if the disadvantageous special winning result is the second The game balls that have won the variable prize winning device 500 are easily distributed to the discharge area 507 (see FIG. 44). Since the ratio of the advantageous special winning results A and B to the special winning result of the second special figure is 50% (see FIG. 43 (b)), it is easy to be advantageous even if there is a restriction of the specified number of times (50 times) Special winning results A and B can be assigned, and V jackpots are likely to occur.

In the present embodiment, the first operating port 62, the through gate 35, the second operating port 63, and the electric accessory 66 are arranged on the left route side, and the second variable winning device 500 receives game balls that flow down the left route. It is possible to win prizes. For this reason, not only in the first normal game state, but also in the advantageous game state, the game ball is shot to the left route side and played, but in the first normal game state, it is almost impossible to expect a V jackpot. On the other hand, V jackpots are likely to occur in the advantageous game state, and the game characteristics are clearly separated. Moreover, the V jackpot tends to increase the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode, and the probability of shifting to an advantageous game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends is also high (Fig. 45). Since the game state at the beginning of the game is the first normal game state, the player first becomes a jackpot result in the first special drawing lottery, and then distributes it to the 5R jackpot result A as the jackpot type. What matters most is whether it can be achieved.

Under such a configuration, in the present embodiment, when the variable display time of the normal pattern game round is set to 10 sec in the first normal game state, the normal pattern reservation storage number FN can be increased to 4 pieces. In this case, as described in each of the above embodiments, the second normal game state in which winning to the second operation port 63 is more likely to occur than in the first normal game state, although not as much as in the high frequency support mode. Transition. In other words, even if the game state does not shift to the advantageous game state, the opportunity to receive the winning lottery at the second operating port 63 (second special figure) comes. The aspect of the winning lottery of the second special figure (distribution of the probability of special winning result and the type of special winning result) does not differ between the second normal game state and the advantageous game state, so the normal game state and Nevertheless, a chance of winning the V jackpot will be generated.

However, in the present embodiment, the variable display time is not distinguished according to the normal pattern reservation memory number FN, and even if the normal pattern reservation memory number FN is 4, the same , and most of them are set to 0.05 sec. When the fluctuation display time is set to 0.05 sec, the digestion cycle of the normal pattern reservation information is the normal pattern game period (the period from the start of the normal pattern game cycle to the start of the next normal pattern game cycle) 0.55 sec, which is shorter than 0.6 sec, which is the winning cycle of the game ball to the through gate 35 . For this reason, after the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is increased by setting the variable display time to 10 sec, the normal pattern reserved information is consumed in a cycle shorter than the replenishment cycle, and the normal pattern reserved memory number FN gradually decreases.

For example, as shown in FIG. 60, after the end of the normal game round with a variable display time of 10 sec, the first time at timing t51 delayed by the opening time (0.1 sec) of the electric accessory 66 from the timing In the case where the normal game round is started and the first winning to the through gate 35 occurs at the timing t52 delayed by 0.1 sec from there, as shown in FIG. Assuming that 35 wins, it is possible to execute 11 normal game rounds per one normal pattern reservation memory number FN decreases. That is, until the 10 normal game rounds are executed, even if the normal game reservation number FN decreases by 1, the game ball enters the through gate 35 before the second decreases. Although the reservation information is replenished, the 11th normal game round will be executed before the replenishment of the reservation information. Such a flow will be the same in the process in which the normal pattern reserved memory number FN decreases by 1, so after the normal pattern reserved memory number FN becomes 4, the number of memories will be 0. It is possible to execute a maximum of 44 normal game rounds before becoming, and it is possible to continue the second normal game state during that time.

Incidentally, the release cycle of the electric accessory 66 and the arrival cycle of the game ball to the specific area RA2 (see FIG. 5(b)) in this embodiment are the same as those shown in FIG. 27 ( Similar to case b), they are 0.55 sec and 0.6 sec, respectively. In this case, the time difference A (the time difference of the arrival timing with respect to the opening timing) and the time difference B (the time difference of the arrival timing with respect to the closing timing) changes by 0.05 sec each time the normal game is repeated, to the second operation port 63 The winning probability of the game ball is 2/11 (approximately 1/6).

Under these conditions, when the game ball can be won in the second operation port 63, the result of the winning lottery becomes an advantageous special winning result, so that the second variable winning device 500 makes a high distribution. An opening/closing execution mode in which opening/closing is controlled in a manner is executed. Then, if a game ball can be won in the second variable prize winning device 500 in the opening/closing execution mode, a V prize is generated and a V jackpot can be obtained. In other words, even if the support mode has not shifted to the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to expect the occurrence of the V jackpot.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

As a transition route to a game state where a V big win can be expected, apart from the first route triggered by the result of the win-or-fail lottery becoming a jackpot result, the route is triggered by the normal pattern holding memory number FN becoming a predetermined number or more. It was set as the structure which provides the 2nd route|route which carries out. As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity to obtain a V jackpot even if the game does not result in a jackpot, thereby expanding the range of enjoyment. Moreover, since the number FN of the normal pattern reserved memory is used as a transition condition, it becomes easy for the player to have the impression that the above game state has been obtained by his/her own skill, and the amusement is improved. In that case, the advantage of the easy winning state (second normal game state) that transitions through the second route (ease of winning to the second operation port 63) is changed to the easy winning state that transitions through the first route (high frequency support mode). As a result, it is possible not only to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous, but also to expand the chances of obtaining the V jackpot while suppressing the reduction in the attractiveness of the jackpot.

After the normal pattern holding memory number FN becomes a predetermined number or more, the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to 0.05 sec, and after the game ball wins the through gate 35, the electric accessory 66 corresponding to the winning is supported. A specific period (0.05 sec) until the state ends is configured to be shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. In this case, it is possible to naturally reduce the normal pattern pending memory number FN, and it is possible to make the second normal game state temporary. As a result, it becomes possible to add a limit so as not to make the occurrence of the V jackpot too simplistic or otherwise excessively advantageous. In addition, even if the second normal game state is entered, the winning of the game ball to the second variable prize winning device 500 and the occurrence of the V prize are not guaranteed, so the second normal game state is maintained while they have not yet occurred. The game can be played under tension that may end, and the interest is improved. Moreover, the execution period of the second normal game state is not determined in advance, but fluctuates according to the state of winning to the through gate 35 . That is, during the second normal game state, it is difficult for the player to predict how long the state will continue, so that the tension can be enhanced appropriately.

While the game state is in the second normal game state, the notification (character display 522) to the effect that the execution of the shooting operation is urged is continuously displayed. As a result, the player is restrained from refraining from the shooting operation, and unreasonably early termination of the second normal game state is restrained.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the game board 60 is different from that in each of the above embodiments. FIG. 62 shows the configuration of the game board 60 in this embodiment. In addition, while attaching|subjecting the same code|symbol about the structure similar to said each embodiment, the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In this embodiment, a plurality of variable winning devices 65 are provided. Among the plurality of variable winning devices 65 , the lower variable winning device 700 is arranged below the variable display unit 67 , more specifically below the first operation opening 62 . On the other hand, among the plurality of variable winning devices 65 , the upper variable winning device 710 is arranged to the left of the variable display unit 67 , more specifically, above the through gate 35 . When the opening/closing execution mode is executed based on the result of the win/fail lottery on the special figure side, either the lower variable winning device 700 or the upper variable winning device 710 is controlled to open or close.

The configuration of the variable winning devices 700 and 710 is the same as the configuration of the variable winning device 65 described above. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the lower variable winning device 700 and the upper variable winning device 710 are formed with a lower big winning port 700a and an upper big winning port 710a leading to the back side of the game board 60, respectively. A lower opening/closing door 700b and an upper opening/closing door 710b are provided as opening/closing means for opening/closing the lower special winning opening 700a and the upper special winning opening 710a. The lower opening/closing door 700b and the upper opening/closing door 710b are normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. can be switched to an open state. A lower variable winning driving unit 700c is connected to the lower opening/closing door 700b, and an upper variable winning driving unit 710c is connected to the upper opening/closing door 710b. Opening and closing of the lower opening/closing door 700b and the upper opening/closing door 710b is controlled by driving and controlling the prize winning driving section 710c.

Regarding the lower opening/closing door 700b and the upper opening/closing door 710b, more specifically, when the lower opening/closing door 700b and the upper opening/closing door 710b are closed, the front surface of the game board 60 and the front surfaces of the lower opening/closing door 700b and the upper opening/closing door 710b are separated. When the game ball flows down in front of the game board 60, the lower opening/closing door 700b and the upper opening/closing door 710b do not become barriers. On the other hand, when the lower opening/closing door 700b and the upper opening/closing door 710b are opened, the lower opening/closing door 700b and the upper opening/closing door 710b stand up against the game board 60, and the game ball flowing down in front of the game board 60 is opened by the lower opening/closing door. By being received from below by 700b or an upper opening/closing door 710b, it is guided to the lower special prize winning opening 700a or the upper special winning prize opening 710a. In other words, when the lower opening and closing door 700b and the upper opening and closing door 710b are in a closed state, while the game ball can flow down in front of it, when the lower opening and closing door 700b and the upper opening and closing door 710b are in an open state, the A game ball cannot flow forward.

By arranging the lower variable winning device 700 as described above, both the game balls flowing down the left route and the game balls flowing down the right route are allowed to win. be done. On the other hand, to the upper variable winning device 710, game balls flowing down the left route are permitted to win prizes, but game balls flowing down the right route are prevented from winning prizes.

It should be noted that, unlike the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is not provided on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in this embodiment. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode, if the operation amount of the game ball shooting handle 41 is adjusted so as to flow down the right route, although winning occurs in the opening and closing execution mode by the lower variable winning device 700, the upper variable winning device 710 Winning does not occur in the open/close execution mode. In other words, by adjusting the operation amount of the game ball shooting handle 41 so as to flow down the left route in the opening/closing execution mode, winning can be generated in the opening/closing execution mode by either of the variable winning devices 700 and 710. It becomes possible.

As the operation opening on the special figure side in the present embodiment, a first operation opening 62 is provided below the variable display unit 67 and above the lower variable winning device 700 . A second operation port 63 is provided on the left side of the variable display unit 67 and below the upper variable winning device 710 and the through gate 35 .

When a prize to the first operating port 62 is generated, a winning lottery on the first special figure side is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, when the winning to the second operation port 63 occurs, unlike the first embodiment, the lottery on the side of the second special figure is performed instead of the lottery on the side of the first special figure. Therefore, in order to clearly distinguish from the first working port 62 and the second working port 63 in the first embodiment, the first working port 62 in the present embodiment will also be referred to as the fourth working port 720 in the following description. , and the second operating port 63 in the present embodiment is also referred to as the fifth operating port 730 .

Here, the positional relationship between the fifth operating port 730, the upper variable winning device 710, and the through gate 35 will be described with reference to FIG.

The upper variable winning device 710 and the through gate 35 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction with a predetermined gap therebetween. Specifically, both are arranged such that the center axis of the upper variable winning device 710 and the center axis of the through gate 35 coincide in the vertical direction. Between the upper variable prize winning device 710 and the through gate 35, a pair of left and right game pegs arranged in the horizontal direction are implanted. The spacing between the left game nail 69e and the right game nail 69f is arranged to be slightly larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the upper game nail pair 69a, 69b and the lower game nail pair 69c, 69d are arranged. They are arranged on the same vertical line. The distance between the lower end of the upper opening/closing door 710b and the left and right game pegs 69e and 69f in the upper variable winning device 710, and the distance between the left and right game pegs 69e and 69f and the upper end of the through gate 35 are the diameter of the game ball. smaller than dimension D. Therefore, when the upper opening/closing door 710b of the upper variable prize winning device 710 is opened, the game ball cannot pass between the upper opening/closing door 710b and the through gate 35, and winning to the through gate 35 is prevented. Avoided. On the other hand, when the upper opening/closing door 710b of the upper variable winning device 710 is closed, game balls flow down in front of the upper opening/closing door 710b, thereby allowing the through gate 35 to win.

The positional relationship between the through gate 35 and the fifth operating port 730 is as described in the first embodiment, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 reaches the fifth operating port 730, Nails 69a to 69b are provided so that game balls that do not pass through the gate 35 do not reach the fifth operating port 730. As shown in FIG. Also, the required period from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 to when it reaches the fifth operation opening 730 is set to be (0.6 sec) as in the first embodiment.

The fifth operating port 730 is provided with the electric accessory 66 as in the first embodiment. Then, based on the winning of the through gate 35, the electric accessory 66 is opened almost every time, the winning does not occur even if the electric accessory 66 is normally opened, and the winning of the through gate 35 is based on the winning. By setting a long variable display time on the normal side (selecting a variable display time of 10.0 sec with a probability of 1/1000), it shifts to the easy winning state, after shifting to the easy winning state As long as the reserves are periodically replenished (wins to the through gate 35) until the number of reserves is exhausted, the winning easy state continues as in the first embodiment. Incidentally, the easy-to-win state in the present embodiment refers to a state in which winning to the fifth operation port 730 is permitted based on an increase in the number of normal pattern reserved storage numbers FN. It means the second normal game state. The same applies to the case where the easy winning state is expressed in the following description. Note that such a winning easy state may also be referred to as a winning assisting state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first special figure side game round and the second special figure side game round are performed in parallel.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning to the fourth operation opening 720 is generated, the winning lottery for the first special figure is executed. In addition, when the left route is flowed down to generate the prize winning to the through gate 35, although the prize winning to the fifth operating port 730 does not occur in the normal state, the prize winning to the fifth operating port 730 occurs due to the easy winning state. can occur. Then, as long as the winning easy state continues, the lottery for the second special figure based on the winning to the fifth operation port 730 will be executed.

Appropriateness determination processing for the first special figure (step S701) and distribution determination processing for the first special figure (step S703), succession determination processing for the second special figure (step S1101) and shaking for the second special figure The minute determination process (step S1103) is the same as in the first embodiment, and if you win either the 16R probability variable jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result by the winning lottery on the first special figure side, 16 rounds Switch to open/close execution mode. In addition, if either the 16R probability variable jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result is won by the winning lottery on the second special figure side, it shifts to the opening and closing execution mode of 16 rounds, and if the special winning result is won, the opening and closing execution of one round. mode.

However, in the present embodiment, the variable display time of game rounds based on the winning/losing lottery for the special figure is different from the above-described first embodiment and the like. That is, in the present embodiment, the variable display time is set by referring to the variable display time table of FIG. On the other hand, in the game round on the second special figure side, the variable display time is set with reference to the variable display time table of FIG.

In the present embodiment, it is set so that the easy winning state can end when the opening/closing execution mode is performed. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process according to the present embodiment. The big winning opening opening/closing process is a process executed in step S1211 in the game state transition process (FIG. 22).

In this embodiment, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not one of the big winning openings 700a and 710a is open, based on the driving states of the variable winning driving units 700c and 710c. When it is determined that none of the big winning openings 700a and 710a are open, the process proceeds to step S3102.

In step S3102, it is determined whether or not the round number counter RC is "0". If not "0", it is determined in step S3103 whether or not the opening/closing timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604 is "0". The opening/closing timer counter T is a counter for the MPU 602 to grasp the timing of opening and closing the big winning openings 700a and 710a. The value of the open/close timer counter T is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is started. In step S3103, when it is determined that the open/close timer counter T is "0", it means that it is the start timing of the round and the timing to open one of the big winning openings 700a and 710a. ing. If it is determined in step S3103 that the open/close timer counter T is "0", the open time setting process is executed in step S3104.

In the opening time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is based on the result of the big win. If it is based on the jackpot result, in step S3202, a process of inputting a numerical value (15000) corresponding to 30 sec as the upper limit opening time of the current round game to the open/close timer counter T is executed. On the other hand, if the open/close execution mode is not based on the jackpot result, but is based on the special win result, in step S3203, a numerical value (900) corresponding to 1.8 sec is set to the open/close timer as the upper limit opening time of the current round game. The process of inputting to the counter T is executed. After executing the process of step S3202 or step S3203, the open time setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, in step S3105, the upper limit winning number of each round is set. In the present embodiment, 10 is set as the upper limit winning number in both the opening/closing execution mode based on the big winning result and the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result. Specifically, a process of setting "10" to the winning number counter PC provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604 is executed. The upper limit opening time and the upper limit number of winning prizes are the same as those in the first embodiment. In the round based on , it is not expected that the upper limit winning number of game balls will be won, and at most three winnings will occur.

In step S3106, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is based on the result of the winning lottery on the side of the first special figure. If it is based on the result of the winning lottery on the first special figure side, in step S3107, the upper special winning opening opening process is executed. In this process, the drive control of the upper variable winning driving unit 710c is started so that the upper big winning opening 710a is opened, and the upper opening/closing door 710b is switched to the open state. On the other hand, in step S3106, when it is determined that the opening and closing execution mode of this time is based on the result of the winning lottery on the side of the second special figure, in step S3108, lower special winning opening opening processing is executed. In this process, the drive control of the lower variable winning driving section 700c is started so that the lower big winning opening 700a is opened, and the lower opening/closing door 700b is switched to the open state.

After executing the processing of step S3107 or step S3108, after setting the opening command as an output target to the notification/production control device 143 in step S3109, the big winning opening opening/closing processing is ended. The opening command includes information indicating what round of the game the round to be started this time is, as well as information on the large winning openings 700a and 710a to be opened. Based on the opening command, the contents of the performance corresponding to the round game to be started and the big winning openings 700a and 710a to be opened are determined, and various devices are controlled so that the determined contents of the performance are executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 75, and the determined display mode is output from the notification/effect control device 143 to the display control device 660 as a display content command. In the display control device 660, based on the display content command received from the notification/production control device 143, a display corresponding to the current round game (for example, a display indicating the number of rounds and a large winning opening to be opened) is performed. The display of the symbol display device 75 is controlled.

If it is determined in step S3101 that one of the large winning openings 700a and 710a is open, the process proceeds to step S3110. In step S3110, it is determined whether or not the open/close timer counter T becomes "0" and the upper limit open time has elapsed. When it is determined that the opening/closing timer counter T is not "0", in step S3111, whether or not the game ball has won in either of the variable winning devices 700, 710 is detected by the detection sensor 700d for the lower variable winning device 700. And based on the detection state of the detection sensor 710d for the upper variable winning device 710. When it is determined that a prize has been won in either of the variable prize winning devices 700 and 710, a process of subtracting 1 from the prize number counter PC is executed in step S3112. Then, in step S3113, it is determined whether or not the prize winning number counter PC after the subtraction becomes "0" and the maximum winning number has been won. If it is determined in step S3111 that no winning has occurred, or if it is determined in step S3113 that the upper limit winning number has not been reached, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3110 that the upper limit opening time has elapsed, or if it is determined in step S3113 that the maximum winning number has been won, a large winning opening closing process is executed in step S3114. In the large winning opening closing process, the large winning openings 700a and 710a that are in the open state are determined based on the driving states of the variable winning driving sections 700c and 710c, and based on the determination result, the corresponding variable winning driving sections 700c and 710c are determined. By ending the drive control of 710c, the big winning openings 700a, 710a are closed. Then, in step S3115, a process of subtracting 1 from the round number counter RC is executed, and in step S3116, it is determined whether or not the round number counter RC after the subtraction has become "0".

If the round number counter RC is not "0", in step S3117, a wait time setting process is executed. The standby time setting process is a period from when the big winning openings 700a and 710a are closed to when they are next opened, and is a standby time between round games, a so-called interval period (interval period). time) is set. In this embodiment, the interval period is set to 0.5 sec, which is shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec). More specifically, in step S3117, a process of inputting a numerical value (250) corresponding to 0.5 sec to the open/close timer counter T is executed. Then, in step S3118, after setting the closing command as an object to be output to the notification/production control device 143, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The closing command includes information indicating how many rounds the round to end this time is, and the notification/production control device 143 notifies the end of the round game based on the closing command. The display control device 660 and the like are controlled so as to perform

If it is determined in step S3116 that the round number counter RC is "0", ending processing is executed in step S3119. In the start process, an ending waiting time is set for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the opening/closing timer counter T is set with waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 603 .

After that, in step S3120, after setting the ending command as an object to be output to the notification/production control device 143, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The notification/performance control device 143 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode to end based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

The relationship between the easy winning state and the round game in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

As described above, a prize can be won through the through gate 35 when the upper grand prize-winning port 710a is closed, and prizes cannot be won when the upper grand prize-winning port 710a is open. The upper big prize opening 710a is opened when a big hit result is obtained as a result of the winning lottery on the side of the first special figure, and when a big winning result is obtained in the winning lottery on the side of the second special figure. Or, if a special winning result is obtained in the winning or losing lottery on the second special figure side, the opening and closing execution mode in which the lower big winning opening 700a is in an open state is executed.

For example, a case where the upper special winning opening 710a is opened at timing t60 will be described. A game ball that reaches the upper special winning opening 710a before timing t60 does not enter the upper special winning opening 710a and can enter the through gate 35.例文帳に追加If the state before the timing t60 is the easy winning state, the winning to the through gate 35 keeps the number FN of the general pattern reserved storage at a constant number, and the easy winning state is maintained.

On the other hand, when the upper special winning opening 710a is opened at the timing t60, for example, the game ball reaching the upper special winning opening 710a at the timing t61 enters the upper special winning opening 710a. As a result, no winning to the through gate 35 occurs. The game round on the normal side can be progressed even during the opening and closing execution mode, and although there is no winning to the through gate 35 and no addition to the reserve is made, as the game round on the normal side progresses. Only digestion of reserves on the figure side is performed.

Here, most of the game balls launched so as to flow down the left route reach the upper big winning opening 710a. Therefore, in the round game started at timing t60, if the shooting to the left route is continued, the game ball shooting cycle is multiplied by the upper limit winning number of the round game (hereinafter also referred to as the shortest duration). , 0.6 sec×10=6 sec). That is, the round game started at timing t60 can end at timing t63 when the shortest continuation period elapses if the shooting to the left route is continued. And the shortest duration period is from the period from the situation where the upper limit number of reservation information on the normal diagram side is stored (the situation where the normal diagram reservation memory number FN is 4) to the normal diagram reservation memory number FN becomes 0 is set to be longer.

Specifically, when starting from the situation where the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the reservation information on the side of the general pattern is stored, first, the general pattern game round in the situation where 4 pieces of the reservation information on the side of the general pattern are stored is set to 0.6 sec (Fig. 10), and after 1.1 sec including the stop display period (0.4 sec) and the support period (0.1 sec), three pieces of hold information are stored. The normal game round is started in the situation. Most of the variable display time of the normal game round is set to 0.05 sec (Fig. 10), and after 0.55 sec including the stop display period and the support period, two pieces of hold information are stored. The general figure game round is started. Similarly, after 0.55 sec, the normal pattern game round is started in a situation where one piece of hold information is stored, and the normal pattern game round ends after 0.55 sec. That is, from the situation where the upper limit number of hold information on the normal side is stored, when the game turn on the normal side is progressed in a situation where the hold information is not supplemented, 1.1 sec + 0.55 sec + 0.55 sec + 0.55 sec = 2.75 sec later The holding information on the normal map side becomes 0, and the game on the normal map side is not performed. Even if the reservation information on the normal side is supplemented immediately after the normal game round is started in a situation where the upper limit number of reserved information on the normal side is stored, 4 pieces of reserved information in 2.75 sec 3.85 seconds after adding 1.1 sec, which is the normal game period, the normal game is not played.

In other words, when the upper big winning opening 710a is in an open state and the round game is started, in order to end the round game, from the situation where the upper limit number of the hold information on the side of the general pattern is stored to the general pattern reservation storage It takes a longer period than the period until the number FN becomes 0, and at timing t62 during the round game, the easy winning state (second normal game state) changes to the non-easy winning state (first normal game state, No winning assistance to the fifth operation port 730).

When the current round game ends at timing t63, an interval period is set, and the next round game is started after the interval period has passed. In the present embodiment, the interval period is set to a period shorter than the firing cycle (step S3117), and winning to the through gate 35 does not occur during the interval period. That is, at timing t63, when the upper limit winning number of the round game is won to the upper big winning opening 710a and the round game ends, the game ball launched next to the game ball will be released in the firing cycle from timing t63. At a later timing t65, it reaches the upper big winning opening 710a. Then, at timing t64, which is timing before timing t65, the next round game is started, and the upper big winning opening 710a is opened. Therefore, there is no room for replenishing the reservation information on the general map side during the interval period.

Also, if, during the round game in which the upper big prize winning opening 710a is opened, the shooting of the game ball is stopped, or if the right route is shot instead of the left route, the round game will start from the shortest end period (6 sec). continue for a long period of time. For example, during the round game started at timing t64, if there is a period during which no prizes are won in the upper special winning opening 710a, the round game is the longest, and the maximum opening period (30 sec) elapses at timing t66. will end with Also in this case, the normal pattern reserved memory number FN becomes 0 during the round game.

Incidentally, when the round game ends based on the elapse of the upper limit opening period as described above, there is a possibility that a winning to the through gate 35 occurs during the interval period. That is, when the round game ends based on the lapse of the upper limit opening period, since the winning to the upper big winning opening 710a has not occurred at the end timing, by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball, during the interval period The game ball can reach the upper big winning opening 710a (timing t67). Then, the game ball that has reached enters the through gate 35 without entering the upper big winning port 710a. However, since the interval period is shorter than the firing period, even if the game ball reaches the upper big winning opening 710a during the interval period, it is limited to one ball. As described above, by continuing the round game over the upper limit open period, the easy winning state is switched to the non-easy winning state. The state is not switched to the winning easy state.

Further, as already explained, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result, the round game is performed 16 times. Therefore, for example, even if a long variable display time (10 sec, see FIG. 10) is selected in the game cycle for the hold information on the normal side that was stored before the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the By the end of the open/close execution mode, all pending are consumed. In other words, since each round game requires at least 6 seconds and the interval period is set at 0.5 seconds, the opening and closing execution mode for 16 rounds takes at least 6 seconds×16+0. 5 sec×15=103.5 sec is required. On the other hand, even if a long fluctuation display time is selected in all game rounds that are performed in a situation where the normal pattern pending memory number FN is 1 to 3 (Fig. 10), 1.1 sec (when holding 4 ) + 10.5 sec (when holding 3 pieces) + 10.5 sec (when holding 2 pieces) + 10.5 sec (when holding 1 piece) = 32.6 sec. Even in the case (+1.1 sec), the pending information becomes 0 by the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the winning easy state is switched to the winning non-easy state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the lottery on the side of the first special figure serves as an opportunity to terminate the easy-to-win state (to move to the non-easy-to-win state). The flow of the game in this embodiment using such a configuration will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 67 and the explanation diagram of each game state of FIG.

At timing t70, which is a situation in which there is no prize winning assistance of the electric accessory 66 and the state is not easy to win, when a prize is won in the fourth operation port 720, the game round on the first special figure side is started, and at timing t71. The game round ends. When the game round on the first special figure side started at timing t72 is a jackpot result (in FIG. 67, the game round that results in a jackpot is indicated by a black arrow, and the game that results in a special hit times are indicated by white arrows), and the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the big win is performed at the upper big prize winning opening 710a. When a prize is won in the upper big prize opening 710a, a predetermined number (15) of prize balls are paid out. In the opening and closing execution mode, since the maximum number of winning prizes (10) can be multiplied by the number of rounds (16 times), in the opening and closing execution mode, the player can receive a large amount of prize balls (10 x 16 times x 15 = 2400), and when the opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t73, the number of held balls has increased significantly.

As already explained, in the situation where the left route is flowed down and the game round on the side of the first special figure is executed, winning to the through gate 35 occurs, and the normal figure based on the winning to the through gate 35 When a long variable display time is selected in the side game round, the state shifts to an easy-to-win state. For example, if the transition to the easy-to-win state occurs at timing t74, the winning to the fifth operating port 730 will occur, and the second special figure side game round based on the winning to the fifth operating port 730 will start at timing t75. be started.

In the game times on the side of the second special figure, most of them are special winning results. Then, the one-round opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result is executed at the lower special prize winning opening 700a. As a result, at the timing t76 when the second special figure side game round started at the timing t75 ends, the open/close execution mode of one round is started. In addition, at the timing t78 when the second special figure side game round started at the timing t77 ends, the opening and closing execution mode of one round is started. In the figure, the start timing of the second special figure side is shown as the same timing as the end timing of the opening and closing execution mode, but in fact, the second special figure from the end timing to the winning of the fifth operation port 730 The game round on the side is not started. However, if it is in the easy-to-win state as described above, the winning to the fifth operation port 730 occurs relatively early, and after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the game round on the second special figure side is started early. becomes.

As described above, also in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the first special figure side game round while the second special figure side game round is being executed, and during the execution of the first special figure side game round 2 It is possible to execute the game round on the special figure side. Then, when one game round is being executed and the other game round ends as a result of a game accompanied by a shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the one game round being executed is forcibly ended. Therefore, at timing t76 or timing t78, when the game round on the second special figure side ends as a special hit result, the game round on the first special figure side being executed is forced to be a loss result on the condition that is terminated. Then, on the condition that the reservation information on the first special figure side exists, the game turn on the first special figure side is started after the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result ends.

Then, when the second special figure side game cycle can be executed based on the easy winning state as described above, the opening and closing execution mode of one round will occur frequently, and the number of possession balls will gradually increase. It will happen. In other words, not only is winning to the fifth operating port 730 allowed based on the easy winning state, but also winning balls are obtained in one round opening/closing execution mode based on the winning to the fifth operating port 730. It becomes possible to move to a state advantageous to the player.

Moreover, the game in such an advantageous state can be carried out while continuing the winning easy state. Therefore, in the game, the prize balls (10 pieces) due to the prize winning to the fifth operation port 730 that frequently occur reduce the decrease of the balls, and the prize balls (15 pieces × about 3 = about 45).

When the game turn on the second special figure side started at timing t79 is a jackpot result, at timing t80, 16 rounds of opening and closing execution mode is executed at the lower prize winning opening 700a. Even in the opening/closing execution mode, the player can receive a large amount of prize balls (10×16 times×15=2400), and when the opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t81, It means that the number of balls in possession has increased significantly.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the second special figure side game can be executed based on the easy winning state, and a state that can be expected in the opening and closing execution mode of the special winning result (so-called small winning rush ). Moreover, even in such a state, a big win can be expected, and when a big win is achieved, it is possible to obtain a ball in the open/close execution mode of 16 rounds. If the result of the big win is based on the lottery on the side of the second special figure, the easy win state continues thereafter, and the game can be played in a state where the result of the special win can be expected.

Moreover, if the jackpot result is a variable jackpot result, the next jackpot result can be expected early, so it is possible to obtain a large number of balls by chaining each opening and closing execution mode between the jackpot result and the special win result. becomes.

On the other hand, as described above, if the left route is flowed down and the game on the side of the second special figure is to be played, the winning of the fourth operation port 720 will inevitably occur, and the first special figure will occur. The side game is also executed in parallel. Then, for example, when a jackpot result is obtained in the game round on the first special figure side started at timing t82, the opening/closing execution mode by the upper big winning opening 710a is executed at timing t83. As a result, although it is possible to expect a large amount of prize balls to be paid out by allowing the winning to the upper special winning opening 710a, the reservation information on the general drawing side is not supplemented due to the opening of the upper special winning opening 710a. At timing t84, the easy winning state shifts to the non-easy winning state.

Then, when the opening and closing execution mode by the upper big winning opening 710a ends at the timing t85, the winning to the fifth operating opening 730 will not occur, so that only the game round on the side of the first special figure will be executed. Become.

In this case, the high probability mode is more likely to lead to a jackpot result earlier than the low probability mode, so in the configuration where the lottery on the first special figure side is performed even during the easy winning state, when it becomes the high probability mode, the probability is low. It can be said that the lottery on the first special figure side will result in a big hit earlier than during the mode (see FIG. 68). Then, from the point of view of wanting to get a ball out based on the result of the jackpot, the player may desire to enter the high probability mode. It is considered that the player desires not to enter the mode or to enter the low-probability mode. In other words, before the easy winning state (non-easy winning state, no winning assistance), the high probability mode is expected, or the easy winning state is expected, and the high probability mode is not changed after the easy winning state. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which the high or low probability of big wins and the merits thereof contradict each other, such as expecting a low probability mode or a low probability mode.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Based on the easy winning state, it is possible to execute the game round on the side of the second special figure, and the advantageous state (so-called small winning rush) in which the opening and closing execution mode based on the special winning result is frequently performed. becomes. In this case, regardless of the lottery result on the 1st special side or the lottery result on the 2nd side, the information on the general side is used to create the advantageous state, so waiting for the lottery result on the side of the special side It is possible to have a novel game property that is greatly different from the conventional game machines that are in an advantageous state.

As in the above-described embodiments, the winning easy state does not change the probability of opening results in the success/failure determination process in the regular game round control process. Also, the opening/closing pattern of the electric accessary 66 is not changed when the open result is obtained. And, based on the long fluctuation display time being set as the fluctuation display time on the normal side, the number of reservations can be increased and it is configured to be in an easy-to-win state. Hypothetically, if the configuration involves changing the probability of success or failure determination and the opening/closing pattern, it is possible to change the configuration based on the result of the success/failure lottery on the special figure side (via the opening/closing execution mode). It is considered preferable from the viewpoint of On that premise, if you configure it to be in the above-mentioned advantageous state by changing the probability of success or failure judgment and opening and closing pattern, it will eventually be configured to be in an advantageous state based on the result of the success or failure lottery on the special figure side. It can be something that does not cause much difference from game playability. In that respect, as described above, it is possible to realize a novel game property that is greatly different from the conventional one by putting it in an advantageous state by the normal pattern reservation storage number FN.

Moreover, regardless of the result of the lottery on the special side, the opportunity to continue the advantageous state is that the normal game round is carried out in a situation where the number of reserved information on the side of the normal side is 4, and the end is triggered. Since it is assumed that the normal game round is carried out in a situation where the number of reservation information on the normal map side is 3 or less, the advantageous state is completely independent of the game situation on the special map side, and the game situation on the normal map side can be managed by

On the other hand, as a result of the lottery on the side of the special figure, the lottery on the side of the first special figure results in a big hit, and when the opening and closing execution mode is performed in the upper variable winning device 710, the reservation on the side of the general figure is held. It is configured such that it becomes impossible to replenish, and the above advantageous state ends. By doing so, it is possible to manage the advantageous state according to the game situation on the normal side and associate it with the game situation on the special side. be done.

By arranging the upper variable prize winning device 710 on the upstream side of the through gate 35 and opening the upper variable prize winning device 710, the prize winning to the through gate 35 is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the increase or decrease of the number FN of the normal pattern reserved memory by the opening/closing control of the upper variable winning device 710 . That is, as described above, depending on the game result on the special figure side, the game is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, and the opening/closing execution mode terminates the advantageous state based on the easy winning state. In this way, it becomes possible to indirectly associate the game situation on the side of the special figure with the advantageous state managed by the game situation on the side of the normal figure.

The interval period of each round game in the open/close execution mode is made shorter than the shooting cycle of game balls. As a result, during the interval period of the open/close execution mode executed by the upper variable winning device 710, the event of replenishment of the reservation information on the general map side is suppressed. Specifically, when the round game ends with the winning of the upper limit number of winning prizes, the game ball that is launched next to the game ball that has won the upper limit winning number is the upper variable winning device after the interval period has passed. 710 is reached, and when the round game ends due to the lapse of the upper limit opening time, game balls can reach during the interval period, but the number of game balls that can reach is limited to one. As a result, the increase in the number FN of the normal pattern pending storage that can occur during the interval period is at most 1, and the advantageous state based on the easy winning state can be ended more reliably.

<First modification of the fourth embodiment>
In the first modified example, the allocation table for the success or failure lottery for the special figure is different. FIG. 69(a) shows a sorting table in the first modified example. In the first modified example, the level of the win/loss lottery mode is not set, and the big win result A and the big win result B are set as the big win results. Also in the first modified example, the so-called high-frequency support mode and electric chew mode in which the electric accessory 66 is in the open state with a high probability are not set.

A jackpot result A is a jackpot result that shifts to a 16-round open/close execution mode. Also, the jackpot result B is a jackpot result that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds. The jackpot result A and the jackpot result B are different in the jackpot that is opened in the open/close execution mode. More specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result A, a round game is performed in which the upper big winning opening 710a is opened in the predetermined number of rounds, and the round game in which the lower big winning opening 700a is opened in the other rounds. A game is played. On the other hand, in the open/close execution mode based on the jackpot result B, a round game is performed in which the lower big winning opening 700a is opened in any round.

As described above, by opening the upper big winning opening 710a, the reservation information on the general/universal drawing side is not replenished. If there is, there is a possibility that the easy winning state will end. On the other hand, even if the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to the easy winning state, if it is based on the big win result B, the easy winning state can continue. In this regard, it can be said that the big win result B is more advantageous for the player than the big win result A.

In the distribution table of the first modification, the jackpot result A is obtained in the case of a big hit result in the winning lottery on the first special side and in the case of a big winning result in the winning lottery on the second special side. And the distribution rate of the big hit result B is different, more specifically, if the big hit result is the result of the lottery on the 1st special side, the big hit result is the result of the lottery on the 2nd special side. It is set so that the probability of being sorted to the big winning result A is higher than in the case. More specifically, in the case of a jackpot result in the winning lottery on the first special side, it will be distributed to the jackpot result A with a probability of 100%, and in the case of a big winning result in the winning lottery on the second special side. , it is distributed to the jackpot result A with a probability of 50%, and it is distributed to the jackpot result B with a probability of 50%.

FIG. 69(b) shows part of the big winning opening opening/closing process in the first modified example.

That is, in the big winning hole opening and closing process in the first modification, the big winning hole selection process (step S3106) up to the lower big winning hole opening process (step S3108) and the upper big winning hole opening process (step S3107) The configuration is different. Specifically, after setting the winning number counter PC in step S3105, in step S3301 it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode of this time is based on the result of the winning lottery on the first special figure side do. The opening and closing execution mode based on the result of the winning lottery on the first special figure side is the big hit result A, so in step S3302, the upper big winning opening opening process is performed.

On the other hand, if the current opening/closing execution mode is not based on the result of the lottery on the side of the first special figure but on the side of the second special figure, in step S3303, the opening/closing execution mode this time is the jackpot result A. It is determined whether or not it is based on If it is based on the jackpot result A, in step S3304, the round number counter RC is "1", and whether or not the round to be started this time is the final round as a branch round that is the predetermined number of rounds. determine whether If it is the final round, in step S3302, the upper special winning opening opening process is executed. On the other hand, even if the opening/closing execution mode is based on the jackpot result A, it is not the final round (step S3304: NO), or if the opening/closing execution mode is based on the jackpot result B or the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result (step S3303 : NO) executes a lower prize winning opening opening process in step S3305.

After executing the process of step S3302 or step S3305, the process of setting the opening command as an output target is executed in step S3109, and then the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

Next, an example of an effect during the opening/closing execution mode in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 70(a) is a flow chart showing the round effect setting process in the opening/closing execution mode. The round effect setting process is a part of the process periodically activated in the notification/effect control device 143, and is a process executed during the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not it is the round start timing. If it is not the round start timing, the main effect setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the round start timing, it is determined in step S3402 whether or not the current open/close execution mode is based on the result of the big win. The case where the opening/closing execution mode is not based on the result of the big win means that the opening/closing execution mode of this time is the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special winning. In this case, in step S3403, after performing the process of setting the special winning round effect as the current round effect, this round effect setting process is terminated.

Each effect data of the round effect is pre-stored in the round effect data storage area of the ROM 653, and in step S3403, the effect data of the special win round effect is read out from the round effect data storage area, and is played along with the effect data. Then, it controls so that the display effect by the display control device 660, the sound effect effect by the speaker unit 29, the light emission effect by the annular illumination part 26, and the like are performed.

As the display effect of the special winning round effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), a girl holding a magic stick is displayed by animation or the like. The opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result is generated in the situation where the winning lottery on the side of the second special figure is performed, that is, in the situation in which it is easy to win, and it is in the first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. is shown. Then, in the situation where the winning lottery on the second special figure side is performed, the subsequent game depending on whether the opening and closing execution mode is performed by the lower large winning opening 700a or the opening and closing execution mode is performed by the upper large winning opening 710a There is a big change in gender. Therefore, by showing that the girl can use magic, it is possible to suggest a change in the gameplay and increase the excitement of the player.

If it is determined in step S3402 that it is the open/close execution mode based on the jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S3404. In step S3404, it is determined whether or not the game is in an easy winning state, and it is determined whether or not the round to be started this time is a branch round. If it is not in the winning easy state or if it is not in the branch round, in step S3405, after performing a process of setting the normal round effect as the current round effect, this round effect setting process is terminated. In step S3405, the effect data of the normal round effect is read out from the round effect data storage area, and in accordance with the effect data, the display effect by the display control device 660, the sound effect effect by the speaker unit 29, and the light emission by the annular illumination unit 26 are performed. Control is performed so that a performance or the like is performed.

As the display effect of the normal round effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(c), a girl holding a magic stick and using magic is displayed by animation or the like. By holding up the magic stick, the girl is not chanting magic, although the stick is shining. In other words, the normal round production is the production before magic is used. The case where the process of step S3405 is performed means that the easy winning state is not at the start of the current round game, or even if the easy winning state exists, at least the easy winning state will not end in the current round game. is. Therefore, by providing an effect as if magic could be cast at any moment as described above, it is possible to further enhance the excitement of the subsequent changes in game characteristics.

If it is determined in step S3404 that the game is in the winning easy state and in the branching round, the process advances to step S3406 to determine whether or not the current open/close execution mode is based on the big win result B. In the case of the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win result B, the current branch round (final round) is executed not at the upper special winning opening 710a but at the lower special winning opening 700a. Therefore, the easy winning state can be continued. Therefore, in step S3407, after performing processing for setting the first special round effect (blessing effect) as the current round effect, the present round effect setting process is terminated. In step S3407, the effect data for the first special round effect is read out from the round effect data storage area, and the display effect by the display control device 660, the sound effect effect by the speaker unit 29, and the circular illumination unit 26 are displayed in accordance with the effect data. It controls so that the light emission performance etc. by is performed.

As the display effect of the first special round effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(d), a girl holding a magic stick is magically transformed into an adult woman by animation or the like. By this effect, the player can understand that the magic has been successful, and can grasp that the easy winning state will continue.

In step S3406, if the open/close execution mode is based on the jackpot result A, the current branch round (final round) is executed at the upper special winning opening 710a instead of the lower special winning opening 700a. Therefore, the easy winning state can end. Therefore, in step S3408, after performing the process of setting the second special round effect (failure effect) as the current round effect, the present round effect setting process is terminated. In step S3408, the effect data for the second special round effect is read out from the round effect data storage area, and the display effect by the display control device 660, the sound effect effect by the speaker unit 29, and the circular illumination unit 26 are displayed in accordance with the effect data. It controls so that the light emission performance etc. by is performed.

As the display effect of the second special round effect, for example, as shown in FIG. By this effect, the player can understand that the magic has ended in failure, and can grasp that the easy winning state is over.

By doing so, in a situation in which it is possible to make the winning lottery on the side of the second special figure based on the winning easy state, the result of the winning lottery on the side of the second special figure Based on this, the advantageous state (easy winning state) can be terminated. As a result, it becomes possible to draw a great deal of attention to the type of result of the success or failure lottery on the side of the special figure.

In addition, until the branch round in the open/close execution mode, a round game is performed by the lower large prize winning port 700a in which the reservation information on the normal side can be supplemented, and in the branch round, a round game is performed by the upper large prize winning port 710a. It has a structure that can be broken. By doing so, it is possible to expect that the easy winning state will not end until the branch round and that the easy winning state will not end even through the open/close execution mode. Then, in the above-mentioned branch round, by branching whether or not the easy winning state ends, it is possible to collect points of interest and fully enjoy the open/close execution mode.

In particular, by setting the branch round as the final round, it is possible to continue the feeling of expectation during the opening/closing execution mode to the rear side rather than the configuration in which the winning easy state is ended immediately after the opening/closing execution mode is started.

In addition, in the branch round, the display screen 75a notifies whether the upper special prize opening 710a or the lower special prize opening 700a is opened, thereby realizing a game effect during the opening and closing execution mode. can be suitably heaped up.

<Second Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In the second modified example, the variable display time table referred to in the normal game round is changed based on shifting to the opening and closing execution mode. FIG. 71(a) shows a normal figure fluctuation display time table for the open/close execution mode in the second modification.

In the open/close execution mode, in a situation where the number of normal pattern holding storages FN is the upper limit of 4, either the relatively long variable display time of 6.0 sec or the relatively short variable display time of 0.6 sec is selected. It is designed to be obtained. Specifically, when the number of pending items is 1 to 3, 0.05 sec, which is the shortest variable display time, is uniformly set. In addition, when the number of holds is 4, the short fluctuation display time of 0.6 sec (hereinafter also referred to as "4 hour short fluctuation") or the long fluctuation display time of 6.0 sec (hereinafter, "4 (also called time length variation) is set. The variable display time is configured to be set by the value of the normal pattern variation type counter C5, but it may be configured to determine the length of the variable display time through another counter or another lottery process.

In the second modification, the setting of the upper limit opening time and the setting of the interval time in each round game in the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result are different. FIG. 71(b) is a flowchart showing the open time setting process (FIG. 64, step S3104) in this modified example.

In this modification, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the current open/close execution mode is based on the result of the big win. In the case of the opening and closing execution mode based on the jackpot result, in step S3502, as the upper limit opening time of the round game this time, it is longer than the product of the upper limit winning number and the firing cycle of the game ball, and is the same as the fourth embodiment. 8 sec, which is a shorter period than 30 sec, is set (input "4000" to the open/close timer counter T).

Further, when it is determined in step S3501 that the open/close execution mode is based on the special winning result, in step S3503, as in the fourth embodiment, the upper limit opening time of the current round game is set to 1. Set 8 sec (input "900" to the open/close timer counter T). After executing the process of step S3502 or step S3503, the open time setting process ends.

FIG. 71(c) is a flow chart showing the standby time setting process (FIG. 64, step S3117) in this modified example.

In this modification, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the open/close timer counter T is greater than "250". When the open/close timer counter T is greater than "250 (0.5 sec)", at least the round game to be terminated this time is not terminated due to the elapse of the upper limit open time (step S3110: YES), but the maximum winning number is reached. It means that the game ends when a prize is won (step S3113: YES). In this case, the current interval period is set as a time corresponding to the remaining numerical value of the opening/closing timer counter T (without inputting a new numerical value to the opening/closing timer counter T), and the standby time setting process is terminated. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3601 that the open/close timer counter T is equal to or less than "250", that is, the round game that ends this time ends based on the elapse of the upper limit opening time, or based on the winning of the upper limit winning number. However, if the timing is just before the upper limit open time elapses, in step S3602, the current interval time is set to 0.5 sec ("250" is input to the open/close timer counter T), and the main standby is performed. End the time setting process.

The relationship between the progress of the opening/closing execution mode of this modified example and the easy winning state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

As already explained, in the normal figure game times in the opening and closing execution mode, if the number of retention information is four, which is the upper limit, 4 hours short fluctuation (0.6 sec) or 4 hours long fluctuation (6.0 sec) is set. For example, when the 4:00 short variation is set in the normal game round starting at timing t90, and when the 4:00 long variation is set in the normal game round starting at timing t91 , the digestion speed of pending information is different. Specifically, if it is a four-hour short fluctuation, at timing t91, which is 1.1 sec after timing t90, which is 0.6 sec (variation display time) + 0.4 sec (stop display time) + 0.1 sec (support time) In contrast to the timing of digesting the next hold information, if it is a four-hour change, 6.0 sec (variation display time) + 0.4 sec (stop display time) + 0.1 sec (support time) from timing t91 At timing t94, which is 6.5 seconds later, the timing for digesting the next hold information is reached.

Also, in this modification, the duration of the round game is a fixed period (8 sec) as the total period of the opening time and the interval period. Therefore, for example, in the round game started at timing t92, the game balls enter continuously, and after 6.0 seconds (shortest duration), which is the product of the upper limit number of winning prizes and the firing cycle, the round game ends at timing t93. Then, the interval period is set as 2.0 sec, which is the difference between the fixed period and the open period.

For example, the normal figure game round started at timing t91 is set to 4 o'clock long variation, and the round game started at timing t92 is the shortest duration and the upper big winning opening 710a is closed. , the normal game is still continued at the timing t93 when the upper big winning opening 710a is switched to the closed state, and the timing of consuming the pending information has not yet come. Therefore, the easy winning state is maintained.

Moreover, the interval period in this case is 2.0 sec as described above, which is longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Then, at the timing t95 or the like during the interval period, winning to the through gate 35 can occur, and it is possible to replenish the hold information on the general/universal chart side during the interval period.

When the interval period elapses and the next round game is started at timing t97, the upper special winning opening 710a is opened, and winning to the upper special winning opening 710a is allowed, while the through gate Winning to 35 will not occur.

If the normal game round started at timing t96, which is a timing slightly before timing t97, and the 4 o'clock length variation is set, as described above, if the round game is finished in the shortest period , It is possible to end the round game before the end of the normal game. However, for example, if the shooting of the game ball is stopped, or if the game ball is shot so as to flow down the right route instead of the left route, the round game will continue for a period longer than the shortest duration. continue. Then, for example, although the round game ends at timing t99, at timing t98, which is the timing before that, the normal game started at timing t96 ends and the next hold information is digested. It can be timing.

Moreover, if the round game is not finished in the shortest period as described above, the interval period can be a period (0.5 sec) shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec). In this case, even if the round game ends, the pending information cannot be replenished during the interval period until timing t100 when the next round game is started, and only the digestion of the pending information progresses. At timing t101, the easy winning state ends.

As described above, according to this modified example, even when the round game is performed by the upper big winning opening 710a, the easy winning state can be continued, and the playability of the round game is improved. Moreover, when the round game is performed by the upper large winning opening 710a, it is not confirmed that the easy winning state continues, nor is it confirmed that it ends. Whether or not the easy winning state continues depends on the length of the variable display time in the side game round. By doing so, the content of the game played by the player is reflected in whether or not the easy winning state is continued, and the player can feel that he or she has won the continuation of the easy winning state. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Third Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In this modification, the playability using the relationship between the duration of the normal game and the duration of the round game shown in the second modification is reflected in the production. FIG. 73(a) shows a normal figure fluctuation display time table for the open/close execution mode in this modified example.

In this modified example, except for the case where the number of reserved information for the normal map is 1, 2 to 4 are set to relatively long and short variable display times. Specifically, when the number of reserved information for the normal pattern is 1, a variable display time of 0.05 sec is uniformly set, and the normal pattern game when the variable display time is set is stopped. It is 0.55 sec including display time (fixed time) and support time (release time). On the other hand, when the number of reserved information for normal maps is 2 to 4, a relatively short variable display time of 0.5 sec is set, and a relatively long variable display time of 3.0 sec is set. There are cases where Which variable display time is set is determined based on the value of the normal pattern variation type counter C5, but it may be configured to determine the variable display time by another counter or another lottery process. . The normal game when the variable display time of 0.5 sec is set is 1.0 sec including the stop display time and the support time, while the normal game when the variable display time of 3.0 sec is set is 3.5 sec including stop display time and support time.

FIG. 73(b) shows that in the situation where the reservation information on the general map side is no longer supplemented by opening the upper big prize opening 710a, the number of the reservation information is changed from the situation where the number of the reservation information is 4. It shows the length of time until it becomes 0 and the easy winning state ends, and its ratio.

The prize winning assistance continuation time, which is the length of time until the easy prize winning state ends, can be calculated from a combination of the above variable display times from the situation where the number of pending information is four. That is, there are four lengths of 3.55 sec, 6.05 sec, 8.55 sec, and 11.05 sec, which are 8.4%, 40.0%, 42.0%, and 9.6, respectively. % is selected. In this modification, as in the second modification, the total length of the open time and the interval time of the round game is set as a fixed period, and if the round game is finished in the shortest time, the upper limit winning number and the firing cycle It becomes possible to shift to the interval period at 6.0 sec, which is the product of , and to replenish the pending information.

That is, if a length of 6.0 sec or longer is selected as the winning auxiliary duration time, the reserved information can be replenished during the interval period by ending the round game in the shortest period. On the other hand, if the winning assistance continuation time is less than 6.0 seconds, the winning assistance continuation time elapses before the end of the round game even if the round game is ended in the shortest period of time. will end. Also, even if the winning assistance continuation time is 6.0 sec or more, if the round game is not finished in the shortest period, the winning assistance continuation time may elapse before the round game is extended. The interval period is shortened by , and even if the winning assistance continuation time has not elapsed at the end of the round game, it is not possible to replenish the reserved information for the general pattern, and the easy winning state ends in the next round game. there is a possibility.

In this modification, a battle effect occurs during a round game using the relationship between the progress speed of the normal game as described above and the winning timing to the upper big winning opening 710a.

The battle production includes, for example, a victory production that suggests that the main character wins and is advantageous to the player through a predetermined production in which the main character, who is the main character, and an enemy character fight, and a victory production that suggests that the enemy character wins and the main character wins. This is a performance in which one result performance is performed out of a plurality of result performances including a defeat performance suggesting that the character is defeated and the player is disadvantaged.

More specifically, in the battle production, after the battle between the main character and the enemy character, the main character wins if the easy-to-win state transitioned at the start of the round game is maintained until the end of the round game. is executed, and if the easy-to-win state has ended by the end of the round game, a defeat performance in which the main character loses is performed. Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not the easy-to-win state, which was shifted at the start of the round game, will continue until the end of the round game through the battle between the main character and the enemy character.

FIG. 74 shows the round effect setting process in this modified example. As already described, the round effect setting process is one process of periodic processes that are activated at predetermined intervals, and is a process that is executed during the opening/closing execution mode. The battle effect described above is set in the round effect setting process. Hereinafter, the details of the battle effect will be described while describing the processing configuration of the round effect setting process.

In the round effect setting process, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the round game. When it is time to start the round game, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the round game to be started this time is the round game for opening the upper big winning opening 710a. Specifically, for example, in the first modification, if the opening/closing execution mode is based on the jackpot result A and if it is the final round in the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result B, then affirmative in step S3702. A judgment will be made. A negative determination is made in step S3702, and in the case of a round game in which the lower prize winning opening 700a is opened, the normal round effect is set in step S3703, and then this round effect setting process is terminated.

When it determines with it being the round game which opens the upper large winning a prize mouth 710a in step S3702, in step S3704, the grasping process of the normal figure game situation is performed. In the process of grasping the normal game situation, the number of pending information for the current normal game, the information of the variable display time when the reservation information is subject to the normal game times, and the remaining of the current normal game times Information on the variable display time is grasped, information on whether or not the current state is in an easy winning state, and processing to specify the winning auxiliary duration time in the case of an easy winning state.

In step S3705, based on the result of processing in step S3704, it is determined whether or not the current state is an easy-to-win state. If it is not in the winning easy state, the process advances to step S3703 to set the normal round effect and then ends the present round effect setting process.

If it is determined in step S3705 that the state is easy to win, HP display setting processing is executed in step S3706.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), when the round game is started and the battle effect is started, first, the battle start effect is executed in which the main character, a soldier holding a weapon, is displayed. do. In the start effect, in addition to the main character, a round display indicating the number of rounds to be started and an HP display indicating the physical strength of the main character are displayed side by side with the main character. The HP display is composed of a plurality of memories formed of heart marks, for example. The heart mark can be, for example, in a colored state (see FIG. 75(a), hereinafter also referred to as a colored heart mark) or in an uncolored state (see FIG. 77(b), hereinafter also referred to as a non-colored heart mark). ), and indicates that the main character's physical strength remains as much as the colored heart mark, that is, it is difficult to defeat the enemy character.

The HP display is set according to the length of the winning assistance duration. In other words, it is set so that the longer the winning assistance duration time is, the more the main character's physical strength remains. In step S3706, based on the player HP setting table stored in the ROM 653 and the prize winning assistance duration specified in step S3704, the HP display at the start of the battle effect is set.

In the player HP setting table, as shown in FIG. 73(c), if the winning assistance duration is less than 3.5 seconds, 80% of the players set the HP display so that two colored heart marks are displayed. , set the HP display so that 3 colored hearts are displayed at 20%. In addition, if the winning assistance duration is 3.5 seconds or more and less than 6.0 seconds, 80% set the HP display so that 3 colored hearts are displayed, and 20% set 4 colored hearts. Set the HP display so that the mark is displayed. If the winning assistance duration is 6.0 sec or more and less than 8.5 sec, the HP display is set so that 3 colored heart marks are displayed for 50%, and 4 colored heart marks are displayed for 50%. Set the HP display to be displayed. If the winning assistance duration is 8.5 seconds or more and less than 11.0 seconds, 20% will set the HP display so that 3 colored heart marks will be displayed, and 80% will display 4 colored heart marks. Set the HP display to be displayed. Then, if the winning assistance duration is 11.0 sec or more, the HP display is set so that four colored heart marks are displayed with a probability of 100%.

After executing the HP display setting process in step S3706, the battle effect is set as the current round effect in step S3707, and then the present effect setting process ends. In step S3707, as a battle effect, first, a battle start effect is set. In the start effect, the HP is displayed based on the current winning assistance duration time set in step S3706, and the main character and the number of rounds are displayed (FIG. 75(a)).

After the battle start effect, a battle effect in which the main character and the enemy character battle is performed as the round game progresses.

In the mid-battle effect, as shown in FIG. 75(b), the display is switched to the line of sight of the main character, and a plurality of zombies as enemy characters attacking the main character are displayed. In the during-battle effect, in addition to the enemy characters, an enemy number display indicating the number of enemy characters is displayed side by side with the enemy characters. Also, the above HP display is displayed side by side with the enemy character. The enemy number display is composed of, for example, the number of defeated enemy characters and the number of enemy characters at the start. For example, the number of enemy characters is 100 at the start, and the number of defeated enemy characters is 0, and "0/100" is displayed as the number of enemies.

The enemy characters correspond to the number of prizes won in the upper grand prize-winning slot 710a. The number of enemy characters becomes 0.

Returning to the description of the battle effect setting process, if it is determined in step S3701 that it is not the round start timing, it is determined in step S3708 whether or not the battle effect is in progress. That is, the process of step S3708 determines whether or not the round game in which the battle effect is set is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S3708, this round effect setting process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3708, it is determined in step S3709 whether or not result effect setting has been completed. The result effect indicates a victory effect and a defeat effect, and in step S3709, it is determined whether or not the victory effect or the defeat effect has already been set in the battle effect. If the result effect has already been set, the round effect setting process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3709, the process proceeds to step S3710. In step S3710, it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the upper special prize winning port 710a. This determination may be made with reference to winning information (command) from the main controller 162 . If a prize has been won, in step S3711, enemy character damage imparting processing is executed. In the enemy character damage imparting process, the display contents of the enemy number display are updated in correspondence with the winning in the upper prize-winning opening 710a, and a damage imparting effect showing that the corresponding number of enemy characters have been defeated is displayed on the display screen 75a. set to be done in In the damage imparting effect, as shown in FIG. 76(a), some of the plurality of enemy characters are blown backward, and "NICE!!" is displayed to congratulate them. is displayed. The display of the number of enemies is updated so that the number of defeated enemy characters is increased by 10 each time one ball is won.

In step S3712, it is determined whether or not the winning to the upper big winning opening 710a this time is the winning of the upper limit winning number of the round game. If the winning is the upper limit winning number, in step S3713, a battle victory effect is set to be performed on the display screen 75a. In the battle victory presentation, as shown in FIG. 77(a), a soldier who is the main character is shown yelling, and the characters "WIN" are displayed to indicate that the main character has won. . When the battle victory effect is executed, the number of enemy characters displayed is "100/100" to indicate that the number of defeated enemy characters has reached the number of enemy characters at the start. Also, in the HP display, one or more colored heart marks remain to indicate that the main character has remaining physical strength. After executing the processing of step S3713, the present effect setting processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3710 that no prize has been won in the upper grand prize opening 710a, or if it is determined in step S3712 that the upper limit number of prizes has not been won, the process proceeds to step S3714. In step S3714, the process of grasping the current normal game situation is executed. Such processing corresponds to step S3705, the number of pending information for the current normal map, the information of the variable display time when the pending information is subject to the normal map game round, and the current normal map The information on the remaining variable display time of the game round is grasped, and the process of specifying the current winning assistance duration time is performed.

In the subsequent step S3715, it is determined whether or not it is HP decrease timing. Whether or not it is time to decrease the HP is determined by the remaining winning assistance duration time and the number of displayed colored heart marks. For example, the prize winning assistance duration at the start of the battle presentation is equally divided by the number of colored heart marks to be displayed at the start, and it is determined that it is time to decrease HP each time the equally divided time elapses.

When it is HP decrease timing, HP decrease effect is set in step S3716. In the HP reduction effect, as shown in FIG. 76(b), one colored heart mark in the HP display is changed to a non-colored heart mark, and an attacking enemy character is displayed. to

After executing the process of step S3716, it is determined whether or not the number of colored heart marks is 0 in step S3717. When the number of colored heart marks reaches 0, it means that the prize winning assistance continuation time has become 0 and the winning easy state has ended. In this case, a battle defeat effect is set in step S3718. In the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 77(b), a soldier who is the main character is displayed lying face down, and the text "LOSE" is displayed to indicate that the main character has been defeated. . When the battle defeat effect is executed, the HP display clearly indicates that the main character has run out of physical strength before the enemy characters are annihilated in the current battle effect, and the current battle effect is performed. The enemy number display clearly indicates that the number of defeated enemy characters has not reached the number of enemy characters at the start.

When a negative determination is made in step S3715 or step S3717, or after executing the process of step S3718, this round effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, according to this modification, the end of the round game based on the winning to the upper big winning opening 710a, the supplementation of the reservation information on the side of the general pattern based on the winning to the through gate 35, and the game round on the side of the general pattern It is possible to create a battle production that reflects the progress of the game, and it is possible to realize a novel game production.

More specifically, in the round game at the time of the battle production, by generating a prize to the upper prize winning opening 710a and ending the round game early, the easy-to-win state continues and the battle production is a victory production. becomes easier. On the other hand, if there is little hold information on the general map side, or the fluctuation display time in the game round on the general map side is short, and the progress of the game on the general map side is fast, the easy winning state will end and the battle will be produced. is likely to be a defeat performance. Whether the battle effect becomes a victory effect or a defeat effect is determined by the balance between the progress of both games. It is possible to entertain the whereabouts.

In the above modification, the battle effect is performed in a predetermined round game during the opening and closing execution mode, but for example, the battle effect may be performed in a plurality of round games, or in all round games. A battle effect may be performed by pressing the button. In the above configuration, winning to the through gate 35 can occur at least during the interval period, so that the reserve information on the general/universal chart side can be supplemented. Then, for example, when a round game in which one battle effect is performed ends as a victory effect while reducing HP, HP is restored by winning a prize at the through gate 35 during the interval period. is also possible. By doing so, the early termination of the round game is associated with making it easier to win in the battle production in the round game, and it is also associated with making it easier to win in the battle production in the next round game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the playability of the open/close execution mode in which a plurality of round games are performed.

In addition, in the round game in which the battle production is not performed, opening and closing control is performed by the lower special prize opening 700a instead of the upper special prize opening 710a, and in the round game in which the battle production is not performed, the holding information on the general map side is performed. It is also possible to replenish the above-mentioned HP by replenishing the HP.

<Fourth Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In this modification, the positional relationship between the upper variable winning device 710 and the through gate 35 is different from that in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an overview of the positional relationship in this modified example.

In this modification, the distance between the lower end of the upper opening/closing door 710b in the upper variable winning device 710 and the through gate 35 is larger than the diameter D of the game ball. Therefore, even if the upper opening/closing door 710b is erected with respect to the game board 60 and the upper special prize winning opening 710a is opened, the game ball can pass between the upper opening/closing door 710b and the through gate 35, and the through gate. Entry into 35 can occur.

Below the upper variable winning device 710, a left guide nail group 69g and a right guide nail group 69h are provided so as to slope downward toward the through gate 35. As shown in FIG. The left and right guide nail groups 69g, 69h consist of a plurality of nails, and the spacing between the nails in the guide nail groups 69g, 69h is smaller than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is guided toward the through gate 35 without slipping between the nails of the left and right guide nail groups 69g and 69h and falling.

In this case, the game ball that has reached the upper variable winning device 710 enters the upper special winning opening 710a on the condition that the upper special winning opening 710a is open, and the upper special winning opening 710a is closed. A second route R2 that flows down in front of the upper opening/closing door 710b and enters the through gate 35 under the condition that the upper opening/closing door 710b is in a state, and is guided by the left and right guide nail groups 69g and 69h regardless of the state of the upper opening/closing door 710b. The third route R3 leading to the through gate 35 and either one of the routes are passed. In the third route R3, when the upper special prize winning port 710a is open, the ball that rolls on the upper opening and closing door 710b is dropped from the upper opening and closing door 710b instead of the upper special prize winning port 710a side. , guided to the through gate 35 by the guide nail groups 69g and 69h.

By doing so, even when the upper big winning opening 710a is in the open state, there is a room for winning the through gate 35, and it is possible to replenish the reserved information on the normal side during the round game. It becomes possible. As a result, even when a round game is performed in which the upper big winning opening 710a is open, the winning assistance continuation time can be supplemented during the round game, making it difficult to end the easy winning state. becomes possible.

However, since the third route R3 is a route through which the ball that has fallen from the upper open/close door 710b when the upper special prize winning port 710a is in an open state, the upper special prize winning port 710a is in an open state. , the winning rate to the through gate 35 decreases. That is, most of the game balls that have reached the upper variable winning device 710 enter the upper big winning opening 710a, and some of them enter the through gate 35. For example, among the game balls that reach the upper variable winning device 710 when the upper special winning opening 710a is in an open state, the ratio of the game balls winning the upper special winning opening 710a and the game balls winning the through gate 35 are set to be 5 to 1. In this case, two balls can enter the through gate 35 by the time the round game in which the upper big winning hole 710a is opened is finished (by the time ten balls are won). With such a relationship, it is possible to cause the easy winning state to end or not by playing a round game by the upper big winning hole 710a. It is possible to improve the playability of the round game by the upper big winning opening 710a while avoiding the inconvenience that the ball output rate rises.

<Fifth Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In this modified example, the configuration for changing the winning rate to the through gate 35 is different from that of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 79 , a movable accessory 820 is provided above the through gate 35 instead of the upper variable winning device 710 . The movable accessory 820 is fitted in an opening 821 formed by opening the game board 60 in the front-rear direction, and as shown in FIG. 79(c), and a projecting state projecting from the game board 60 as shown in FIG. 79(c). A movable accessory driving section 830 is connected to the movable accessory 820 . More specifically, the movable accessory driving section 830 is provided with a gear 831, and the gear 831 is meshed with a gear 822 on the movable accessory 820 side. Then, when the gear 831 is rotated by controlling the movable accessory drive unit 830, the movable accessory 820 is operated through the gear 822 and displaced between the retracted state and the projecting state. The movable accessory drive unit 830 is connected to the main controller 162, and the movable accessory 820 is periodically displaced between the retracted state and the projected state. Although this operation cycle is arbitrary, for example, by setting it to a cycle shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of aiming at the situation of the retreat state or the situation of the projecting state.

When the movable accessory 820 protrudes, the distance between the lower end of the movable accessory 820 and the upper end of the through gate 35 becomes smaller than the diameter D of the game ball. Therefore, when the movable accessory 820 is in a protruding state, winning to the through gate 35 does not occur. On the other hand, when the movable accessory 820 is in the retracted state, the movable accessory 820 does not become an obstacle to winning the through gate 35, and the winning to the through gate 35 occurs. In other words, the movable accessory 820 can be said to be a role that can be displaced between a state in which winning through the through gate 35 is allowed and a state in which winning through the through gate 35 is restricted. Then, the winning rate to the through gate 35 can be changed according to the state change and the operation cycle of the movable accessory 820 .

In addition, the front surface of the movable accessory 820 may be formed so as to incline further toward the upper side, for example. By doing so, in a situation where the game ball exists in front of the movable accessory 820, the game ball can escape when the movable accessory 820 changes from the retracted position to the projecting position. .

<Sixth Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In this modified example, the configuration of the movable accessory differs from that in the fifth modified example.

As shown in FIG. 80, a rotating body 800 is provided as a movable accessory in this modified example. The rotating body 800 has a columnar shape extending forward, and rotates along a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board 60 with a rotating shaft 801 standing forward from the front surface of the game board 60 as a central axis of rotation. rotatable. A driving section (not shown) is connected to the rotating body 800, and the driving section is driven and controlled by the main controller 162 so that the rotating body 800 rotates periodically.

The rotating body 800 has a thickness toward the front of the game board 60 that is larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. The distance between the lower end of the rotor 800 and the through gate 35 is smaller than the diameter D of the game ball.

A housing portion 810 is formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, and a portion of the housing portion 810 is recessed to be larger than the diameter D of the game ball. The accommodation portion 810 can accommodate a predetermined number (one) of game balls.

That is, when a game ball falls from above onto the rotating body 800 in a state where the accommodation portion 810 is arranged upward, the game ball is received by the accommodation portion 810 and is accommodated in the accommodation portion 810 . When the rotating body 800 rotates and the accommodation portion 810 is arranged downward and arranged above the through gate 35, the game ball accommodated in the accommodation portion 810 falls toward the through gate 35 and the game ball is dropped. enters through gate 35.

By doing so, the winning of the through gate 35 can be caused periodically according to the rotation period of the rotating body 800 . In this case, by adjusting the rotation cycle, it becomes possible to adjust the winning cycle to the through gate 35, and the transition to the winning easy state can be easily designed.

In addition, the rotation period of the rotating body 800 is about 1/4 of the long fluctuation display time set at low frequency in the game round on the normal side (1 of the upper limit of the reservation), so that the long fluctuation display time When is set, it is possible to set the number of general pattern pending storage FN to 4, which is the upper limit number.

Further, with the above configuration, it is possible to cause the through gate 35 to win a prize at a timing different from the arrival timing depending on the period during which the rotating body 800 rotates. As a result, for example, by applying this configuration to the configuration having the upper variable winning device 710, it is possible to cause the game ball that has reached before the start of the round game to enter the through gate 35 during the round game, The continuity of the easy winning state can be changed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, in addition to the through gate 35, a ball-entering section that serves as a trigger for acquiring hold information on the normal map side is provided separately. FIG. 81 is a front view showing the structure of the game board 60 according to this embodiment. The game board 60 of the present embodiment has the same basic configuration as the game board 60 of the first embodiment, and the same components as those of the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals. , and its description is omitted.

In this embodiment, a second through gate 850 is provided on the left side of the variable display unit 67 and downstream of the through gate 35 and the second operating port 63 . The second through gate 850 has the same configuration as the through gate 35, and serves as a passage-type ball entry portion in which the entered game ball is discharged to the game area PE again. And, in the present embodiment, not only when the game ball enters the through gate 35, but also when the game ball enters the second through gate 850, the hold information on the normal side is acquired.

A game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 and flowed down in front of the second operation port 63 is sorted by a nail 69 or the like into a route toward the second through gate 850 and a route not toward the second through gate 850.例文帳に追加As for the distribution rate, for example, the distribution to the side different from the second through gate 850 is higher than the distribution to the second through gate 850 side.

Although the rate of allocation to the route to the second through gate 850 is arbitrary, for example, the probability of being allocated to the second through gate 850 is 1/200, and the probability of being allocated to the second through gate 850 is 199/200. 850 cannot be distributed.

With the configuration as described above, in a situation where a game ball is shot so as to flow down the left route, and a winning to the through gate 35 can occur periodically, the phenomenon of winning to the second through gate 850 can be prevented. can be generated. As a result, not only when the long variable display time is selected in the game cycle on the normal side based on the winning to the through gate 35 to shift to the easy winning state, but also by winning to the second through gate 850 It is possible to cause a game ball to reach the electric accessory 66 at the timing of opening the electric accessory 66, and a prize to the second operation opening 63 can occur. That is, at the timing when the winning to the second through gate 850 occurs, if the normal game round based on the winning to the through gate 35 is running or in the support state based on the winning to the through gate 35, the normal pattern is suspended The memory number FN becomes 1. Then, the next normal game round will be started without waiting for the winning of the through gate 35, and the cycle of the normal game will be changed (FIG. 27). By doing so, it is possible to win a prize in the second operation opening 63 in the normal game state (first normal game state) before entering the winning easy state (second normal game state), and the interest is improved.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the winning rate to the second operation opening 63 is changed by lottery based on numerical information such as the setting of the variable display time on the normal diagram side in the first embodiment. Also, the winning rate to the second operation port 63 can be changed according to the flow state of the game ball. By doing so, the player expects that the game balls will be distributed to the route (advantageous route) toward the second through gate 850, and the enjoyment of the flow of the game balls is added.

In the above configuration, one second through gate 850 is provided as a trigger for acquiring hold information on the normal map side other than the through gate 35, but a plurality of second through gates 850 may be provided. For example, four through gates are arranged in a row such that passing through the first through gate causes passage through all four through gates. By setting the interval of these through gates to be an interval that allows the game ball to flow down in a time shorter than the cycle of the normal game, by passing through the plurality of through gates, the normal game reserved memory number FN is 4. will increase. As a result, it is possible to shift to the winning easy state when passing through the plurality of through gates.

In the above case, more specifically, when passing through four continuous through gates, if a normal game based on winning a prize to a single through gate 35 is executed, the normal pattern reservation storage number FN becomes 4, and it is in an easy-to-win state. On the other hand, when passing through the four continuous through gates, the normal game based on the winning to the single through gate 35 is not executed, or the single during the passage of the four continuous through gates When the normal game based on the winning to the through gate 35 has ended (before the winning of all the continuous through gates is completed, the suspension based on winning to one of the continuous through gates When the information is digested), the number of normal pattern reserved storage FN becomes 3 at the time when winning of all the consecutive through gates is completed, and as it is, it will not be in an easy-to-win state. In this case, depending on the timing at which the following game ball enters the single through gate 35, the number of normal pattern reserved memories FN at the time of winning may be 4 or 3, resulting in an easy-to-win state. There are cases where it is possible to continue and cases where it is not. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the winning timing to the successive through gates and the winning timing to the through gate 35, thereby improving the game performance.

By setting the number of continuous through gates to 5 or more, it is possible to ensure the continuity of the easy-to-win state by one pass.

<First Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
In this modification, the 1st route|route by which one reservation information by the side of a normal map is acquired, and the 2nd route|route by which several reservation|holding information are acquired are provided. FIG. 82 is a diagram conceptually showing a prize winning route to the prize winning portion from which the reservation information on the normal map side is acquired in this modification.

The game area PE is provided with passage walls 860 for forming the first route and the second route. The passage wall 860 is erected forward from the game board 60 and attached to the front surface of the game board 60 as a plate-like wall made of resin. In addition, the passage wall 860 may be formed by a plurality of nails 69 .

Of the passage walls 860, a first passage wall 861 and a second passage wall 862 are arranged so as to extend in the vertical direction at intervals larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. A game ball can pass between two passage walls 862 . The second passage wall 862 is shorter than the first passage wall 861 . Under the second passage wall 862, the third passage wall 863 continues on the imaginary extension line of the second passage wall 862 with an interval larger than the diameter D of the second passage wall 862 and the game ball. The first route R1 is defined by an area passing between the first passage wall 861 and the second passage wall 862 and an area passing between the first passage wall 861 and the third passage wall 863. formed.

A distribution valve 867 is provided between the second passage wall 862 and the third passage wall 863 . The distribution valve 867 forms a first state that forms a surface continuous with the second passage wall 862 and the third passage wall 863, forms a surface that intersects the second passage wall 862 and the third passage wall 863, and forms a first state It can be displaced to a second state in which the distance from the passage wall 861 is smaller than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. The distribution valve 687 is rotatable around a rotary shaft 868, and is rotationally controlled from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state by a drive section (not shown).

From the lower end of the second passage wall 862 and the upper end of the third passage wall 863, a fourth passage wall 864 and a fifth passage wall 865 are formed as wall portions continuing obliquely downward, separated by the diameter D of the game ball. are provided. A second route R2 is formed by a region passing between the first passage wall 861 and the second passage wall 862 and a region passing between the fourth passage wall 864 and the fifth passage wall 865. When the distribution valve 867 is in the second state, the game ball can pass through the second route R2.

A through gate 35 is provided downstream of the distribution valve 867 on the first route R1. A third through gate 851 and a fourth through gate 852 are provided downstream of the distribution valve 867 on the second route R2. The third through-gate 851 and the fourth through-gate 852 are pass-type prize-winning parts in which the reservation information on the normal map side is acquired. Also, the distance between the third through gate 851 and the fourth through gate 852 is smaller than the diameter dimension D of the game ball.

The electric accessory in this modification is formed wider than the electric accessory 66, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 and the game ball that has passed through the third through gate 851 and the fourth through gate 852 However, all of them can win prizes. That is, the electric accessory 870 in this modification is provided at a position to receive game balls flowing down from the first route R1 and at a position to receive game balls flowing down from the second route R2.

As the distribution mode of the distribution valve 867, for example, the above-mentioned (not shown) is performed so that the displacement operation to change from the first state to the second state and then to the first state is performed at a predetermined cycle. The driving section is driven and controlled. It should be noted that the drive control of the drive unit may be configured to be performed by the main controller 162 .

And, by the displacement operation of the distribution valve 867, game balls are distributed to the first route R1 and the second route R2, and when winning the through gate 35, to the third through gate 851 and the fourth through gate 852 A case of winning a prize will occur. That is, it has a first route R1 that acquires one hold information on the general map side and a second route R2 that acquires two hold information on the general map side, and which route is assigned , and distribution by the distribution valve 867 . Although the distribution rate by the distribution valve 867 is arbitrary, it is preferable that the first route R1 is more easily distributed than the second route R2. After being assigned to R2, it is assigned to the first route R1 with a probability of 199/200.

By doing so, it is possible to vary the acquisition number of the hold information on the normal map side depending on the route through which the game ball passes. As a result, it is possible to generate a case where the reservation information on the normal map side is increased by one and a case where it is increased by two, and it is possible to diversify the mode of transition to the winning easy state.

<Second Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
In this modification, the distribution mode of a plurality of normal map reservation acquisition routes in the first modification is different.

As conceptually shown in FIG. 83, for example, the game area PE is provided with a rolling portion 880 having a rolling surface 881 on which a game ball can roll. The rolling surface 881 functions as a so-called croon formed in a flat shape or a bowl shape, for example. For example, the rolling part 880 is provided with a passage area (warp passage) through which game balls flowing down the left route pass relatively infrequently, and is provided at a position where game balls that have passed through the passage area are drawn out.

The rolling portion 880 is provided with a plurality of drop ports through which game balls rolling on the rolling surface 881 drop from the rolling surface 881 . The drop opening is formed as an opening slightly larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. When the game ball falls from the first drop hole 882, which is a type of drop hole, it passes through the first lead-out passage 891 made of resin or the like, and is discharged to the game area PE, for example, below the variable display unit 67. is derived to On the other hand, when the game ball falls from the second drop hole 883, which is a type of drop hole, it passes through the second lead-out passage 892 and is discharged to the game area PE. Also, when the game ball falls from the third drop port 884, it passes through the third lead-out passage 893 and is discharged to the game area PE. The discharge destinations from the first outlet passage 891, the second outlet passage 892, and the third outlet passage 893 may be the same region or different regions.

A through gate 35 is provided in the first lead-out passage 891 . On the other hand, the second lead-out passage 892 is provided with a fifth through gate 853 and a sixth through gate 854 . A seventh through gate 855 , an eighth through gate 856 and a ninth through gate 857 are provided in the third lead-out passage 893 . Each of the fifth through gate 853 to the ninth through gate 857 is a pass-type prize-winning portion for obtaining hold information on the normal map side.

That is, when the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 880 falls from the first drop port 882 and passes through the first route R1 by the first lead-out passage 891, one piece of reservation information on the normal drawing side is obtained. On the other hand, when the game ball rolling on the rolling part 880 falls from the second drop port 883 and passes through the second route R2 by the second lead-out passage 892, two pieces of reservation information on the normal drawing side are acquired. Then, when the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 880 falls from the third drop port 884 and passes through the third route R3 by the third lead-out passage 893, three holding information on the normal drawing side is acquired.

That is, the number of hold information to be acquired differs depending on which of the drop openings 882 to 884 the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 880 falls. As the number of pieces of pending information to be acquired increases, the easy-to-win state is more likely to occur. Thereby, the degree of attention to the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 881 of the rolling portion 880 can be preferably increased.

On the other hand, since the game ball rolls on the rolling surface 881 and is dropped from one of the drop ports 882 to 884, the rolling period can be lengthened. In other words, the period from when the reservation information on the general map side is acquired to when the next reservation information on the general map side is acquired can be lengthened. More specifically, there is a possibility that the pending information obtained by the previously dropped game ball is consumed while the subsequent game ball rolls on the rolling surface 881 . Then, it can be said that the rolling surface 881 has a function of making the acquisition timing of the hold information different from the arrival timing. Therefore, for example, even if three pieces of reservation information are obtained by dropping from the third drop opening 884, if the timing of obtaining the reservation information after that is delayed, the number of pieces of reservation information does not become four, and an easy-to-win state does not occur. By doing so, it becomes a game that utilizes the relationship between the period in which the game ball rolls on the rolling surface 881 and the drop openings 882 to 884 where it falls after rolling, and the game ball flows down. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making good association with the setting of the winning easy state.

<Third Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
In this modification, the second through gate 850 is arranged directly above the through gate 35 . FIG. 84 is a front view showing the game board 60 of this modification. Also in this modification, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The second thru gate 850 and the thru gate 35 are arranged so that their central axes are aligned in the vertical direction, and the distance between the second thru gate 850 and the thru gate 35 is larger than the diameter D of the game ball. It's getting smaller. Therefore, game balls passing through the second through gate 850 pass through the through gate 35, and game balls that do not pass through the second through gate 850 are set so as not to pass through the through gate 35.例文帳に追加

Regarding the interval between the second through gate 850 and the through gate 35, in more detail, the second A through gate 850 and a through gate 35 are arranged. Therefore, when the reservation information on the general pattern side is acquired based on the winning to the second through gate 850, the winning to the through gate 35 occurs before the general pattern game based on the reservation information ends. Acquisition of pending information is performed. It should be noted that, in the following description, the second through gate 850 and the through gate 35 are collectively and continuously described because the configuration is such that when a prize is won at the second through gate 850, a prize is always won at the through gate 35. It is also called through, and the winning in the continuous through is also called continuous through winning.

FIG. 85(a) shows a general-purpose right/wrong table in this modified example.

In this modification, it becomes an open result with a probability of 500/1000 in the success or failure lottery on the side of the normal pattern, and it becomes an out result with a probability of 500/1000. That is, unlike each of the above-described embodiments in which most of the results are open, the configuration is such that half of the results are open.

In this modification, the normal pattern fluctuation display time table referred to in the normal pattern game times is switched based on the establishment of the predetermined switching condition. As a predetermined switching condition, for example, it is a big hit result in the success or failure lottery on the special figure side, and switching of the normal figure fluctuation display time table is performed based on the end of the opening and closing execution mode. And, in this modification, a normal figure fluctuation display time table for the first state shown in FIG. 85(b) and a normal figure fluctuation display time table for the second state shown in FIG. 85(c) are provided. there is

When the normal pattern game round is executed with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the first state, the normal pattern fluctuation display time table (FIG. 10 (b)) in the first embodiment is selected The variable display time is the same. On the other hand, the stop display time as the fixed display is different from that of the first embodiment, and is set shorter than the stop display time (0.4 sec) of the first embodiment. Specifically, a different stop display time is set depending on the result of the general figure success or failure lottery, and if the general figure pending memory number FN is 1 to 3, the open result is 0.125 sec. A stop display time is set, and when the number FN of the normal pattern holding memory is 1 to 3 and the result is out, a stop display time of 0.225 sec is set. In addition, when the normal pattern pending memory number FN is 4, if it is an open result, the stop display time of 0.4 sec is set, and if the normal pattern pending memory number FN is 4, it is 0 if it is an off result. A stop display time of .5 sec is set.

That is, the stop display time is set so as to be longer in the case of an off result by the opening time (0.1 sec) in which the electric accessary 66 is in the open state, and as a result, the normal drawing success or failure lottery is performed. Regardless of the result, the normal game execution time (normal game time) is set to be the same time at the same number of reservations. Specifically, when the general pattern game time is 1 to 3, the normal pattern reservation memory number FN is mostly 0.275 sec, and rarely becomes 10.225 sec. In addition, when the general pattern reservation storage number FN is 4, the general pattern game time is 1.1 sec.

As described above, in this modification, when the second through gate 850 is won, the through gate 35 is also won. And, in the normal time when the general pattern reservation storage number FN is 1 to 3, the general pattern game time is 0.275 sec, and the total game time based on winning to these through gates 850 and 35 is 0.275 sec. 55 sec. In other words, the normal game time for 2 times is the same time as the normal game time for 1 time when the normal game reservation memory number FN is 1 to 3 in the first embodiment, and the game ball is shot. The time is shorter than the period. In this case, it goes without saying that the game ball that has entered the second through gate 850 does not reach the electric role object 66 until the electric role object 66 is released. The electric accessary product 66 is not reached until the electric accessary product 66 is released. As a result, winning to the second operation port 63 does not occur, and even if the subsequent game ball enters the second through gate 850, the normal pattern pending memory number FN only repeats 0 and 1, No further increase is expected.

In a situation where the number of normal pattern pending memory FN is 1 to 3, as the variable display time selected with a relatively low probability, when 10.0 sec, which is a time longer than the firing cycle, is selected, After that, it is possible to easily reach the upper limit of the normal pattern reserved memory number FN, and it is possible to shift to a winning easy state in which the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is kept at 4 which is the upper limit number. Although there is a difference in that it is possible to shift to the easy-to-win state at an early stage by the amount of pending information acquired based on the winning to the second through gate 850, a long variable display time is selected. The configuration of increasing the normal pattern reservation storage number FN is common to the first embodiment.

In the first state, in a situation where the general pattern reservation storage number FN is 4, the general pattern game time is 1.1 sec. In this case, as in the first embodiment, the timing at which the electric accessory 66 is reached and the timing at which the electric accessory 66 is released overlap about 1 out of 10 balls. will occur. Since the normal game time is longer than the firing cycle, as long as the winning to the second through gate 850 occurs periodically, the normal game reservation memory number FN repeats 4 and 3, and the winning easy state is continued. be.

However, as described above, in this modified example, the probability of becoming an open result in the normal figure success or failure lottery is 1/2. Therefore, in the first state, when the easy-to-win state is reached, a winning to the second operation opening 63 occurs at a rate of substantially one ball out of about 20 balls.

On the other hand, when the normal pattern game round is executed with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the second state, as shown in FIG. In the case of , the variable display time and the stop display time are set so that the normal game time is mostly 0.275 sec, and rarely 10.225 sec, as in the case of the first state. That is, when the general pattern reservation memory number FN is 1 to 2, as in the first state, the general pattern reservation memory number FN repeats 0 and 1 until the general pattern game time of 10.225 sec. and no further increase is expected. And, by becoming normal game time of 10.225 sec, it is possible to increase the normal pattern pending memory number FN.

When the normal pattern holding memory number FN becomes 3, the variable display time is set to 0.3 sec, the stop display time is set to 0.4 sec if the result is open, and 0 if the result is out. .5 sec is set. Therefore, the general pattern game time when the general pattern reservation storage number FN is 3 is 0.8 sec, which is longer than the firing cycle.

When the normal pattern holding memory number FN becomes 4, the variable display time is set to 0.075 sec, and the stop display time is set to 0.125 sec in the case of an open result, and 0 in the case of an off result. .225 sec is set. Therefore, the general pattern game time when the normal pattern reservation storage number FN is 4 is 0.3 sec, which is shorter than the firing cycle.

That is, in the situation where the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the second state is referred to, the variable display time of 10.0 sec is selected, the normal pattern reservation storage number FN is increased, for example, the normal pattern reservation storage number FN When is 4, since the normal game time shorter than the firing cycle is set, the normal game ends before the subsequent game ball enters the second through gate 850, and the normal game reservation number A normal game is started in a situation where FN is 3. The normal game in the situation that the number of normal game pending memory FN is 3, since the normal game time longer than the firing cycle is set, at the timing before the end of the normal game, the second through Winning to gate 850 occurs. When the winning to the second thru gate 850 occurs, the winning to the thru gate 35 also occurs subsequently, so the number of reserved memory FN for the normal pattern increases by 2 to become 4. Then, again, a 0.3 sec normal game in a situation where the normal pattern reservation memory number FN is 4, and a 0.8 sec normal game in a situation where the normal pattern reservation memory number FN is 3 are executed. Along with the second through gate 850, based on the winning prize to the second thru gate 850, the general pattern reservation information will be supplemented.

When the timing at which the game ball reaches the electric accessory 66 overlaps with the timing at which the electric accessory 66 is released, a prize is awarded to the second operation opening 63, which results in a second state. It will be in an easy-to-win state. In this case, in the easy winning state, the number of normal game per unit time is greater than in the first state. Specifically, the total of the normal game of 0.3 sec and the normal game of 0.8 sec is equal to 1.1 sec, which is the game time of the normal game in the easy winning state in the first state, In the easy winning state of the second state, the normal game is executed per unit time about twice as many times as in the easy winning state of the first state.

As a result, in the easy winning state of the second state, the situation where the timing of the arrival of the game ball to the electric role object 66 and the timing of the release of the electric role object 66 overlap with each other in the easy winning state of the first state. It will occur about twice as often, and will occur at a rate of about 1 in 5 balls.

However, as described above, in this modified example, the probability of becoming an open result in the normal figure success or failure lottery is 1/2. Therefore, in the second state, when the easy-to-win state is reached, a winning to the second operation opening 63 occurs at a rate of substantially one ball out of ten balls.

In addition, since the reservation information may be supplemented during the execution of the general pattern game in a situation where the general pattern reservation memory number FN is 3, in the winning easy state of the second state, the general pattern reservation memory number FN The normal pattern game started in the situation where is 4 has more execution times than the normal pattern game started in the situation where the normal pattern reservation storage number FN is 3. Therefore, when the easy winning state in the first state and the easy winning state in the second state are compared, the number of times in the easy winning state in the second state is more than double that in the easy winning state in the first state. A normal game will be executed per unit time. In other words, in the easy-to-win state of the second state, the situation where the timing of the game ball reaching the electric accessory 66 and the timing when the electric accessory 66 is released overlaps with the case of the first state. Compared to the situation, it occurs more than twice as often, and the winning to the second operation opening 63 also occurs at a rate higher than the rate of one ball out of five balls.

In any case, by doing as described above, it is possible to increase the winning rate to the second operating port 63 in the easy winning state in the first state and the winning rate to the second operating port 63 in the easy winning state in the second state. can be made different. As a result, it is possible to create a plurality of easy-to-win states with different winning rates to the second operating opening 63 only by changing the setting of the length of the variable display time, and to diversify the game. .

More specifically, the winning rate to the second operation opening 63 is higher when the easy winning state is established in the second state than when the easy winning state is established in the first state. Also, in the second state, the execution frequency of the win/fail lottery on the side of the first special figure during the winning easy state is increased, and the expectation for the result of the big win is enhanced. Moreover, since it is possible to obtain a prize ball by winning a prize in the second operation port 63, the second state improves the ball retention during the easy-to-win state or increases the number of balls held than in the first state. can be expected. In this way, it is possible to differentiate the degree of advantage for the player in the easy winning state between the first state and the second state.

<Fourth Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
In this modified example, a new playability is created using a configuration in which a plurality of pieces of pending information can be acquired. FIG. 86(a) is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 60 in this modified example. In this modified example as well, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, a tenth through gate 858 and an eleventh through gate 859 are provided on the left side of the variable display unit 67 . The tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 are arranged so that their central axes are aligned in the vertical direction, and are arranged vertically so that the tenth through gate 858 is above the eleventh through gate 859 . are arranged side by side. The distance between the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 is smaller than the diameter D of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the 10th through gate 858 will enter the 11th through gate 859 after that, and will not enter the 11th through gate 859 without entering the 10th through gate 858. there is In other words, the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 have a continuous through relationship with the second through gate 850 and the through gate 35 in the third modification.

A third variable winning device 910 is provided on the left side of the variable display unit 67 and below the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 . The third variable prize-winning device 910 is a ball-entering unit that is controlled to open and close when winning a winning lottery for a normal figure. More specifically, it has the same configuration as the second variable winning device 500 in the third embodiment, and game balls can enter the distribution entrance 501 by controlling the opening and closing of the distribution member 502. becomes. In addition, the opening and closing execution mode for V winning is executed after the game ball flows into the V winning area 506 in the third variable winning device 910, which is also the same as the third embodiment. .

Below the variable display unit 67, similarly to the above-described embodiments, a first operation port 62 is provided, and by winning a game ball into the first operation port 62, a winning lottery for the first special figure is done. It should be noted that, in this modified example, the operation port for the second special figure is not provided.

A fourth variable winning device 900 is provided below the variable display unit 67 and below the first operation port 62 . When the jackpot is won in the winning lottery for the first special figure, and when the game ball passes through the V winning area 506 in the third variable winning device 910, 16 rounds by the fourth variable winning device 900 The open/close execution mode is executed.

In this modification, the probability of winning or failing lottery on the side of the general pattern is different from each of the above-described embodiments. As shown in FIG. 86(b), in this modified example, most of the lotteries on the side of the normal side result in lost results (999/1000), and relatively low frequency results in open results (1/1000). When the open result is reached, the third variable prize winning device 910 is opened for a predetermined period of time. In this case, unlike the above embodiments, the upper limit open time of the third variable winning device 910 is set to 10 seconds. Therefore, when the third variable prize winning device 910 is in the open state, it is possible to generate a prize to the third variable prize winning device 910 almost certainly. Then, by passing through the V winning area 506 in the third variable winning device 910 (making a V winning), the opening/closing execution mode by the fourth variable winning device 900 will be executed thereafter.

In addition, in this modification, when the third variable prize winning device 910 is in the open state, the probability of winning the V prize is about 1/5. Specifically, when the third variable prize winning device 910 is opened five times (when the result of opening five times is reached), V prize is won at a rate of one of them. Therefore, when the reservation information on the general map side is acquired based on the winning to the 10th through gate 858 or the 11th through gate 859, V winning is generated with a probability of about 1/5000 for one reservation information It is possible to

Also, in this modification, the gauge is designed so that most of the game balls hit the 10th through gate 858 and the 11th through gate 859 when the game ball is shot to flow down the left route.

FIG. 87 shows a normal figure fluctuation display time table in this modified example.

In this modification, a normal figure fluctuation display time table for the first state and a general figure fluctuation display time table for the second state are provided, and the corresponding fluctuation display time table is selected according to the state at the time of the general figure lottery be done. The first state and the second state are switched by a winning lottery on the special figure side. More specifically, by becoming a jackpot result in the winning lottery on the special figure side, it is switched from the first state to the second state, and in the second state, the winning lottery on the special figure side is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). It is set to switch from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the second state is detected.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the normal figure fluctuation display time table for the first state, the fluctuation display time in the situation where there are three pending information is less than that (one or two) It is set so that it can be longer than the situation, and the variable display time in the situation where the number of pending information is 4, which is more than the above 3, is set to be shorter than the variable display time for the other numbers. there is

Specifically, when there is one or two pieces of pending information, the variable display time is uniformly selected to be 0.79 sec as the first time. The fixed time (stop display time) is 0.01 sec, and if the third variable winning device 910 is not in the open state, in a situation where there is one or two pending information, the normal game is 0.8 sec. will be executed twice. That is, when the variable display time is set as the first time, the normal game progresses in a cycle slightly longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball, so the hold information is supplemented faster than the hold information digestion speed. The speed is faster, and the pending information is easier to accumulate.

When there are three pieces of hold information, either the first time of 0.79 sec or the second time of 1.29 sec longer than the first time is selected. If it is 1.29 sec, the normal game will be executed once in 1.3 sec, and the hold information will be more likely to accumulate than when the first time is selected. In other words, when the normal game is started in a situation where there are three pending information and the second time is selected, the speed of digestion of the pending information becomes slower, so the pending information accumulates more than when the first time is selected. becomes easier. The first time and the second time are determined by the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5, and the second time is more likely to be selected than the first time. It should be noted that the variable display time may be determined by another counter, another lottery process, or the like.

When the number of pieces of pending information is four, which is the upper limit number, 0.29 sec is uniformly selected as the third time, which is shorter than the first time and the second time. When the third time is selected, the normal game will be executed once in 0.3 sec. Therefore, the speed of digesting the pending information becomes faster than the speed of replenishing the pending information, and the pending information becomes less likely to accumulate.

In the normal figure fluctuation display time table for the second state, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the fluctuation display time in the situation where there are two pieces of pending information It is set so that it can be longer, and the variable display time in the situation where there are 3 or 4 pieces of pending information, which is more than the above 2 pieces, is set to be shorter than the variable display time for other numbers. there is

Specifically, when there is one piece of pending information, the variable display time is uniformly selected to be 0.79 sec as the first time. In this case, as described above, the normal game is executed once in 0.8 sec, so the replenishment speed of the reservation information is faster than the consumption speed of the reservation information, and the reservation information is easily accumulated.

If there are two pieces of hold information, either the first time of 0.79 sec or the second time of 1.29 sec is selected. As described above, when the second time is selected, hold information is more likely to accumulate than when the first time is selected. As in the first state, the first time and the second time are determined by the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5, and the second time is more likely to be selected than the first time.

When there are three pieces of hold information, 0.29 sec, which is the third time, is uniformly selected. When the third time is selected, the normal game will be executed once in 0.3 sec. Therefore, the speed of digesting the pending information becomes faster than the speed of replenishing the pending information, and the pending information becomes less likely to accumulate.

When the number of pieces of hold information is four, which is the upper limit number, 0.01 sec is uniformly set as the fourth time, which is shorter than the first to third times. When the fourth time is set, the normal game will be executed once in 0.02 sec, and the speed of digestion of the pending information will be overwhelmingly faster than the replenishment speed of the pending information. As a result, it becomes more difficult to accumulate than three pieces of pending information.

In the first state and the second state, how the reservation information for the normal drawing is acquired will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG.

As already explained, most of the game balls flowing down the left route enter the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 . In other words, when the game ball is shot so as to flow down the left route, winnings to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 occur regularly according to the shooting cycle.

In the first state, as shown in FIG. 88, for example, when the tenth through gate 858 wins at timing ta1, the eleventh through gate 859 wins at timing ta2. In timing ta1, when the number of pieces of the reservation|holding information by the side of a general map is 0 pieces, reservation information is acquired 1 piece at a time at timing ta1 and timing ta2. However, since the pending information is digested at the same time as the pending information is acquired at the timing ta1 (the normal game is started), the number of stored pending information becomes one at the timing ta2. In addition, the general pattern game round started at the timing ta1 ends at the timing ta5 which is 0.8 sec later (the next general pattern game is started at the timing ta5).

When the subsequent game ball enters the 10th through gate 858 at timing ta3, the 11th through gate 859 subsequently enters at timing ta4. Since the normal game started at the timing ta1 is still continuing, the number of storage of the pending information becomes 2 based on the winning of the timing ta3, and the number of storing of the pending information is 3 based on the winning of the timing ta4. becomes. Then, by starting the next general game of the general game started at the timing ta1 at the timing ta5, the number of storage of the pending information is reduced by one and becomes two.

The normal game started at timing ta5 is a normal game started in a situation where there are three pieces of pending information. The normal game ends at timing ta10 after 1.3 seconds (the next normal game is started at timing ta10).

At timing ta6, which is timing before timing ta10, the next game ball enters the tenth through gate 858, and subsequently enters the eleventh through gate 859 at timing ta7. In this case, the number of stored pending information is 3 based on the winning at timing ta6, and the number of stored pending information is 4 based on the winning at timing ta7. In other words, the maximum number of pieces of pending information that can be stored is reached.

At timing ta8, the next game ball enters the tenth through gate 858, and subsequently enters the eleventh through gate 859 at timing ta9. However, in this case, the general figure game started at timing ta5 is still before the end, and as described above, the number of storage information on hold has reached the upper limit at timing ta7, so by winning at timing ta8 and timing ta9 is not acquired pending information. In other words, even if the winning to the tenth through gate 858 or the eleventh through gate 859 is generated, the lottery on the side of the general map cannot be received.

When the general pattern game ends at timing ta10, the next general pattern game is started. In this case, the normal game is started in a situation where there are four pieces of hold information, and the variable display time is set to 0.29 sec, which is the third time. And, the general-purpose game ends at timing ta13 after 0.3 sec (the next general-purpose game is started at timing ta13).

Winning to the 10th through gate 858 occurs at timing ta11 which is after the start of the normal game at timing ta10 and before the end of the normal game, and subsequently to the 11th through gate 859 at timing ta12 of prizes will occur. In this case, as described above, by the start of the general pattern game at the timing ta10, one piece of pending information is digested, so there is one free space in the general pattern side storage area. Therefore, in the winning at timing ta11, although one piece of pending information is acquired, the acquisition eliminates the vacancy and the number of stored pending information reaches the upper limit, and in the winning at timing ta12, the pending information is not acquired. In other words, even if the winning to the 10th through gate 858 and the 11th through gate 859 is generated, 2 pieces of pending information are not acquired, only 1 piece of pending information is acquired, and the success or failure lottery on the general map side Only one is done.

When the general pattern game ends at timing ta13, the next general pattern game is started. As in the case of timing ta10, it is a normal game that is started in a situation where there are four pieces of pending information, and the variable display time is set to 0.29 sec, which is the third time. And, the general-purpose game ends at timing ta16 after 0.3 sec (the next general-purpose game is started at timing ta16).

Winning to the 10th through gate 858 occurs at timing ta14 which is after the start of the normal game at timing ta13 and before the end of the normal game, and subsequently to the 11th through gate 859 at timing ta15 of prizes will occur. Also in this case, as described above, by the start of the general pattern game at the timing ta13, one piece of pending information is digested, so there is one free space in the general pattern side storage area. Therefore, the number of pending information stored reaches the upper limit due to the winning at the timing ta14, and the pending information is not acquired for the winning at the timing ta15. In other words, even if the winning to the 10th through gate 858 and the 11th through gate 859 is generated, 2 pieces of pending information are not acquired, only 1 piece of pending information is acquired, and the success or failure lottery on the general map side Only one is done.

When the general pattern game ends at timing ta16, the next general pattern game is started, and one space is generated in the storage area of the reservation information. As a result, even if winning to the 10th thru gate 858 occurs at timing ta17 and winning to the 11th thru gate 859 occurs at timing ta18, two pieces of pending information are not acquired, and one Only one reservation information is acquired, and the winning lottery on the normal side is performed for only one.

The general pattern game started at timing ta16 ends at timing ta19, and the same applies when the next general pattern game is started. is acquired, and the winning lottery on the normal side is performed for only one.

That is, in the first state, when the hold information on the general map side is acquired periodically, timing ta11 (timing ta12), timing ta14 (timing ta15), timing ta17 (timing ta18), timing ta20 (timing At ta21), even if winning to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 occurs, the state is such that a smaller number of pending information than the pending information for the winning is acquired. In other words, it will be in a state where the winning lottery for the normal figure of the number less than the winning prize is performed. Here, since acquisition of the reservation information for one piece is made and the success or failure lottery for the general figure for one piece is performed, the said state is also called a single lottery state. That is, it can be said that the first state is a state where the single lottery state is likely to occur.

In the second state, as shown in FIG. 89, for example, when the tenth through gate 858 wins at timing tb1, the eleventh through gate 859 wins at timing tb2. In timing tb1, when the number of pieces of the reservation|holding information by the side of a general map is 0 pieces, reservation information is acquired 1 piece each at timing tb1 and timing tb2. However, since the pending information is digested at the same time as the pending information is acquired at the timing tb1 (the normal game is started), the number of stored pending information becomes one at the timing tb2. In addition, the general pattern game round started at the timing tb1 ends at the timing tb5 which is 0.8 sec later (the next general pattern game is started at the timing tb5).

When the subsequent game ball enters the 10th through gate 858 at timing tb3, the 11th through gate 859 subsequently enters at timing tb4. Since the general-purpose game started at the timing tb1 is still continuing, the number of stored pending information is 2 based on the winning at the timing tb3, and the number of stored pending information is 3 based on the winning at the timing tb4. becomes. Then, at timing tb5, the next general game of the general game started at timing tb1 is started, so that the number of storage of the pending information is reduced by one to be two.

The normal game started at timing tb5 is a normal game started in a situation where there are three pieces of pending information, and when the variable display time is set to 0.29 sec, which is the third time, the normal The figure game ends at timing tb8 which is 0.3 sec later (at timing tb8, the next normal figure game is started).

Winning to the 10th through gate 858 occurs at timing tb6 which is after the start of the normal game at timing tb5 and before the end of the normal game, and subsequently to the 11th through gate 859 at timing tb7. of prizes will occur. In this case, by the start of the general pattern game at the timing tb5, since one piece of pending information has been digested, there are two free spaces in the general pattern side storage area. Therefore, acquisition of the pending information is performed with the winning of the timing tb6 and the timing tb7. In other words, when the winning to the 10th through gate 858 and the 11th through gate 859 is generated, the number of pending information corresponding to the winning amount is acquired, and the winning lottery on the normal side is the winning amount (for 2 pieces). will be

When the general pattern game started at timing tb5 ends at timing tb8, the next general pattern game is started at the timing tb8. In this case, it is a normal game that is started in a situation where there are four pieces of hold information, and the variable display time is set to 0.01 sec, which is the fourth time. Therefore, the normal game ends at timing tb9 after 0.02 sec. That is, in a very short period from timing tb8, it becomes the digestion timing of the next pending information, and the next normal game is started at timing tb9. As a result, at timing tb8, there are three pieces of pending information, and at timing tb9, there are two pieces of pending information. The general pattern game started at timing tb9 is a general pattern game started in a situation where there are three pending information, and the general pattern game ends at timing tb12 after 0.3 sec.

Winning to the tenth through gate 858 occurs at timing tb10, followed by winning to the eleventh through gate 859 at timing tb11. In this case, since there are two vacancies in the storage area on the general/universal map side, the hold information is obtained with the winning of timing tb10 and timing tb11. In other words, when the winning to the 10th through gate 858 and the 11th through gate 859 is generated, the number of pending information corresponding to the winning amount is acquired, and the winning lottery on the normal side is the winning amount (for 2 pieces). will be

The general pattern game started at timing tb9 ends at timing tb12, and the next general pattern game is started at the same timing. And, immediately after that, the next normal game is started again at timing tb13. Then, at the timing tb14 and the timing tb15, when the winning to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 occurs, the holding information corresponding to the winning is acquired.

A normal game next to the normal game started at timing tb13 is started at timing tb16, and the next normal game is started at timing tb17, which is immediately after that. Then, at the timing tb18 and the timing tb19, when the winning to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 occurs, the holding information corresponding to the winning is acquired.

That is, in the second state, if the hold information on the general map side is acquired periodically, timing tb1 (timing tb2), timing tb3 (timing tb4), timing tb6 (timing tb7), timing tb10 (timing tb11), timing tb14 (timing tb15), and timing tb18 (timing tb19), when a prize is won in the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859, a state is entered in which pending information for the prize is acquired. . In other words, it will be in a state where the winning lottery for the same number of normal figures as the winning prize is performed. Here, because the acquisition of the reservation information for two pieces is made, and the success or failure lottery for the two pieces of normal drawing is performed, the state is also called the double lottery state. That is, it can be said that the second state is a state where the double lottery state is likely to occur.

The game flow of this modified example will be described with reference to FIG.

When the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left route and a prize is awarded to the first operating port 62, a winning lottery on the side of the special figure is performed. When the winning lottery on the special figure side results in a jackpot result (1/200), the opening and closing execution mode of 16 rounds is performed by the fourth variable prize winning device 900, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. In the drawing, the fourth variable winning device 900 is shown as an attacker.

When the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left route, winning to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 occurs. In the drawing, the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 are shown as continuous through.

In the case where consecutive through winnings occur, in the first state, the normal pattern game is executed with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the first state. In this case, it is easy to become a single lottery state as described above, and in the single lottery state, one normal drawing lottery is performed for one continuous through winning. In other words, the probability of an open result in a normal drawing lottery based on one continuous through prize is substantially 1/1000.

On the other hand, in the second state, the normal pattern game is executed with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation display time table for the second state. In this case, as described above, it is likely to be a double lottery state, and in the double lottery state, two normal drawing lotteries are performed for one continuous through winning prize. In other words, the probability of opening results in the normal drawing lottery based on 1 continuous through winning is substantially about 1/500 because it is 1/1000 in each normal drawing lottery.

When the open result is obtained in the normal drawing lottery, the third variable winning device 910 is opened. Then, when a V prize is generated in the third variable prize winning device 910, it becomes possible to shift to a 16-round opening/closing execution mode by the fourth variable prize winning device 900 (attacker).

Switching between the first state and the second state is performed according to the result of the win/fail lottery on the special figure side, and the first state is switched to the second state based on the big winning result. After that, the winning lottery on the special figure side is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times), thereby switching from the second state to the first state. In other words, when a big hit result is obtained in the lottery on the side of the special figure, not only can prize balls be obtained in the opening and closing execution mode of 16 rounds, but also the game can be played in a double lottery state in the second state, which is advantageous for the player. can be done. When a V prize is generated in the second state, the game moves to the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds, after which the game can be played again in the second state. In this case, the second state continues until the winning lottery on the special figure side is performed for the remaining number of times.

As described above, using the fact that the number of acquisitions of the general pattern reservation information changes depending on the number of free spaces in the storage area of the general pattern reservation information, it is possible to change the probability of the substantial general pattern lottery. Thus, it is possible to realize a novel game property of changing the actual probability of the normal pattern lottery without changing the probability of the actual normal pattern lottery.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the probability of an open result in the normal figure success or failure lottery is about 1/1, but it is not limited to this, and other probabilities may be used. However, it is necessary to increase the frequency of opening the electric accessory 66, and to make it easier to match the timing of the game ball reaching the specific area RA2 with the opening period of the electric accessory 66 in the process of changing the time differences A and B. Then, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the probability of an open result is higher than the probability of an unsuccessful result.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the width of the second actuation opening 63, in other words, the width of the receiving area RA1 when the electric accessory 66 is in the open state is about the size of one game ball. However, the size may be two or more. However, if the size is two or more, not only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 but also other game balls will easily enter the second operation opening 63, so the winning rate to the second operation opening 63 will be reduced. In terms of adjustment, it is preferable to configure as in each of the above embodiments.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the electric accessory 66 that opens and closes when the receiving member 245 advances and retreats back and forth is provided. . That is, as long as the degree of opening of the second operation port 63 can be changed, the configuration of the electric accessory is arbitrary.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the through gate 35 and the electric accessory 66 (second operating opening 63) are arranged vertically, but they may be arranged horizontally or obliquely. In short, it suffices if the through gate 35 is positioned upstream of the electric accessory 66 in the flow of game balls, and the direction of arrangement of these is arbitrary.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the game nails 69a to 69d are provided between the through gate 35 and the electric accessory 66, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 is guided to the electric accessory 66 (specific area RA2). Or, it is configured to inhibit game balls other than the game ball from moving toward the electric accessory 66 (specific area RA2). However, in order to stabilize the winning rate of the game ball to the second operation port 63, it is preferable to configure as in each of the above embodiments.

Further, the guide means does not necessarily need to be composed of game nails, and may be composed of, for example, a wall extending in the guide direction (one continuous wall or a plurality of intermittently arranged walls). This also applies to the blocking means. When the wall portion constitutes the guiding means, the surface (guiding surface) of the wall portion on the game ball flow path side may be flat. This makes it possible to smoothen the flow of the game ball until it reaches the specific area RA2, and promote stabilization of the time required for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 to reach the specific area RA2. In addition, at least one protruding portion projecting to the flow path side is provided on the surface on the flow path side, and a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball is provided. You may By adopting such a configuration, the arrangement area of the guidance means can be used not only as the guidance area, but also for the time required for the game ball to reach the specific area RA2, and the time required for the game ball to reach the specific area RA2. It can also be used as an adjustment area for adjusting momentum.

It should be noted that the guidance means does not necessarily have to be configured such that all game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 are directed toward the specific area RA2. The percentage of game balls is higher than the percentage of game balls that do not reach (in other words, when the electric accessory 66 is in the open state, the percentage of game balls that are not picked up It is sufficient if the configuration makes it easier for the game ball to head toward the specific area RA2 compared to the case where there is no such guiding means. In addition, regarding the inhibition means, it is not necessary to completely block the movement of game balls other than the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 toward the specific area RA2. For example, among the game balls picked up by the electric accessory 66 when the electric accessory 66 is in the open state, the ratio of the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 is higher than the ratio of the game balls that have not passed. It is sufficient if game balls other than the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 are less likely to face the specific area RA2 compared to the case where there is no inhibition means.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, in order to make it easier for the normal pattern retention memory number FN to be 4, the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to a longer period (10 sec) than normal (0.05 sec), so that the game ball is configured to lengthen the specific period from winning the through gate 35 to ending the support state of the electric accessory 66 corresponding to the winning, but instead of or in addition to this, The specific period may be lengthened by lengthening the stop display time.

In addition, instead of or in addition to the normal pattern fluctuation display time and the stop display time, at least one of the normal pattern opening period, the ending period, and the opening time of the electric accessory 66 is lengthened, thereby lengthening the specific period. may be However, under the configuration of lengthening the specific period in relation to the number of normal diagram pending storage FN, it is preferable to change the specific period by the normal diagram fluctuation display time and / or stop display time.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the specific period (10.5 sec) for changing from the first normal game state to the second normal game state is changed to the specific period (1.5 sec) for maintaining the second normal game state. 1 sec), they may be of the same duration, or may be reversed. In short, the former specific period can be of any length as long as it can change from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, and the latter can also maintain the second normal game state. can be of any length.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the electric accessory 66 is opened once in the supported state, but the electric accessory 66 may be opened multiple times in one supported state. However, under the configuration in which the number of transitions to the support state per unit time is large, as in each of the above embodiments, when the electric accessory 66 is opened multiple times in one support state, the rotation plate 243 and the receiver The number of displacements of the movable body such as the member 245 increases significantly, and wear due to sliding friction or the like tends to progress. In addition, under the condition that the specific period is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball, it becomes necessary to extremely shorten the opening time per time, and even if the second normal game state is reached, the second operation opening 63 is opened. It is assumed that game balls will not win prizes. Based on these, it is preferable to open once as in each of the above embodiments. Incidentally, in the configuration in which the electric accessory 66 is opened multiple times in one support state, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 is released after the first opening operation of the electric accessory 66 (preferably the first opening operation). and before the start of the second opening operation). Further, when the number of times of opening is three or more, it is not limited to the first time, and may be configured to reach after the second and subsequent opening operations are completed.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, a pass-through gate 35 is provided as an operation opening that triggers the start of the normal game, but the operation opening does not necessarily have to be a passage type, and the operation opening A winning game ball may continue to flow down the game area PE. At that time, when the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can reach the electric accessory 66, the game ball reaches the electric accessory 66 through the ball passage provided inside or on the back side of the game board 60. It should be configured to

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, up to four pieces of pending information based on winnings to the through gate 35 are stored. good too. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the upper limit storage number of pending information based on winning to the through gate 35 and each of the operation ports 62 to 64 is different.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the shot ball can enter the through gate 35 without passing through the guide section 77. It may be configured to receive guidance from the portion 77 . Further, in the configuration in which the game ball is guided to the through gate 35 by the guiding portion 77, it is preferable that the shot game ball can reach the guiding portion 77 directly without coming into contact with the game nail. This is because, if the configuration is such that both the case where the game nail contacts and the case where the game nail does not contact, there is a risk that the guidance will be adversely affected due to the difference in momentum of the game ball.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device is opened only once when switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result, but it is opened multiple times in one opening/closing execution mode. may be configured. Further, in the third embodiment, the number of times of opening may be different between the opening execution mode corresponding to the advantageous special winning result and the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the disadvantageous special winning result. Further, the number of times of opening may differ depending on the type of advantageous special winning result (for example, advantageous special winning result A and advantageous special winning result B). The same applies to the case where a plurality of types of disadvantageous special winning results are provided.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, the difficulty of winning a game ball to the second operation opening 63 is reduced when the number FN of the normal pattern reserved memory becomes a predetermined number or more, and it is configured to make it easier to win. For example, when the general pattern holding storage number FN is less than a predetermined number (for example, 0), the opening period of the electric accessory 66 and the arrival timing of the game ball to the specific area RA2 are matched, When the normal pattern reservation memory number FN becomes a predetermined number or more, the winning difficulty of the game ball to the second operation opening 63 increases, and it may be configured to make it difficult to win. In such a configuration, the general pattern reserved memory number FN is easy to accumulate at normal times, and the general pattern reserved memory number FN does not accumulate or is difficult to accumulate in a specific case.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the winning rate of the game ball passing through the through gate 35 to the second operation port 63 changes when the number FN of the normal pattern reserved memory becomes a predetermined number or more. Alternatively, the winning rate of game balls other than the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 into the second operation opening 63 may be changed.

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the general pattern holding memory number FN becomes a predetermined number or more, a privilege (for example, a game ball payout) is easily obtained, but for example, a game ball for one winning It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the privilege is advantageous, such as an increase in the number of payouts.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the time period from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 until it reaches the specific area RA2 is defined as the winning interval of the game ball to the through gate 35 (game ball launch cycle). By setting the time to 0.6 sec, which is the same as , the game ball passing through the through gate 35 reaches the specific area RA2 after the electric accessory 66 is closed. The period may be longer than the winning interval. For example, as shown in FIG. 91(a), if the required period is 1.0 sec, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 will reach the specific area RA2 earlier than the next opening timing (timing t1A) of the electric accessory 66. , and the game ball does not enter the second operation opening 63 not only during the opening period of [1] corresponding to the above passage but also during the opening period of [2] next to it.

However, if the required period is the same as the prize winning interval as in the first embodiment, or if the predetermined period is shorter than the prize winning interval, as shown in FIG. During the period from t2A to the next passage timing t2B, the arrival of the game ball related to the previous passage to the specific area RA2 is completed. In this case, it is sufficient to consider the range X from the timing t2A to the timing t2B when adjusting the presence or absence of the winning of the second operation opening 63 at the time of design. That is, it is possible to reduce the design load without considering the game ball that has passed before or the game ball that will pass next. Considering this point, the required period is less than the winning interval, and the game ball related to the previous passage reaches the electric accessory 66 after the support state corresponding to the previous passage ends and before the next passage occurs. It is preferable to set it as the structure which carries out.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the operation ports 62 to 64, the through gate 35, the electric accessory 66, the receiving area RA1 and the specific area RA2 are provided in the game area PE, but at least one of them is For example, it may be provided in a region different from the game region PE, such as inside a predetermined accessory device.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the notification/production control device 143 and the display control device 660 are provided separately, but one control device that integrates the functions of these control devices 143 and 660 may be provided. .

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball passing through the through gate 35 can also enter the first operating port 62, and the winning route to the through gate 35 and the winning route to the first operating port 62 are shared. However, these routes may be configured independently. However, in the configuration in which both routes are made independent, when trying to ensure a certain degree of winning rate to the first operating port 62, the winning rate to the through gate 35 must be lowered to earn the winning rate. Considering this point, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above-described embodiment. This also applies to other embodiments in which the above routes are shared.

(20) In the above-described first embodiment, the first working port 62 and the second working port 63 are provided as working ports corresponding to the first special design. The number of operating ports corresponding to the drawing may be one.

(21) In the first embodiment, the third operating port 64 is arranged above (upstream side) the variable winning device 65, but the former may be arranged below (downstream side) the latter. According to such a configuration, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the variable winning device 65 does not win due to the game ball winning the third operation opening 64 .

(22) In the first embodiment, in order to lengthen the normal pattern fluctuation display time in accordance with the increase in the normal pattern reserved memory number FN, the normal pattern when the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is 4 The fluctuation display time is uniformly set to 0.6 sec, but the average (expected value) of the normal pattern fluctuation display time in this case is less than the normal pattern retention memory number FN = 4. If it becomes longer, it may be configured to diversify by providing a plurality of normal pattern fluctuation display times of different lengths. This also applies to other embodiments. Here, the average (expected value) is obtained when the number of types of variable display time that can be set is N, the length of each variable display time is M, and the setting probability (selection probability) of each variable display time is K. , M(1)*K(1)+M(2)*K(2)+ . . . M(N)*K(N).

In addition, in the first embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation display time when the normal pattern pending memory number FN is 4 is set longer than that when the normal pattern memory number FN is 1 to 3. However, it may be longer than one of the cases of 1 to 3, or the normal pattern fluctuation display time may be longer as the number of memories FN increases. This also applies to other embodiments.

(23) In the above-described first embodiment, it is not limited to the case where the normal pattern reserved storage number FN is 4, but it may be configured such that the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to 0.6 sec even in the case of 3. . As a result, even if the shot game ball does not enter the through gate 35 under the second normal game state, it is possible to remedy the situation. In addition, when the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is 3, it is shorter than 0.6 sec and longer than 0.05 sec so that the maintenance rate of the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is inferior to the case of 4. It may be time. By adopting such a configuration, it is expected that the player will concentrate on the game in order to avoid the occurrence of non-winning of the through gate 35 .

(24) In the above second embodiment, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to the special time (200 sec), the second normal game state continues uniformly. The presence or absence of continuation and the easiness of continuation may be changed depending on the length of the variable display time of the figure game round. For example, a variable display time of Asec and a longer variable display time of Bsec are provided as the variable display time of the special game times. Then, when the execution period (or expected period) of the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is Ysec, a specific period (after the game ball wins the through gate 35, the electric accessory 66 corresponding to the win The special time is set so that the period until the end of the support state) is longer than Asec+Ysec and shorter than Bsec+Ysec. In this case, when the variable display time of the special game round is set to Asec, the second normal game state continues (easily continues), while when set to Bsec, it does not continue (or it becomes difficult to continue) ). In this way, as a result of the ease of continuity of the second normal game state changing depending on the length of the fluctuation display time on the special figure side, not only the fluctuation display time on the normal figure side but also the fluctuation display time on the special figure side The attention of the player can be directed, and the attention to the game can be further increased.

(25) In the above-described second embodiment, only when the normal pattern pending memory number FN is 4, the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the special time (200 sec) can be set (Fig. 37 (See step S2106), a configuration may be adopted in which the special time can be set when the number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, one) less than four. In other words, when the 5R normal jackpot result B is won under the second normal game state, the normal pattern fluctuation display time may be set to the special time.

(26) In the second embodiment, only when the first special figure results in a big hit, the normal figure fluctuation display time of the special time (200 sec) can be set, but the second special figure The above special time may be set even when a big hit result is obtained.

(27) In the above second embodiment, the winning difficulty of the game ball to the second operation opening 63 is reversed between the second normal game state (medium frequency support mode) and the advantageous game state (high frequency support mode). may be the same, or may be the same.

(28) In the third embodiment, the advantageous game state (high frequency support mode) may be omitted. In this case, the game state in which the V jackpot can be expected to be won may be the second normal game state only, or the second operation port 63 may be less difficult to win, and the advantageous game state may be provided. may be configured to have a different special game state separately from the second normal game state. In the configuration with a special game state, the special game state is triggered by the occurrence of an event other than the normal figure holding memory number FN becoming a predetermined number or more and winning a jackpot in the special figure lottery. It is preferable to adopt a configuration for migration. The winning difficulty of the game ball into the second operation opening 63 in the special game state may be different from or the same as that in the second normal game state.

(29) In the above-described third embodiment, reverse the winning difficulty of the game ball into the second operation opening 63 between the second normal game state (winning support state) and the advantageous game state (high-frequency support mode). may be the same, or they may be the same.

(30) In the above-described third embodiment, after entering the second normal game state, it is configured to continue until the normal pattern reserved memory number FN becomes 0, but the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is It may be configured such that the second normal game state ends when one, two or three pieces are reached. For example, in the configuration in which the second normal game state ends when the number of normal-pattern reserved memories FN becomes 1, a specific period when the number of normal-pattern reserved memories FN is 1 (the game ball wins the through gate 35 The period from when the electric accessory 66 corresponding to the winning is completed until the support state of the electric accessory 66 corresponding to the winning is significantly shorter than the winning interval of the game ball to the through gate 35 (the game ball launch cycle) (for example, Set the normal figure fluctuation display time and the stop display time so that the specific period is 0.2 sec). In this case, it becomes impossible or difficult to repeat the normal game while maintaining the number FN of memory 1, and after all, the number FN of memory immediately becomes 0 and substantially the second normal game state. can be terminated. Note that this also applies to other embodiments.

(31) In the above-described third embodiment, the specific period in the case where the number of normal-pattern pending memories FN is 4 is set shorter than the winning interval of the game ball to the through gate 35 (game ball launch cycle). Although the second normal game state is temporary, the second normal game state may be continued until the jackpot is won, as in the first embodiment. Conversely, in the above-described first and second embodiments, the second normal game state may be temporary as in the third embodiment.

(32) In the third embodiment, based on the winning of the second operation port 63 (second special figure), the retention information is stored up to a predetermined number (four) as an upper limit. , may be configured such that the hold information is not stored. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the configuration.

(33) In the above-described third embodiment, the configuration is such that the second normal game state is entered when the normal pattern reserved memory number FN becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number. , It may be configured to enter the second normal game state when another index value different from the number FN of the normal pattern reserved memory becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number. For example, the number of points may be obtained based on the winning of the through gate 35, and the second normal game state may be established when the accumulated value of the points reaches a predetermined number. In that case, the number of acquired points and the accumulated number may be notified each time so that the player can grasp the index value, or the number of points and the accumulated number may not be notified, and the fun of guessing them may be added. Alternatively, a sudden feeling may be created when the second normal game state occurs. At this time, it may be configured such that the general pattern reservation information is not stored. This also applies to other embodiments.

(34) In the third embodiment, the special effect displays S1 to S6 are displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 as various notification effects related to the second normal game state. Alternatively, another display device may be provided, and each of the special effect displays S1 to S6 may be displayed on the display screen of the other display device. In addition, it may be configured to display on both the pattern display device 75 and the other display device, or to display on both of them. In this case, all of the special effect displays S1 to S6 may be displayed on the other display device, or some of the special effect displays S1 to S6 may be displayed on the other display device. At that time, in order to suppress the player's attention and interest in the symbol row on the display screen 75a, the display screen of the other display device may be made smaller than the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, It is preferable to arrange the display screen 75a at a position farther from the center of the front surface of the game board 60 than the display screen 75a. However, when compared with the main display section 43, it is preferable to enlarge the display area or arrange it at a position close to the center of the front surface of the game board 60. FIG. In addition, various notification effects related to the second normal game state are not necessarily limited to displaying an image (still image or moving image) on the display screen, even if they use a light emitting effect device such as an illumination member good. Furthermore, it does not necessarily have to be visual, and may be auditory using sound, for example.

(35) In the third embodiment, the third special effect display is common regardless of whether the second variable winning device 500 is controlled to open or close in either the low distribution mode or the high distribution mode. Although S3-A is displayed, the aspect of the display effect may be changed according to the aspect of the opening/closing control of the second variable winning device 500. FIG. For example, as the third special effect display S3-A, a first notification and a second notification with different character colors in the character display 526 are provided, and when the second variable winning device 500 is controlled to open and close in a low allocation mode It is preferable that the first notification is easily displayed, and the second notification is easily displayed when the opening/closing control is performed in the high allocation mode. This makes it possible for the player to suggest the mode of opening/closing control of the second variable prize winning device 500 when aiming for the V prize.

(36) In the above-described third embodiment, it may be configured to change the distribution mode (likelihood of V winning) of the second variable winning device 500 based on the number FN of reserved storage of normal patterns. For example, when the number of normal-pattern pending memories FN is 4, the second variable winning device 500 is controlled to open and close in a low allocation mode (or becomes easier), and when the number of memories FN is 3, a high allocation mode It is preferable to have a configuration in which opening and closing are controlled (or easily controlled) by As a result, it is possible to more closely associate the general pattern reserved memory number FN and the likelihood of V winning, and the player's interest in the winning of the game ball to the through gate 35 and the general pattern reserved memory number F is preferably can be increased.

(37) In the above-described third embodiment, the operation of the shutter 508 in the second variable prize winning device 500 determines the degree of advantage, such as whether or not a V prize is generated. High and low advantages may be realized. For example, when the accessory is provided upstream of the second variable winning device 500 in the game area PE and the accessory is placed at the first position, the game ball is guided to the second variable winning device 500. However, when arranged at a second position different from the first position, the configuration is such that the game ball is not guided to the second variable winning device 500 or is difficult to be guided. Then, the action of the accessory is started from the timing of the stop display in the game round, and the timing at which the accessory is placed at the first position is when the second variable winning device 500 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode. The time from the start timing of the stop display to the opening timing of the second variable winning device 500 is adjusted so that the timing may or may not overlap.

(38) In the above fourth embodiment, if a big hit result is obtained in the lottery on the side of the first special figure, or if a big hit result is A in the lottery on the side of the second special figure, the upper Although the large prize winning port 710a is configured to be in the open state, for example, whether the upper large prize winning port 710a is in the open state or the lower large prize winning port 700a is in the open state is determined for each open/close execution mode or each round. It is good also as a structure which determines by lottery etc. In this case, the probability that the upper big winning opening 710a is selected in the case of a big hit result in the first special figure side lottery and the case of a big win result in the second special figure side lottery. (Probability of selecting the lower prize winning opening 700a) may be configured differently, and if a big hit result is obtained in the winning lottery on the second special figure side, the big winning result in the winning lottery on the first special figure side A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of selecting the upper special winning opening 710a is lower than in the case of . Also, on the contrary, in the case of a big hit result in the winning lottery on the side of the second special figure, the upper big winning opening 710a is selected rather than in the case of a big winning result in the winning lottery on the side of the first special figure. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of

Instead of or in addition to these, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of selecting the upper big winning opening 710a differs depending on the type of the jackpot result. For example, the 16R probability variable jackpot result may be such that the upper big winning opening 710a is selected or is likely to be selected.

(39) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the easy winning state results in an advantageous state in which the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special winning can be frequently executed, and the upper big winning opening 710a is opened. Although the advantageous state is terminated, the configuration for terminating the easy winning state may be applied to the configuration of another embodiment.

(40) In the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the upper opening/closing door 710b is configured to be displaced between the closed state in which it is parallel to the front surface of the game board 60 and the open state in which it stands upright relative to the game board 60. As a premise, the configuration is such that the winning rate to the through gate 35 is changed, but the opening/closing mode of the upper variable winning device 710 is not limited to the above. For example, the upper variable prize winning device 710 is composed of a so-called electric tulip type opening and closing accessory that opens and closes wings, and opening the wings reduces the winning rate to the through gate 35, and closing the wings reduces the winning rate to the through gate 35. The configuration may be such that the winning rate to the gate 35 is improved.

(41) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the upper large prize winning opening 710a is opened when the big winning result is obtained, but the upper special winning opening 710a is opened when the special winning result is obtained. may be configured. In this case, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the special winning result, the upper limit opening period is set to 1.8 sec, and even if the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened in the opening/closing execution mode, the easy winning state can continue. However, the general pattern pending memory number FN becomes less than 4, which is the upper limit, and the game round on the general pattern side can be started in a situation where the number of memories is less than the upper limit number. Therefore, the winning easy state will end after a while (the normal pattern pending memory number FN gradually decreases). By doing so, it is possible to limit the period in which the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special win can be performed, and realize the above-mentioned innovative game characteristics while suppressing an increase in the ball output rate. becomes possible.

Further, in this case, the timing at which the opening/closing execution mode is executed based on the result of the special win can also be involved in the continuity of the easy winning state. For example, in the easy-to-win state, the winning to the through gate 35 occurs immediately after the game round on the normal side is started, and if the upper large winning opening 710a is opened, the next normal game round is on. Although it is started while the large winning prize port 710a is in the open state, the game round is started in the situation where the reservation information is the upper limit number, and the next normal game round is the upper large winning prize port 710a Closed state. It will be started after Therefore, in this case, there is room for replenishing the reserved information on the general-purpose drawing side after the upper grand prize-winning port 710a is closed, and it is possible to continue the easy-to-win state (the upper limit number may be reached again). can).

Furthermore, it is sufficient if the opening and closing execution mode based on the special winning result can be implemented in the winning lottery on the second special figure side, even if the big winning result is not provided as the result of the winning lottery on the second special figure side. good. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery on the side of the second special figure, instead of or in addition to the special winning result, a big winning result in which a small number of round games (for example, two times) are performed is provided, and an easy winning state is established. Therefore, the small number of round games may be played frequently. In this case, as a result of playing a small number of round games, for example, winning 198/200, and as a result of playing more round games than the result, winning may be, for example, 1/200. In this case, the remaining 1/200 should be taken as an outlier.

(42) In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the final round is set as a branching round in which the upper special winning opening 710a is opened or the lower special winning opening 700a is opened. However, another round in the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result may be the branch round. For example, the first round (first round) may be a branching round, or an intermediate round may be a branching round. Further, it may be configured such that in which round the branching round is executed differs depending on the type of the jackpot result. Further, which round is to be the branching round, or the number of rounds to be the branching round may be determined by lottery or the like.

(43) In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the first special round effect or the second special round effect is executed in the branch round. A configuration may be adopted in which a special round effect (blessing effect) is executed. In this case, it is possible to make it seem as if the branching round exists in a round different from the final round.

(44) In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the first special round effect and the second special round effect are executed in the branch round. , the first special round effect or the second special round effect may be started, and it may be possible to determine which round effect will be performed in the branch round. Also, while the first special round effect and the second special round effect are executed during the round game of the branching round, the first special round effect and the second special round effect are executed including the interval period before or after the branching round. It is good also as composition which performs production.

(45) Needless to say, the first special round effect, the second special round effect, the normal round effect, and the special winning round effect in the first modification of the fourth embodiment are not limited to the above. .

(46) In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, switching of the normal pattern fluctuation display time table occurs based on the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, and the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern game round is changed. Although it is configured to be different from the fluctuation display time up to, a specific normal pattern fluctuation display time is set when it is simply in the open/close execution mode without causing switching of the normal pattern fluctuation display time table. A processing configuration (a processing configuration in which the variable display time is set without referring to the variable display time table) may be used.

(47) In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time that is started in a situation where the normal pattern reservation storage number FN is the upper limit number, the upper big winning opening 710a is opened The variable display time that can be longer than the shortest duration of the normal pattern game time can be selected. As a configuration in which a longer variable display time can be selected as compared with , a configuration in which the easy winning state can be continued even when the upper special winning opening 710a is opened may be employed.

(48) In the second and third modifications of the fourth embodiment, the total period of the period in which the upper prize winning opening 710a is open and the interval period is fixed. However, in the round game in which the upper special winning opening 710a is opened, the length of the interval period may be set according to the period during which the upper special winning opening 710a is in the open state. In this case, it is preferable that the interval period is longer as the upper big winning opening 710a is closed earlier, and the interval period is set to the extent that the reservation information on the general map side can be supplemented in the interval period. A configuration that can be

(49) In the second and third modifications of the fourth embodiment, the interval period is changed according to the length of the round game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the length of the interval period is not changed after setting the interval period to the extent that it can be performed.

(50) In the battle production of the third modified example of the fourth embodiment, 10 enemy characters are knocked down each time one ball enters the grand prize-winning opening 710a. A configuration in which the number of enemy characters is different may be adopted. In this case, it is preferable to adjust the number of enemy characters to be defeated based on the winnings up to that point so that the enemy characters are annihilated when the maximum number of winnings is won. For example, as a predetermined number of winnings, 55 enemy characters are defeated at the time of the first time winning (when the first ball wins), but at the time of subsequent winnings, 5 enemy characters are defeated as a smaller number. good too.

Further, the number of enemy characters to be defeated may be set according to the remaining time of the prize winning assistance duration at the time of winning to the upper prize winning opening 710a. For example, in a situation where the remaining time of the winning assistance duration is long, many enemy characters will be defeated, but in a situation where the remaining time is short, a small number of enemy characters will be defeated. good.

Also, the number of enemy characters to be defeated may be set based on the remaining time of the prize-winning assistance duration at the time of winning the prize in the upper grand prize-winning port 710a and the number of prizes won in the current round game. For example, if the remaining time of the winning assistance duration is shorter than the product of the remaining number up to the upper limit winning number and the firing cycle, the winning assistance duration will be 0 by the end of the round game. The configuration may be such that the enemy character is defeated, or even if the player wins the prize, the enemy character cannot be defeated.

(51) In the battle effect of the third modification of the fourth embodiment, if the remaining time of the winning assistance duration is shorter than the product of the remaining number up to the upper limit winning number and the firing cycle, the winning assistance A defeat effect may be set by setting the number of colored heart marks in the HP display to 0 without waiting for the continuation time to elapse. In this case, for example, the enemy character's attack (damage imparting effect) may be a strong attack that is different from the normal attack, and a special move (jump + bite) may be performed against the main character. .

(52) In the battle effect of the third modified example of the fourth embodiment, after the start of the round game, until a predetermined period of time elapses, the winning assistance continuation time elapses, or the number of remaining prizes up to the maximum number of winning prizes is reached. Even in the case where the remaining time of the prize winning assistance duration is shorter than the product of . This is because if the defeat effect is generated too early after the start of the round, the player may lose interest in the round game.

(53) In the battle production of the third modification of the fourth embodiment, the number of enemy characters at the start is fixed, but the number of enemy characters at the start may be changed. For example, the number of enemy characters at the start of the round game may be changed according to the length of the winning assistance duration at the start of the round game. Specifically, the longer the prize-winning assistance continuation time at the start of the round game, the smaller the number of enemy characters at the start may be set.

(54) In the battle production of the third modified example of the fourth embodiment, strength may be set for the enemy characters to appear. For example, if the winning assistance duration time is short and there is a high possibility that the winning assistance duration time will be 0 by the end of the round game, even if a strong enemy character appears and wins are generated, it will not be defeated. good. Conversely, if the winning assistance duration time is long and there is a high possibility that the round game will end before the winning assistance duration time reaches 0, a weak enemy character is made to appear and a prize is generated. The number of defeated enemy characters may be increased.

(55) Needless to say, in the battle presentation of the third modification of the fourth embodiment, the main characters, enemy characters, number of enemies display, HP display, etc. are not limited to those described above.

(56) Like the third modification of the fourth embodiment, the winning timing to the through gate 53, the number of reserves on the normal side, the variable display time on the normal side, and the upper variable winning device 710 When a battle effect is performed in relation to the timing of winning a prize, the winning rate to the upper variable prize winning device 710 may be changed according to the shooting intensity of the game ball. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 92, when the game ball is shot so as to flow down the left route 1 and when it is shot so as to flow down the left route 2, the upward variable prize winning device You may set the arrangement|positioning of the upper variable winning device 710, the through gate 35, and the electric accessory 66 so that the arrival rate to 710 may differ. More specifically, in a situation where the upper variable winning device 710 is in the open state, the winning rate to the upper variable winning device 710 when the left route 1 is caused to flow down by shooting the game ball with the first firing intensity and the winning rate to the upper variable winning device 710 when the left route 2 is caused to flow down by shooting the game ball with a second firing intensity different from (stronger than) the first firing intensity. The arrangement (gauge configuration) of the upper variable winning device 710, the nail 69, etc. may be set differently (the left route 1 has a higher winning rate than the left route 2). By doing so, in order to win in the above-described battle presentation, game characteristics such as adjusting the firing intensity so as to increase the winning rate to the upper variable prize winning device 710 are clarified, and interest is enhanced.

(57) As in the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment, in the case where the game ball can pass between the through gate 35 and the upper variable winning device 710, the upper variable winning device 710 The nail 69 or the like may be arranged so that the game ball does not reach the through gate 35 without passing through the provided position. In this case, when the upper opening/closing door 710b of the upper variable prize winning device 710 is in the open state, entry into the through gate 35 without colliding with the upper opening/closing door 710b is restricted. In other words, when the upper opening/closing door 710b is in an open state, only game balls falling from the upper opening/closing door 710b can enter the through gate 35 instead of the upper special winning opening 710a. By doing so, it is possible to minimize the winning while allowing the winning to the through gate 35 in the state that the upper variable winning device 710 is in the open state, and the easy winning state. can be made easier to terminate.

(58) As in the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment, even if the upper variable prize winning device 710 is in the open state, there is still room for the through gate 35 to win. The positional relationship between the variable winning device 710 and the through gate 35, the presence or absence of the guide nail groups 69g and 69h, and their arrangement are not limited to those described above.

(59) In the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment, most of the game balls that reach the upper variable winning device 710 when the upper big winning hole 710a is in the open state go to the upper big winning hole 710a. A part of the winning prizes falls from the upper opening/closing door 710b and enters the through gate 35, but the ratio of winning to the upper big winning port 710a and the through gate 35 is not limited to the above. For example, most of the prizes may be awarded to the through gate 35, and some of them may be awarded to the upper grand prize winning port 710a. By lowering the winning ratio to the upper big winning opening 710a, it is possible to make it difficult to end the easy winning state and to enjoy one round game for a long time. In this case, since the winning ratio to the big winning hole 710a is reduced, the number of shot balls until the end of the opening/closing execution mode increases, and the balls held after the opening/closing execution mode do not lower the winning ratio of the big winning hole 710a. may also be less. However, since the easy-to-win state is maintained by lowering the winning percentage, it is considered that the player feels favorable from this point of view. Therefore, even if the number of held balls which increases substantially in the open/close execution mode is reduced, no inconvenience will occur.

In addition, if the winning ratio to the upper special winning opening 710a and the through gate 35 is made equal or substantially equal, the game ball reaching the upper variable winning device 710 when the upper special winning opening 710a is in an open state A game to enjoy which one wins is added, and it is possible to improve the playability.

(60) In the fourth modified example of the fourth embodiment, the position where the game balls flowing down from above are received when the upper opening/closing door 710b is in the open state (the upper opening/closing door 710b in the open state The upper surface of the game ball) is provided with a rolling portion that allows the game ball to roll, and the game ball that has reached the upper variable winning device 710 depending on the rolling mode of the rolling portion wins the upper large winning opening 710a or the through gate It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which whether or not to win a prize to 35 changes. By doing so, it is possible to make the behavior of the game ball more enjoyable.

(61) In the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment, depending on the timing of reaching the upper variable winning device 710 during the round game in which the upper big winning opening 710a is in the open state, the upper big winning opening 710a and the through A configuration in which the percentage of winnings to the gate 35 changes is also possible. For example, by changing the opening ratio (opening angle, displacement angle, displacement mode) of the upper opening and closing door 710b depending on the elapsed time from the start of the round game, the winning rate to the upper big winning opening 710a is changed, thereby reaching It is good also as composition which changes the prize-winning ratio of the game ball's upper large prize-winning mouth 710a and the through gate 35. FIG. More specifically, for example, until a predetermined timing after the start of the round game, it is easier to win the upper special winning opening 710a than the through gate 35, and after the predetermined timing, the through gate is more likely to win than the upper special winning opening 710a. 35 may be more likely to win a prize, or vice versa.

(62) Even if the configuration for changing the winning rate to the through gate 35 does not depend on the upper variable winning device 710 as in the fifth and sixth modifications of the fourth embodiment, When the winning rate to the through gate 35 decreases, the winning rate to other winning portions (for example, the general winning opening 61) may be improved. For example, in the fifth modified example, when the movable accessory 820 is displaced from the retracted state to the protruded state to restrict the winning of the through gate 35, the winning of the predetermined general winning opening 61 becomes easier, and the movable accessory By displacing the 820 from the protruded state to the retracted state, the winning to the through gate 35 is permitted, while the winning to the predetermined general winning port 61 may be restricted. Further, for example, in the sixth modification, the rotating body 800 is formed in an elliptical shape, and in a situation where the housing portion 810 of the rotating body 800 is arranged at a position facing upward and game balls are housed, the rotating body 800 A part of it is arranged at a position that becomes a barrier to entry into a predetermined general prize winning port 61, thereby restricting entry into the predetermined general prize winning port 61, and rotating body 800 rotates from a position where housing part 810 faces upward. As a result, a part of the rotating body may be arranged at a position that does not hinder entry into the predetermined general prize winning opening 61, thereby permitting entry into the predetermined general prize winning opening 61. .

(63) The shape, arrangement, displacement mode, etc. of the movable accessory 820 in the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment are not limited to those described above. For example, the movable accessory 820 is a distribution valve that can be moved left and right, and by operating in one direction, the winning of the through gate 35 is restricted, and by operating in the other direction, the winning of the through gate 35 is permitted. It is good also as a structure which comes to carry out.

(64) In the fifth and sixth modifications of the fourth embodiment, the movable accessory 820 and the rotating body 800 are configured to operate periodically, but the period is not limited to the above. . Specifically, it may be configured to operate at a cycle longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball. In addition, the timing for starting the cycle may be, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, may be the timing of starting the opening/closing execution mode, or may be the timing of starting the special game round or the normal game round. .

(65) In the fourth embodiment, in the case of arranging the upward variable winning device 710, the movable accessory 820, etc. on the upstream side of the through gate 35, at least part of the through gate 35 is the upward variable winning device 710. , movable accessory 820, etc., and when the upper variable winning device 710 is in an open state or when the movable accessory 820 is displaced to a protruding position, the winning rate to the through gate 35 is increased. Any configuration may be employed as long as it lowers, and a configuration in which a portion of the through gate 35 does not vertically overlap the upward variable winning device 710, the movable accessory 820, or the like may be used.

In addition, even if the through gate 35 does not vertically overlap the upper variable winning device 710, the movable accessory 820, etc., the movable accessory 820 is displaced to the projecting position when the upper variable winning device 710 is opened. By doing so, it is sufficient that a barrier to flow down to the through gate 35 is generated. For example, when the upper variable prize winning device 710 is a so-called electric tulip-type accessory in which a laterally displaceable wing member is opened and closed, the wing member displaces in the lateral direction and the winning to the upper special prize opening 710a is possible. In an easy situation, when the laterally displaced wing member and the through gate 35 are vertically overlapped, and the wing member is displaced in the opposite direction to limit the prize winning to the upper special prize opening 710a. , the wing member and the through gate 35 may not be vertically overlapped.

(66) In the above-described fourth embodiment, after arranging the upper variable prize winning device 710, the movable accessory 820, etc. on the upstream side of the through gate 35, when the upper variable prize winning device 710 is in the open state or the movable When the accessory 820 is displaced to the projecting position, the winning rate to the through gate 35 is reduced. The positional relationship between the through gate 35, the upward variable winning device 710, and the movable accessory 820 is not limited to the above. For example, an accessory that operates in conjunction with the opening and closing operation of the upper opening and closing door 710b of the upper variable winning device 710 and the front and back operation of the movable accessory 820 is provided, and when the upper opening and closing door 710b is displaced to the open state and the movable accessory 820 The accessory may act as a barrier to entry into the through gate 35 when the is displaced to the projecting position. In this case, the upper variable winning device 710 and the movable accessory 820 may not be arranged on the upstream side of the through gate 35 .

(67) In the fourth embodiment, the upper variable winning device 710 is opened so that the winning rate of the through gate 35 is lowered. As a result, the winning rate to the through gate 35 may be improved, and the winning rate to the through gate 35 may be lowered by closing the upper variable winning device 710 . In this case, it is possible to realize a new game property such that a transition to an easy winning state can be achieved by executing a round game by the upper variable winning device 710 .

(68) In the fifth embodiment, the position of the second through gate 850 is not limited to the downstream side of the through gate 35 or the electric accessory 66, or the upper side of the through gate 35. good too. For example, it may be placed at a position (on the right side of the variable display unit 67) where game balls flowing down the right route can win.

(69) In the fifth embodiment, a plurality of second through gates 850 are provided, and the normal game is executed during the execution of the normal game based on the winning of one of the second through gates 850 Each second through-gate 850 may be arranged so that a game ball different from the game ball that triggered the game can enter another second through-gate 850 . By doing so, depending on the behavior of the game ball flowing down, there may be a case where the winning to one second through gate 850 and the winning to the other second through gate 850 are consecutive, and the continuous winning It is possible to increase the number of normal pattern reservation storage FN. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of winning the second operation opening 63 and the chances of transitioning to the winning easy state.

(70) In the fifth embodiment, the second thru gate 850 is provided at a position through which game balls that have passed through the thru gate 35 always pass, or at a position through which most of the game balls that have passed through the thru gate 35 pass. may be configured. By doing so, the chances of the general pattern reserved memory number FN becoming 1 or more increase, and it becomes possible to easily generate the winning to the second operation opening 63 and the transition to the winning easy state.

(71) In the above fifth embodiment, in the case of providing through gates that can continuously win prizes, the interval between the plurality of through gates may be set to the interval at which game balls flow down for a longer time than the cycle of the normal game. good. In this case, at intervals of a plurality of through gates, it is configured that the time required for flowing down can be changed by nails 69, etc., and when the game ball flows down in a time longer than the cycle of the normal game, and the cycle of the normal game A configuration may be adopted in which the game ball may flow down in a short time.

(72) In the above fifth embodiment, the second through gate 850 may be provided between the through gate 35 and the electric accessory 66 .

(73) In the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the first route R1 for obtaining one normal map reservation information and the second route R2 for obtaining two normal map reservation information. Although it was set as the structure distributed by the valve 867, the number of normal map reservation information acquired by being distributed to each route is not limited to these. For example, it may be configured to be distributed to a route in which one general map reservation information is acquired and a route in which three or more general map reservation information is acquired, and the number of general map reservation information acquired by the route to be distributed is Any configuration that can be different is acceptable.

(74) In the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the distribution valve 867 is configured to distribute to two routes, but it may be configured to distribute to more routes than this. For example, in addition to the route where one normal map reservation information is acquired and the route where two normal map reservation information is acquired, it may be configured to be able to be distributed to the route where three normal map reservation information is acquired. . Also, in the case of a configuration that is distributed to three or more routes, the number of general map reservation information acquired by each route may be different, or the same number of general map reservation information is acquired for each route It may be a configuration in which there is a route to be set.

(75) In the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the distribution ratio between the first route R1 and the second route R2 is not limited to the above. The configuration may be such that the second route R2 is easier to sort than the first route R1.

(76) As in the first modification of the fifth embodiment, in a configuration in which the number of normal map reservation information acquired varies depending on the distribution of the distribution valve 867, the distribution valve 867 Although the distribution mode (operation mode) is cyclical, the distribution mode (operation mode) is changed according to the game state (game situation) instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the periodic motion is always performed. may be configured. That is, the first game state in which the distribution control of the distribution valve 867 is performed so that the distribution rate to the first route R1 (second route R2) becomes the first rate, and the first route R1 (second route R2 ) and a second game state in which the distribution control of the distribution valve 867 is performed so that the distribution rate is a second rate different from the first rate, and these first games based on the establishment of a predetermined condition It is the structure which performs transition with a state and a 2nd game state. Specifically, as the first game state, for example, in the normal game state, the distribution control of the distribution valve 867 is executed so that the distribution to the first route R1 is easier than the second route R2, and the second game state is performed. As a state, for example, in the open/close execution mode, the distribution control of the distribution valve 867 may be executed so that the distribution to the second route R2 is more likely than that to the first route R1.

(77) In the first modified example of the fifth embodiment, the electric accessory 870 is provided in which both the game ball that has flowed down the first route R1 and the game ball that has flowed down the second route R2 can win a prize. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an electric accessary is individually provided for each of the routes R1 and R2.

In addition, although the electric accessory is provided on one route, the electric accessory is not provided on the other route, that is, the game ball that has flowed down one route can enter and has flowed down the other route. A game ball may be configured to provide an electric accessory that makes it impossible to enter the game ball. In this case, it is preferable to provide an electric accessory so that the game ball that has flowed down the easy-to-distribute route (the first route R1 in the above embodiment) can enter.

(78) In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the position where the rolling part 880 is provided may be, for example, a position adjacent to the display screen 75a. The player is usually expected to enjoy the outcome of the game with the display effects on the display screen 75a, but the structure allows the player to check the rolling surface 881 of the rolling part 880 without moving the line of sight of the player so much. By doing so, it is possible to fully enjoy the appearance of the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 881 together with the display effect. As a place adjacent to the display screen 75a, for example, if the display screen 75a is positioned below, to the right or to the left of the display screen 75a, lead-out passages 891 to 893 through which the game balls falling from the drop openings 882 to 884 of the rolling surface 881 pass are arranged. In doing so, the display screen 75a is preferable because it does not hinder the arrangement.

(79) In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, as in the other modifications, the number of through gates provided in each of the lead-out passages 891 to 893 (the number of acquisitions of the normal figure reserved storage number FN) is Not limited to the above. Also, the number of lead-out passages 891 to 893 and the ratio of lead-out to any lead-out passages 891 to 893 are not limited to those described above, as in the other modifications.

(80) In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the electric accessory 66 may be provided at a position led out from the lead-out passages 891-893. In this case, the electric accessory 66 may be provided in each of the lead-out passages 891 to 893, or a game ball drawn out from any of the lead-out passages 891 to 893 can enter as in the first modification. A configuration in which one electric accessory is provided may be employed.

(81) In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the rolling portion 880 is configured to be led out from the passage area through which the game ball flowing down the left route passes, but the entrance of the passage area is It is not limited to the left route, and other positions may be used. Also, the game ball flowing down the game area PE may reach the rolling part 880 as it is without going through the passing area.

(82) In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the rolling part 880 for leading the game balls to the lead-out passages 891-893 is not limited to the above. For example, the rolling surface 881 may be of a movable configuration instead of a fixed one, and may be configured to move left and right or back and forth like waves to change the behavior of the game ball. In addition, instead of a configuration that allows the drop from the same rolling surface 881 to all the drop ports 882 to 884, a configuration having a plurality of rolling surfaces is arranged so that each rolling surface has a step, and these multiple It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which drop ports 882 to 884 are provided on the rolling surfaces of the rollers. More specifically, for example, a first drop port 882 is provided on the first rolling surface, a second drop port 883 is provided on the second rolling surface, and a third drop port 884 is provided on the third rolling surface. is provided, and steps are provided on the first to third rolling surfaces so that the game ball can fall down in the order of the first rolling surface → the second rolling surface → the third rolling surface. . Then, on the first rolling surface, for example, the user is entertained whether the ball falls from the first drop port 882 or the second rolling surface, and the second rolling surface drops from the second drop port 883. Routes with different acquisition numbers of holding information on the normal map side may be distributed in multiple stages, such as whether the player is entertained by whether the player is to play or to fall on the third rolling surface. This also applies to other modified examples.

(83) In the third modified example and the fourth modified example of the fifth embodiment, the number FN of the normal pattern reserved storage is the upper limit number minus 1 (a number less than the number of continuous through) (3 ), and one piece of pending information is likely to be vacant. The variable display time table for the general map is set so that two or more reserved information are likely to be vacant as a result, but the number of reserved information acquired by continuous through winning is different in each state. and the number of vacant holding information in each state is not limited to the above. For example, if the number of continuous through gates is set to 3 instead of 2, the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is likely to be maintained at 3, which is the upper limit number minus 1, and 2, which is the upper limit number minus 2. You may set the variable display time table for a normal figure so that the state which is easy to be maintained individually and the state which is easy to be maintained at 1 or less which is upper limit number minus 3 pieces may occur. In this case, by the above-mentioned continuous through passage, it is possible to create a state in which one general map reservation information is likely to be acquired, a state in which two items are likely to be acquired, and a state in which three items are likely to be acquired.

(84) In the third and fourth modifications of the fifth embodiment, the length of the set variable display time is used to adjust the relationship between the speed of digestion of pending information and the speed of replenishment of pending information. Although it is configured to adjust the number of vacancies in the number of reserved memories FN for normal patterns, the relationship between the speed of digestion of reserved information and the replenishment speed of reserved information is adjusted by other parameters to adjust the number of vacant numbers of reserved memories FN for normal patterns. It is good also as a structure which adjusts a number. Other parameters include, for example, the time (support time) during which the electric accessory 66 is maintained in an open state when the lottery in the normal game is an open result, and the stop display time as in the fourth modification It may be configured to change the digestion rate. Further, like the sorting valve 867 of the first modified example in the fifth embodiment, by adjusting the winning frequency to the through gates 858, 859, etc., the replenishment speed of the reserved information is changed. good too.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which adjusts the free number of the normal figure reservation storage number FN by changing the storable upper limit number of reservation information according to a game state. For example, a state in which the maximum number of pieces of hold information that can be stored is set to 1 and a state in which the upper limit number of hold information is set to 2 are provided, and a state in which one piece of hold information is easily acquired and a state in which two pieces of hold information are easily acquired when consecutive through prizes are won are provided. and may be configured to be set.

(85) In the third modification and the fourth modification of the fifth embodiment, the state (second state) in which the pending information is easily acquired by the number of through gates of continuous through A variable display time in which the speed is faster than the replenishment speed, and a slightly longer variable display time (in the third modification, a variable display time in which the replenishment speed is faster than the digestion speed of the normal game) However, it is also possible to implement only the variable display time in which the digestion speed is faster than the replenishment speed. In this case, the vacancy of the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is likely to be larger than the number of through gates, and specifically the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is likely to be less than 2 pieces. By doing so, the configuration of the variable display time table can be made simpler. However, if this is done, it becomes difficult to maintain the easy winning state in the third modified example, so the above combination is preferable.

(86) In the third modified example of the fifth embodiment, it may be configured such that the fluctuation display time of the special figure side based on the winning to the second operation opening 63 is changed between the first state and the second state. . Specifically, the second state in which winning to the second operation port 63 is more likely to occur when the state is easy to win is the special figure side based on the winning to the second operation port 63 than the first state Shorten the variable display time. By doing so, it is possible to speed up the digestion speed of the reserved information on the special figure side based on the winning to the second working port 63, and to fully enjoy the benefit of increasing the frequency of winning to the second working port 63. can be enjoyed.

(87) In the third modified example of the fifth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a winning lottery for the second special figure is performed based on the winning to the second operation opening 63 . In other words, it may be configured to be in an advantageous state in which a special winning result is likely to occur by being in an easy-to-win state. In this case, since the winning rate to the second operating port 63 is different when the easy winning state is established in the first state and the second state, the easy winning state is established in the first state and the second state. It is possible to change the frequency of the special winning result in the case of That is, it is possible to create a plurality of game states with different execution frequencies of the opening/closing execution mode based on the special win results.

(88) In the fourth modified example of the above fifth embodiment, the configuration may be such that the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is maintained at a predetermined number or more, which is advantageous for the player. As the predetermined number, it is three in the first state in which only one piece of general pattern reservation information is likely to be acquired by winning a prize of one continuous through, and two in the second state in which two pieces of general pattern reservation information are likely to be acquired. Good to have. In particular, by presenting the player with the advantage of maintaining the number of normal pattern reserved memories FN at 3 in the first state, the shooting mode of the game ball is adjusted in the first state so that the number of normal pattern reserved memories FN is 2. It is possible to suppress the act of maintaining the situation that is less than one, and acquiring two pieces of general pattern reservation information even in the first state.

As an advantage of maintaining the normal pattern reserved memory number FN at 3 in the first state, for example, when the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is 3 or more in the first state and the result is released, It is conceivable to increase the actual V winning rate by, for example, lengthening the opening time of the third variable winning device 910 compared to the case where the number of V winning devices is two or less.

(89) In the fourth modification of the fifth embodiment, the third variable prize winning device 910 is configured to be opened when winning in the winning lottery for the normal figure, and the third variable prize winning device 910 The opening and closing execution mode of 16 rounds is executed by the fourth variable winning device 900 by the V winning, but as in other embodiments, when winning the winning lottery for the normal figure, the 2 It may be configured to be able to acquire the hold information on the special figure side. In addition, when winning in the winning lottery for the normal figure, the winning to the third variable winning device 910 is permitted, but the V winning is not generated, and the prize ball based on the winning to the third variable winning device 910 It is good also as a game property which gives.

(90) Needless to say, in the fourth modification of the fifth embodiment, the probability of winning V when the third variable winning device 910 is in the open state is not limited to the above. Further, the probability of V winning may be calculated as a ratio of the number of V winnings to the number of times the third variable winning device 910 is opened. It may be calculated as a ratio of the length of time in which a V prize can occur to the length of time that is in the open state, or the ratio of the number of V prizes to the number of prizes to the third variable prize winning device 910 It is good also as a structure calculated as.

(91) In the fourth modification of the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the third variable winning device 910 is in the open state when the win-or-fail lottery on the normal drawing side results in an open result. As in the embodiment, if the result is open to the winning lottery on the general side, the winning of the operation port on the special side is allowed, and the special side based on the winning of the operation port on the special side The third variable winning device 910 may be opened when winning in the winning lottery.

(92) In each of the above-described embodiments, it is configured to be in an easy-to-win state by increasing the normal-pattern reservation storage number FN. The easy-to-win state may be set depending on the lottery information of the figure fluctuation type counter C5, the acquisition timing of the lottery information, etc.). In addition to the second normal game state (easy win state) in each of the above embodiments, the so-called high frequency support mode and electric chew mode are also shifted by the lottery system on the normal side instead of the lottery system on the special side. may be configured.

(93) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a right is generated when a ball enters and a jackpot is obtained, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the pachinko machine and the slot machine are provided with a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated to start rotation of the reels. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine in which

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

The invention described in each feature group below is defined as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, which has a ball-entering section into which a game ball can enter, and which has a predetermined value based on the entry of a game ball into the ball-entering section. A lottery process is known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-074175).” With regard to the background art, the invention of “There is still room for improvement in terms of improving interest.” It was done with a task.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry section (through gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined lottery information (normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5) based on the entry of the game ball into the entering ball portion (function for executing the normal pattern success or failure lottery by the main control device 162);
a lottery means (function of executing through winning process by the main controller 162) for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the lottery information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A first game execution means (a function of executing a normal game round control process by the main controller 162) for executing the first game (normal game round) based on the lottery process being performed by the lottery means;
A second game for executing a second game different from the first game (transition of the electric accessory 66 to the support state) after the execution of the first game based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means becoming a predetermined result. Game execution means (function to execute normal game state transition processing by main controller 162),
Retention storage means (electrical retention area) for reserving and storing lottery information corresponding to the entry of a game ball based on the entry of a game ball into the entry ball part during execution of the first game or the second game 643) and
with
In a predetermined case (when it is in the first normal game state), the first period from the game ball entering the entering ball portion to the end of the second game corresponding to the entering ball (normal game period) is shorter than a second period corresponding to the game ball shooting cycle of the shooting means.

In the above configuration, the lottery process and the first game are executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion, and when the result of the lottery process is a predetermined result, the second game is executed after the first game is executed. be done. Under such a configuration, in a predetermined case, the first period from when the game ball enters the ball entering portion to when the second game corresponding to the entering ball ends corresponds to the game ball launch cycle. It is configured to be shorter than the second period. In this case, since the second game ends earlier than the next ball entering the ball-entering section occurs, the pending memory in which the first game has not yet started is not added (or is difficult to be added). As a result, if there is no reserved memory, it is possible to easily sustain the state of no reserved memory while repeating a series of games from ball entry to the second game.

In addition, in the above configuration, the second game ends earlier than the next ball entering the ball entering section occurs, so that the occurrence of the next ball entering is waited for when the next first game is executed. There will be a waiting period to As a result, the start timing of the first game, and by extension the second game, depends on the timing of entering the ball into the ball entering section. This relationship can be similarly established for any ball entering the ball entering section while the state of no pending memory is maintained, and the start timing of the second game is always set to the ball entering section. It becomes possible to correspond to the ball entry timing. On the other hand, when the pending memory occurs, the second game is started without waiting for the next ball entering the ball entering section, so the second game is assumed to be executed regardless of the ball entering timing. Become. In this case, for example, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between the case where the second game is started depending on the ball entering timing and the case where the second game is started regardless of the ball entering timing. With this configuration, it is possible to shift to an advantageous game state according to the holding situation. As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity to shift to an advantageous game state even if a special game result such as a big win is not obtained, thereby improving the amusement.

In addition, in the "second period corresponding to the shooting cycle of the game ball", in addition to the shooting cycle of the game ball, for example, the shooting cycle of the game ball to the ball entering section (ball entering interval). It can be construed that a period having dependence or relevance is included.

Feature A2. Means for setting the first period to a longer period (10.5 sec) than the second period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a function to set the normal pattern fluctuation display time to 10 sec). The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, even in the situation where there is no reserved memory, even if the reserved memory does not occur (or is unlikely to occur), the opportunity to generate the reserved memory or increase the number of reserved memories is appropriately given. can be secured. This avoids the situation in which there is no reserved memory from becoming permanent, and makes it possible to suppress the monotony of the game.

Feature A3. Means for setting the first period to a longer period (1.1 sec) than the second period (normal pattern fluctuation display time of 0.1 sec) when the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (4). 6 sec function).

According to the above configuration, when the number of pending memories reaches or exceeds the predetermined number, it is possible to stably maintain such a state thereafter. As a result, frequent switching between the case where the second game is started depending on the ball entering timing and the case where the second game is started regardless of the ball entering timing is suppressed. . As a result, the player can proceed with the game in a calm manner, or proceed with the game with peace of mind, and can easily play the game.

Feature A4. The ball entry portion is provided as a first ball entry portion,
a second ball-entering portion (second actuation opening 63) different from the first ball-entering portion, into which a game ball can be entered;
A first state (open state) in which the second ball entering portion can or easily accepts a game ball, and a second state (closed state) in which the entering portion cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state. and a variable receiving means (electric accessory 66) that can be switched to,
As the second game execution means, variable acceptance control is performed to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on the result of the lottery of the lottery means becoming a predetermined result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized by comprising variable acceptance control means (function for executing normal game state transition processing by main control device 162).

According to the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control is performed as the second game, the switching timing of the variable acceptance means to the first state and the return from the first state to the second state depending on the holding status of the holding storage means You can change the timing. As a result, it is possible to change the ease with which the game ball enters the variable receiving means based on the change in the holding state. As a result, it is possible to provide a player who has not achieved a special game result with an opportunity to play a game in an easy-to-ball-enter state, thereby making it possible to improve playability and friendliness.

Feature A5. The variable receiving means forms a receiving area (receiving area RA1) capable of receiving a game ball in a specific area (specific area RA2) when the state is switched from the second state to the first state, and the receiving area is configured to receive the game ball received in the ball entrance portion,
When the number of reserved storage in the reserved storage means is a predetermined number or more (one or more), the execution interval of the variable acceptance control and the arrival interval of the game ball to the specific area are different in length. The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the mutual length between the execution interval of the variable acceptance control when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number and the arrival interval of the game ball to the specific area (area where the acceptance area is formed) Therefore, while the number of pending memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, a series of games from entering the ball into the ball entering section to the second game (variable acceptance control) are repeated, thereby changing the first state of the variable accepting means. It is possible to change the time difference (phase difference) between the switching timing (or the return timing from the first state to the second state) and the arrival timing of the game ball to the specific area. As a result, it is possible to change the ease with which a game ball enters the second ball entry portion by setting the number of reserved memories to a predetermined number or more, and a game in which the number of reserved memories and the ball entry easy state are linked. It becomes possible to realize sexuality.

In feature A5, the ``execution interval of the variable acceptance control'' is replaced by ``an execution interval which is a period from the execution of the previous variable admission control to the execution of the subsequent variable admission control'', ``one of the variable It may be read as "execution interval" which is a period from execution of the admission control to execution of the next variable admission control. In addition, in the feature A5, the "arrival interval of the game ball to the specific area" is the "arrival interval which is the period from the arrival of the preceding game ball to the specific area until the subsequent game ball reaches the specific area". Alternatively, it may be read as "an arrival interval which is a period from when one game ball reaches the specific area until when the next game ball reaches the specific area".

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the length of one of the execution interval and the arrival interval is a non-integer multiple of the length of the other of the execution interval and the arrival interval.

According to the above configuration, since the execution interval of the variable acceptance control and the arrival interval of the game ball to the specific area are asynchronous, the time difference can be reliably changed, and the game to the second ball entering section It becomes possible to appropriately change the ease with which a ball enters the ball.

Feature A7. In the variable acceptance control, the length of the period in which the variable acceptance means is in the first state (the opening time of the electric accessory 66) is the difference between the execution interval and the arrival interval (time difference A and B once). The gaming machine according to feature A5 or A6, wherein the length is equal to or greater than the variation width of winning.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the execution interval of the variable acceptance control and the arrival interval of the game ball to the specific area becomes a change width of one time in the process of cumulatively changing the time difference. By setting the length of the period in which the means is in the first state to be equal to or longer than the width of change, the arrival timing of the game ball to the specific area changes across the period in which the means is in the first state. is suppressed. As a result, when the number of pending memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is possible to properly secure the opportunity for the game ball to enter the second ball entering section.

Feature A8. Means for fixing the execution interval of the variable acceptance control when the pending storage number in the pending storage means is a predetermined number or more (one or more) .6 sec and the opening period of the electric accessory 66 is fixed to 0.1 sec).

For example, if the variable acceptance control execution interval is diversified when the reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the time difference changes irregularly as the series of games is repeated. In this case, it becomes difficult to grasp the rate of ball entry into the second ball entry section (acceptance rate by the variable acceptance means) at the design stage. There are concerns about inconvenience such as In this respect, according to this configuration, the execution interval of the variable acceptance control can be stabilized, so that the time difference can be changed regularly. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the rate of ball entry into the second ball entry portion, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature A9. The specific game ball that entered the first ball entering portion is configured to be able to reach the specific area,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A8, wherein the arrival interval is an arrival interval of the specific game ball to the specific area.

According to the above configuration, while the state of the variable receiving means is switched based on the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entering section, the game ball entering the first ball entering section is the second entering ball. The player enjoys whether or not to enter the ball into the section, and the player can easily grasp the flow from entering the first ball entering section to entering the second ball entering section as a series of games. In addition, since it is enough to pay attention to the game ball that has entered the first ball entry section, it is possible to clarify the attention point, and it is possible to suppress the player's attention from being distracted. , it becomes possible to facilitate the understanding of game characteristics.

It should be noted that the feature A9 "is configured so that a specific game ball that enters the first ball entering section can reach the specific area" is replaced with "the first ball entering section as a passing section through which a game ball can pass." is provided, and the specific game ball that has passed through the passage part can reach the specific area."

Feature A10. The game machine according to feature A9, further comprising means (game nails 69a to 69d) for guiding the specific game ball to the specific area.

According to the above configuration, a game ball entering the ball entering portion can stably reach the specific area, and the player can easily play the game with peace of mind. Not only that, it is also possible to stabilize the arrival interval of the game ball to the specific area, and it is possible to easily grasp the ball entry rate to the second ball entry portion at the design stage.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, further comprising means (game nails 69a to 69d) for preventing game balls different from the specific game balls from reaching the specific area.

According to the above configuration, a game ball other than the specific game ball is suppressed from entering the arrival route to the specific area. As a result, it is suppressed that other game balls collide with the specific game ball to prevent it from reaching the specific area, or that game balls other than the specific game ball enter the second ball entry part, and the game is played. It is possible to improve the sense of security of the user and the stability of the arrival interval. In addition, the need to consider the entry of game balls other than the specific game balls into the second ball entry portion is alleviated in the design stage, and the design load can be reduced.

Feature A12. The variable receiving means forms a receiving area (receiving area RA1) capable of receiving a game ball in a specific area (specific area RA2) when the state is switched from the second state to the first state, and the receiving area is configured to receive the game ball received in the second ball entrance portion,
The specific game ball entering the first ball entry portion is configured to be able to reach the specific area, and the specific game ball reaches the specific area after the end of the variable acceptance control corresponding to the entry ball The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A11, characterized in that a period required for the specific game ball to reach the specific area is set so as to reach the specific area.

According to the above configuration, while maintaining a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entering portion (or is difficult to enter) under a situation where there is no reserved memory, the second ball entering portion is allowed to enter due to the occurrence of the reserved memory. A game ball can be changed to a state in which it is possible (or easy to enter). In other words, it is possible to realize the playability of transitioning to the easy-ball-entering state by the occurrence of the pending memory. As a result, not only is it possible to provide players who have not achieved a special game result with an opportunity to play in the easy-to-enter state, but it is also possible to increase their motivation to generate reserved memory. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A13. The first game executing means starts a game-playing operation by a predetermined notification means (accessory display unit 44) and terminates the game-playing operation as a notification result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means. Equipped with a turn control means (a function of executing a normal game turn control process by the main control device 162),
When the first period is shorter than the second period, in the variable acceptance control, the variable acceptance means is set to the first The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A12, characterized in that the period of the 1 state (opening time of the electric accessory 66) is lengthened.

According to the above configuration, since the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state is longer than the period of the game-playing operation, the first period is shorter than the second period and is used for the first and second games. Even if the possible period is limited, the state in which the variable receiving means is in the first state can be emphasized. As a result, it is possible to easily give an impression to the player that it is easy to enter the ball into the second ball-entering portion, and it is possible to preferably arouse the desire to play the game.

Feature A14. The first game executing means starts a game-playing operation by a predetermined notification means (accessory display unit 44) and terminates the game-playing operation as a notification result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means. Equipped with a turn control means (a function of executing a normal game turn control process by the main control device 162),
When the first period is shorter than the second period, the game round control means is set to the first state in the variable acceptance control (the opening time of the electric accessory 66). The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A13, characterized in that the notification period of the notification result in the above is set to be long.

Although it is possible to grasp that the variable receiving means is operating in a relatively short period of time, it is assumed that it will take a certain period of time to recognize the contents of the notification. In this regard, in this configuration, since the notification period of the notification result is longer than the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state, the first period is shorter than the second period and is used for the first and second games. Even if the possible period is limited, it is possible to facilitate the recognition of the notification result and suppress the player's confusion.

Feature A15. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry section (through gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined lottery information (normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5) based on the entry of the game ball into the entering ball portion (function for executing the normal pattern success or failure lottery by the main control device 162);
a lottery means (function of executing through winning process by the main controller 162) for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the lottery information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A first game execution means (a function of executing a normal game round control process by the main controller 162) for executing the first game (normal game round) based on the lottery process being performed by the lottery means;
A second game for executing a second game different from the first game (transition of the electric accessory 66 to the support state) after the execution of the first game based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means becoming a predetermined result. Game execution means (function for executing normal game state transition processing by main controller 162),
Retention storage means (electrical retention area) for reserving and storing lottery information corresponding to the entry of a game ball based on the entry of a game ball into the entry ball part during execution of the first game or the second game 643) and
with
In a predetermined case, the first period (ordinary figure game period) from when the game ball enters the entering ball until the second game corresponding to the entering ball ends A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be shorter than a second period corresponding to an interval between game balls entering.

According to the above configuration, an effect similar to that of feature A1 is expected. It should be noted that the feature A15, ``interval between game balls entering the ball-entering portion'', is defined as ``the period from when the preceding game ball enters the ball-entering portion until the subsequent game ball enters the ball-entering portion. You may read it as "a certain ball entry interval". Also, each configuration described in any one of the features A2 to A14 may be applied to the feature A15.

Feature A16. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) capable of shooting a game ball;
A ball entry section (through gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined lottery information (normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5) based on the entry of the game ball into the entering ball portion (function for executing normal pattern success or failure lottery by main control device 162);
Based on the lottery information acquired by the information acquisition means, a specific game executing means (ordinary figure game round control by the main control device 162) that executes a specific game (shift to the support state of the general figure game round and the electric accessory 66) function to execute processing and normal game state transition processing);
Reservation storage means (electrical holding area 643) for holding and storing lottery information corresponding to the entry of a game ball on the basis of the entry of a game ball into the entry part during execution of the specific game;
with
In a predetermined case, a specific period (ordinary figure game period) from when the game ball enters the entering ball section until the specific game corresponding to the entering ball ends is a specified period (game ball firing cycle) A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than.

According to the above configuration, since the specific period from when the game ball enters the ball entering portion until the specific game corresponding to the entering ball ends is shorter than the predetermined period, The specific game ends earlier than the next ball entering the club. As a result, the reserved memory in which the specific game has not yet started is not added (or is difficult to be added), and if there is no reserved memory, a series of games from entering the ball to the specific game It becomes possible to maintain a state in which there is no pending memory while repeating

Further, in the above configuration, the specific game ends earlier than the next ball entering the ball entering section occurs, so that when the next specific game is executed, the waiting for the occurrence of the next ball entering is performed. period occurs. As a result, the start timing of the specific game depends on the ball entry timing to the ball entry section. Such a relationship can be similarly established for any ball entering the ball entering section while the state in which there is no reserved memory is maintained. It becomes possible to correspond to the ball timing. On the other hand, when the pending memory occurs, the specific game is started without waiting for the next ball entering the ball entering section, so the specific game is executed regardless of the ball entering timing. In this case, for example, when the specific game is started depending on the timing of entering the ball into the ball entering section, and when the specific game is started regardless of the timing of entering the ball, there is a difference in the degree of advantage. Then, it becomes possible to shift to an advantageous game state according to the pending state. As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity to shift to an advantageous game state even if a special game result such as a big win is not obtained, thereby improving the amusement.

For each configuration of the features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F14, features G1 to G13, features H1 to H10, features It is also possible to apply the technical role ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I12, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K13, and features L1 to L9 individually, and each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. A ball entry section (through gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined lottery information (normal pattern fluctuation type counter C5) based on the entry of the game ball into the entering ball portion (function for executing the normal pattern success or failure lottery by the main control device 162);
A lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the lottery information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function of executing a general-purpose lottery lottery by the main control device 162);
Specific game execution means (ordinary figure game round control processing by main controller 162 and general figure function to execute game state transition processing),
On the basis of the game ball entering the ball entering portion during execution of the specific game, a holding storage means (electrical holding area 643) for holding and storing lottery information corresponding to the ball entering,
with
A first game state (first normal game state, low-frequency support mode) and a second game state (second normal game state, medium-frequency support mode) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low as game states. and
The game state changes from the first game state to the second game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, based on the number of reserved memories of the reserved memory means becoming equal to or greater than a predetermined number (1 or more). A game machine characterized by comprising a means for making it (a function for making it a second normal game state or medium frequency support mode when the number FN of the normal figure reservation storage is 1 or more).

According to the above configuration, when the number of pending memories is increased, not only is it possible to secure the number of lotteries corresponding to the increase, but also the merit of changing to the advantageous second game state can be provided. As a result, the interest in increasing the number of retained memories is enhanced, and it is possible to favorably arouse the desire to enter the ball-entering club. Furthermore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to provide an opportunity to play a game in an advantageous second game state even if a special game result such as a big win is not obtained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being concentrated only on the special game results, and to provide various ways of enjoying the game.

In addition, in feature B1, ``means for making the number of reserved memories of the reserved memory means . . . the second gaming state'' Transition means for shifting the game state from the first game state to the second game state more advantageous for the player than the first game state based on the 2 normal game state or function to shift to medium frequency support mode)”.

Feature B2. The ball-entering portion is provided as a first ball-entering portion,
a second ball-entering portion (second actuation opening 63) different from the first ball-entering portion, into which a game ball can be entered;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion (function of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode for the second operation opening 63 by the main control device 162, payout control device A prize ball function based on winning to the second operation port 63 by 181);
with
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein in the second gaming state, the difficulty level of ball entry into the second ball-entering section is lower than in the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entering portion by entering the second game state, and it becomes easier to obtain a privilege based on the entering ball. As a result, when the number of reserved memories is increased, not only is it possible to secure the number of lotteries corresponding to the increase, but it is also possible to provide the advantage of making it easier to obtain the privilege.

Feature B3. A second lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the game ball entering the second ball entering section (a function of executing a special figure win or lose lottery by the main controller 162);
Special game executing means (executing game state transition processing by main controller 162) for executing a special game (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the lottery process by the second lottery means is a specific result. The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it becomes easier to execute the special game by entering the second game state. As a result, when the number of reserved memories is increased, not only is it possible to secure the number of lotteries corresponding to the increase, but also the advantage of making it easier to execute a special game can be provided.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the predetermined number is two or more.

For example, if the number of pending memories, which is the trigger to the second game state, is set to 1, the second game state is immediately entered when the pending memory occurs due to an event that could not be assumed at the design stage, and the operation at the game hall It may cause trouble. In this respect, according to this configuration, the predetermined number is set to 2 or more, so that a margin can be secured, and it is possible to suppress the second game state due to an unexpected hold occurrence. Become.

Feature B5. Means for continuing the second game state on condition that the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number when the second game state is entered (second normal as long as the number of reserved memories FN is 1 or more) A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that it has a function of continuing the gaming state or the medium-frequency support state.

According to the above configuration, since the second game state is continued as long as the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is possible to strongly arouse the desire to maintain the number of reserved memories after entering the second game state. can. As a result, the player's interest in whether or not the game ball will enter the ball-entering portion is heightened, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B6. It is possible to switch between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. A variable winning section (variable winning device 65),
Switching means for switching the variable ball entry portion from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (jackpot winning) (a function of executing game state transition processing by the main controller 162) )and,
A privilege granting means (a prize ball function based on the winning to the variable winning device 65 by the payout control device 181) that grants a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entering portion;
with
When a game ball enters the variable ball entry portion, the ball entering the ball entry portion is avoided, or when the variable ball entry portion is switched to the first state, the game ball enters the ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that it is configured such that entry of a ball is inhibited.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the variable ball entering portion, the ball entering the ball entering portion is avoided, or when the variable ball entering portion is switched to the first state, the game ball enters the ball entering portion. Since the entry of the ball is blocked, the number of reserved memories can be reduced by switching the variable ball entry section to the first state when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the second game state can be ended, and the continuation of the state can be avoided. At that time, since the second game state ends in exchange for the grant of a privilege based on the ball entering the variable ball entry section, the player's understanding is easily obtained compared to the case where the second game state only ends. It becomes possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction and disappointment.

Note that when the feature B6 is applied to the feature B2, "the privilege corresponding to the ball entering the variable ball-entering section is more advantageous to the player than the privilege corresponding to the ball entering the second ball-entering section." You may add the feature that As a result, when the variable ball-entering section is switched to the first state, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the ball into the variable ball-entering section than to enter into the variable ball-entering section. It becomes possible to favorably promote the ball.

Further, when applying the characteristic B6 to the characteristic B3, after deleting the configuration of the "special game execution means" of the characteristic B3, the configuration related to the switching means of the characteristic B6 is changed to "the result of the lottery process of the second lottery means The variable ball entry portion is switched from the second state to the first state based on the specified result. The second game state is a state in which entering a ball into the second ball-entering section is facilitated, and a trigger for ending the second game state is provided according to the result of the lottery process based on the entry of a ball into the second ball-entering section. By adopting a configuration in which this occurs, it becomes difficult to play the game while avoiding the end of the second game state. This makes it possible to reliably end the second game state.

Feature B7. As the switching means, when the predetermined condition is established, the variable ball entry section is changed from the second state to the first state, and then the variable ball entry control is changed to the second state at least once. Special game execution means (function for executing game state transition processing by main controller 162) for executing a game (opening/closing execution mode),
When a special game is executed by the special game execution means, the specific game execution means makes the execution period of the specific game longer than the execution period of the special game based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. The game machine according to feature B6, characterized by comprising a means for lengthening the normal pattern fluctuation display time (a function of setting the normal pattern fluctuation display time to 200 sec).

In the above configuration, the execution of the special game serves as a trigger for ending the second game state, and the execution period of the specific game is made longer than the execution period of the special game when the specific condition is satisfied. In this case, the decrease in the reserved memory count during execution of the special game is suppressed, and the reserved memory count can be maintained across the special game. As a result, when the predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the special game is established under the second game state, the transition to the second game state can be continued even after the special game is finished, and the second game state can be continued. becomes possible.

Feature B8. As the special game, a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous for the player than the first special game can be executed,
The specific game execution means, when the first special game is executed by the special game execution means, sets the execution period of the specific game to the execution period of the first special game based on the establishment of the specific condition. The gaming machine according to feature B7, characterized by comprising a means for making the normal pattern fluctuation display time longer than 200 seconds.

In the above configuration, among the first special game on the disadvantageous side and the second special game on the advantageous side, it is possible to continue the second game state when the former is executed. As a result, the continuous execution of the second game state can be utilized as relief means when the first special game on the disadvantageous side is executed, and the interest can be improved.

Feature B9. The ball-entering portion is provided as a first ball-entering portion,
a second ball-entering portion (second actuation opening 63) different from the first ball-entering portion, into which a game ball can be entered;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion (function of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode for the second operation opening 63 by the main control device 162, payout control device A prize ball function based on winning to the second operation port 63 by 181);
a third ball-entering portion (first operating port 62) arranged downstream of the second ball-entering portion and capable of entering a game ball that has not entered the second ball-entering portion;
The privilege granting means is a means for granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the third ball entering portion (a prize ball function based on the winning to the first operation opening 62 by the payout control device 181) The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, since the game ball that did not enter the second ball entering portion can enter the third ball entering portion, the privilege is obtained even if the ball does not enter the second ball entering portion. There remains an opportunity to obtain As a result, the expectation can be maintained even after the ball does not enter the second ball entering portion, and the player's interest in the destination of the game ball is suppressed from quickly disappearing.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the probability of a game ball entering the first ball entering section is higher than the probability of a game ball entering the third ball entering section.

According to the above configuration, the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section is simplified from that into the third ball entry section, so that the former becomes routine and the game ball into the first ball entry section is made easier. It can reduce the attention of the person. Accordingly, the player's consciousness can be easily directed to the third ball-entering section, and as a result, the player can hardly notice that the number of pending memories exceeds a predetermined number and the process up to that point. can. As a result, the impression that the second game state has suddenly occurred can be easily given to the player, and the surprise and joy of the player can be suitably realized.

Feature B11. A second lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion or the third ball entry portion (function of executing the special figure winning lottery by the main controller 162);
A special game executing means (a game by the main controller 162) for executing a special game (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result) advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery processing by the second lottery means becoming a specific result. A gaming machine according to feature B9 or B10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, even if the ball is not entered into the second ball entry section, the opportunity to execute the special game remains. As a result, the expectation can be maintained even after the ball does not enter the second ball entering portion, and the player's interest in the destination of the game ball is suppressed from quickly disappearing.

Here, the "lottery processing" and the "special game" in feature B8 may be the same in type and advantage for the second ball-entering section and the third ball-entering section. , may be different.

Feature B12. The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B11, wherein the second ball-entering section is more advantageous for the player than the third ball-entering section.

According to the above configuration, even though the game ball that did not enter the second ball entering portion can enter the third ball entering portion, the degree of advantage between the first game state and the second game state is clear. differences can be made. As a result, it is possible to favorably arouse expectations for the transition to the second game state, and at the same time, it is possible to further increase the willingness to increase the number of reserved memories.

Feature B13. A payout means (payout control device 181) capable of paying out a game ball based on the entry of the game ball into each of the second ball entering portion and the third ball entering portion,
The payout means is means for increasing the number of game balls paid out based on the entry into the second ball entry portion than the number of game balls paid out based on the entry into the third ball entry portion (the former payout number is set to 10, and the latter payout number is set to 3).

According to the above configuration, the number of balls paid out based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion is larger than the number of balls paid out based on the ball entering the third ball entering portion, so that the number of balls entering the second ball entering portion By shifting to the second game state in which is facilitated, it becomes possible to play the game with less decrease in possession balls than in the case of the first game state. As a result, even though the game ball that did not enter the second ball entering portion can enter the third ball entering portion, there is a clear difference in the degree of advantage between the first game state and the second game state. can be provided.

Feature B14. The ball-entering portion is provided as a first ball-entering portion,
a second ball-entering portion (second actuation opening 63) different from the first ball-entering portion, into which a game ball can be entered;
A second lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the game ball entering the second ball entering section (a function of executing a special figure win or lose lottery by the main controller 162);
A special game executing means (a game by the main controller 162) for executing a special game (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result) advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery processing by the second lottery means becoming a specific result. function to execute state transition processing),
After execution of the special game, the game state is shifted to the second game state or to a third game state having a different degree of advantage from the second game state and being more advantageous to the player than the first game state. (a function of shifting to a high-frequency support mode triggered by a big win).

According to the above configuration, as a transition route to an advantageous game state, apart from the route triggered by the number of reserved memories exceeding a predetermined number, the lottery result is triggered by a specific result (for example, a jackpot result). It is possible to establish a route to As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode of transition to an advantageous game state, and to expand the range of ways to enjoy the game.

Feature B15. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, further comprising a notification means (normal figure reservation number display section FM) for notifying the reservation storage number of the reservation storage means.

In the configuration where the second game state is advantageous based on the number of reserved memories exceeding a predetermined number, the player's interest in the number of reserved memories increases dramatically. Even if you do not remember the number of memories, you can easily grasp the number of reserved memories each time. As a result, the player's attention to the game is suppressed from being distracted by the number of reserved memories.

For each configuration of the features B1 to B15, features A1 to A16, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F14, features G1 to G13, features H1 to H10, features It is also possible to apply the technical role ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I12, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K13, and features L1 to L9 individually, and each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A passing portion (through gate 35) through which game balls can pass;
A lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball passing through the passing portion (function for executing a general-purpose lottery lottery by the main control device 162);
A ball entry portion (second operating port 63) into which a game ball can enter,
A first state (open state) in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball entering portion, and a second state (closed state) in which the ball entering portion cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state, A variable receiving means (electric accessory 66) that can be switched to
Variable acceptance control means (main control means) for performing variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state on the basis that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined result A function to execute normal game state transition processing by the device 162),
Privilege granting means (function for executing game ball payout) that grants a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
with
The variable receiving means forms a receiving area (receiving area RA1) capable of receiving a game ball when switched from the second state to the first state, and the game ball received in the receiving area is received as the receiving area. configured to receive into the bulb,
A game ball that has passed through the passing portion can reach a specific area (specific area RA2) where the receiving area is formed by the variable receiving means,
In the case of a predetermined state, a specific period (ordinary figure game period) from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the variable acceptance control corresponding to the passage ends is the game ball passing through the passing portion A configuration in which the game ball that has passed through the passage portion reaches the specific area after the variable acceptance control corresponding to the passage is completed, because the required period is shorter than the time required until the game ball reaches the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the passing portion reaches the specific area (area where the receiving area is formed) after the end of the variable receiving control corresponding to the passage, the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. It is possible to make it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry part even under control. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of setting the variable receiving means to the first state, even though the configuration is such that a privilege is given based on the ball entering the ball entering portion. As a result, it is possible to give an impression that it is easy for the player to enter the ball-entering section while suppressing the excessive awarding of benefits to the player, thereby arousing the player's interest and arousing the desire to play. it becomes possible to In addition, the movement of the variable receiving means can be utilized as one of the game presentations, making it possible to improve the amusement.

Feature C2. The game ball that has passed through the passing portion is allowed to reach the specific area after the end of the variable acceptance control corresponding to the passage and before the start of the next variable acceptance control for the variable acceptance control. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the game ball that has passed through the passing portion reaches the specific area using the interstitial period of the variable reception control that goes back and forth. As a result, not only is it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry part in the variable acceptance control corresponding to the passage, but it is also impossible or difficult to enter the ball in the next variable acceptance control. It becomes possible to realize the configuration of C1 in a practically preferable manner.

Feature C3. A game ball that has passed through the passing portion is allowed to reach the specific area after the variable acceptance control corresponding to the passage is completed and before the game ball next passes through the passing portion. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the arrival of the game ball related to the current passage to the specific area is completed during the period from when the game ball passes through the passing portion this time to when the next passage occurs. This makes it possible to reduce the design load by eliminating the need to consider the game balls that have passed before or the game balls that will pass next when making it impossible for a game ball to enter the ball entry part. become.

It should be noted that the feature C3 is defined as "equipped with a shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) capable of shooting a game ball, and a game ball that has passed through the passing section is released after the variable acceptance control corresponding to the passage is completed, and It can be read as "the specific area can be reached before the period corresponding to the game ball shooting cycle of the shooting means has passed since the passage".

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, further comprising guide means (game nails 69a to 69d) for guiding game balls that have passed through the passing portion to the specific area.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to stabilize the flow of game balls from the passing portion to the specific area. As a result, the required period of the game ball from the passing section to the specific area is promoted to be constant, and the game ball reaches the specific area after the end of the variable acceptance control for any ball entering the passing section. can be preferably maintained.

Feature C5. Any of the features C1 to C4, characterized in that it comprises inhibition means (game nails 69a to 69d) for inhibiting a game ball different from the game ball that has passed through the passing portion from reaching the specific area. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, game balls different from the specific game balls that have passed through the passing portion are prevented from entering the reaching route to the specific area. As a result, other game balls collide with the specific game ball to prevent it from reaching the specific area, and game balls other than the specific game ball are prevented from entering the ball entry part, and the player's It is possible to improve the sense of security and the stability of the arrival interval. Moreover, the need to consider the entry of game balls other than the specific game balls into the specific area in the design stage is alleviated, making it possible to reduce the design load.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the specific area is provided below the passage section, and the specific area and the passage section are arranged vertically.

According to the above configuration, the route of the game ball that has passed through the passage portion to reach the specific area is simplified, and the player is easily given the impression that the ball is likely to enter the specific area. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the passing portion can be moved to the specific area by the free fall of the game ball. In this case, since it is possible to suppress changes in the movement speed of the game ball due to contact with other members, etc., it is possible to contribute to the stabilization of the time required for the game ball to reach the specific area.

Feature C7. A means for increasing the probability of the predetermined result in the lottery process to be higher than the probability of the result different from the predetermined result (function of increasing the probability of the open result to be higher than the probability of the lost result). The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features C1 to C6.

For example, if the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is lower than the probability of obtaining a different result, even if the frequency of execution of the lottery process is increased, the frequency of switching to the first state in the variable receiving means tends to be low. There is a concern that the performance effect of the receiving means cannot be fully exhibited. In this regard, in this configuration, the probability of a predetermined result is higher than the probability of a different result, so that the frequency of switching to the first state can be increased, and the presentation effect can be improved. become.

Feature C8. A specific ball entry portion (first operation port 62) different from the ball entry portion, into which a game ball can be entered,
Any one of the features C1 to C7, wherein the specific ball-entering portion is arranged downstream of the passing portion, and a game ball that has passed through the passing portion is configured to reach the specific ball-entering portion. The gaming machine described in .

From the point of view of increasing the execution frequency of the variable acceptance control and improving the performance effect, it is desirable to direct more game balls toward the passing portion. Under such circumstances, in the above configuration, a game ball that has passed through the passing portion can reach not only the specific area but also the specific ball entering portion. For example, if the arrival route of the game ball to the specific ball entry section is independent of the route from the passage section to the specific area, when trying to secure a certain ball entry rate to the specific ball entry section, the passage section You will have to lower the passing rate of game balls to and earn the ball entry rate. In this respect, according to this configuration, it is possible to secure the ball entry rate to the specific ball entry part without reducing the passage rate of the game ball to the passage part, and to make more game balls go to the passage part. It becomes possible to set it as a preferable aspect above.

Feature C9. The specific ball entry section is arranged downstream of the specific area, and the game balls that have passed through the passing section and are not received by the variable receiving means can reach the specific ball entry section. and
The privilege granting means includes means for granting a privilege to the player based on the ball entering the specific ball entering portion (a prize ball function based on the winning to the first operation opening 62 by the payout control device 181). The gaming machine according to feature C8, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide two opportunities for specific award per game ball. In other words, even if the game ball that has passed through the passage portion is not received by the variable receiving means (when it does not enter the ball entering portion), there is still an opportunity to give the privilege, and the game ball is received by the variable receiving means. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the granting of the privilege even after the player has passed by without being hit. As a result, the player's interest in the behavior and whereabouts of the game ball is prevented from fading prematurely, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C10. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that game balls are not paid out based on passage through the passing portion.

According to the above configuration, since game balls are not paid out when they pass through the passing section, it is possible to increase the passing rate of game balls to the passing section while suppressing hindrance to the operation of the game hall. Become. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of execution of the lottery process by the lottery means, and by extension, to increase the frequency of switching to the first state in the variable receiving means.

In addition, in the feature C10, "game balls are not paid out" may be replaced with "privileges are not given".

Feature C11. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) capable of shooting a game ball based on a predetermined shooting operation;
Guiding means (guiding part 77) capable of guiding the game ball shot by the shooting means to the passing part,
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics C1 to C10, wherein a buffering means (buffering member 78) is provided at a portion of the guiding means with which the game ball abuts.

According to the above configuration, the game ball can be guided to the passage portion by the guiding means, and the frequency of passage of the game ball to the passage portion can be preferably increased. In addition, since the guide means is provided with a buffer means at a portion where the game ball abuts, it is possible to suppress the bounce of the game ball contacting the guide means and stabilize the guidance of the game ball, and the guide means due to the collision of the game ball. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the damage of the.

Feature C12. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry section (through gate 35) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the entering ball section (a function of executing a general-purpose lottery lottery by the main control device 162);
A ball entry portion (second operating port 63) into which a game ball can enter,
A first state (open state) in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball entering portion, and a second state (closed state) in which the ball entering portion cannot accept a game ball or is more difficult to accept than the first state, A variable receiving means (electric accessory 66) that can be switched to
Variable acceptance control means (main control means) for performing variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state on the basis that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined result A function to execute normal game state transition processing by the device 162),
Privilege granting means (function for executing game ball payout) that grants a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
with
The variable receiving means forms a receiving area (receiving area RA1) capable of receiving a game ball when switched from the second state to the first state, and the game ball received in the receiving area is received as the receiving area. configured to receive into the bulb,
A game ball passing through a predetermined place in the game area can reach a specific area (specific area RA2) where the receiving area is formed by the variable receiving means,
In the case of a predetermined state, a specific period (ordinary figure game period) from when the game ball enters the entering ball section to when the variable acceptance control corresponding to the entering ball ends passes through the specified place A gaming machine characterized in that it is constructed so as to be shorter than the required period of time for a game ball to reach the specific area after it has reached the specified area.

According to the above configuration, an effect similar to that of the feature C1 is expected. Note that each configuration described in any one of the features C2 to C11 may be applied to the feature C12.

For each configuration of the features C1 to C12, features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F14, features G1 to G13, features H1 to H10, features It is also possible to apply the technical role ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I12, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K13, and features L1 to L9 individually, and each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A game operation executing means (a function of periodically opening the electric accessory 66 at a cycle of 0.6 sec or 1.1 sec) for periodically executing a predetermined game operation (opening of the electric accessory 66);
Privilege granting means (executing payout of game balls) for granting a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined privilege granting condition (winning to the second operation opening 63) while the predetermined game action is performed. function) and
with
The game action executing means sets the period of the predetermined game action to the first period (0.6 sec) when the game situation is the first situation (the number FN of the normal pattern holding memory is 0), and the game situation is the first period. Means for setting the cycle of the predetermined game operation to a second cycle (1.1 sec) different from the first cycle when the second situation (the number of reserved memory FN for the normal pattern is 4) is different from the situation (normal pattern A game machine characterized by comprising a function of changing the opening period of the electric accessory 66 according to the reserved memory number FN.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined game action is performed periodically, and the period of the periodic action changes according to the game situation. On top of that, the privilege is granted when the privilege granting condition is satisfied while the predetermined game motion is performed, and the periodic motion and the ease of obtaining the privilege are correlated. . Accordingly, by changing the cycle, it is possible to change the ease with which the granting condition is established, and furthermore, it is possible to change the ease with which the privilege is obtained. In this case, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game compared to the case of permanently operating with a certain regularity, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature D2. A game action executing means (electric role player) for periodically executing a predetermined game action (opening of the electric accessory 66) with a predetermined game action (a shooting operation performed to cause the through gate 35 to win) by the player as one condition. A function of periodically opening the object 66 at a period of 0.6 sec or 1.1 sec);
Privilege granting means (executing payout of game balls) for granting a privilege to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined privilege granting condition (winning to the second operation opening 63) while the predetermined game action is performed. function) and
with
The game action executing means sets the period of the predetermined game action to the first period (0.6 sec) when the game situation is the first situation (the number FN of the normal figure holding memory is 0), and the game situation is the first period. A means for setting the period of the predetermined game operation to a second period (1.1 sec) different from the first period when the second situation is different from the situation (the number FN is 4),
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that a privilege is more likely to be granted in the second cycle than in the first cycle, or that the privilege is advantageous to a player.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined game action is performed periodically, and the period of the periodic action changes according to the game situation. On top of that, the privilege is granted when the privilege granting condition is satisfied while the predetermined game motion is performed, and the periodic motion and the ease of obtaining the privilege are correlated. . Accordingly, by changing the cycle, it is possible to change the ease with which the granting condition is established, and furthermore, it is possible to change the ease with which the privilege is obtained. In this case, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game compared to the case of permanently operating with a certain regularity, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Moreover, in this configuration, the player is required to perform a predetermined game operation in order to execute the game operation, and if the game operation is not performed, the privilege provision condition is not satisfied. Therefore, the execution of the predetermined game operation becomes meaningful, and the player's motivation to perform the operation can be enhanced. In addition, in this configuration, when the period of the game operation is the second period, the privilege is more likely to be granted or advantageous to the player than in the case of the first period. Since it is necessary to continuously perform the game operation in order to continue executing the game operation in the second period, not only the player's interest in the operation cycle of the game operation increases, but also the significance of continuing the predetermined game operation. can also be generated. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's desire to operate, and to promote the player's active participation in the game.

Feature D3. It is configured to cause a change from the first situation to the second situation based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the normal pattern fluctuation display time of 10 seconds is set),
The game machine according to feature D2, wherein the predetermined condition can be established by performing the predetermined game operation.

According to the above configuration, the period of the game operation can be changed to the second period by performing the predetermined game operation. As a result, the player's desire to operate the machine is further enhanced, and it is possible to favorably encourage active participation in the game.

Feature D4. Characteristic feature D2 or D3, wherein when the second situation occurs, the second situation continues on condition that the predetermined game operation is continued thereafter. game machine.

With the above configuration, when the game situation changes to the second situation, the second situation continues on the condition that the predetermined game operation is continued, so that the desire to continue the game operation can be favorably increased. In addition, since there is a possibility of returning to the first state depending on the operation state of the player, the game can be played with a certain sense of tension, and the amusement can be improved.

Feature D5. A means for generating a special state (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a big win) based on the establishment of a specific condition (big win);
When the special state occurs under the second situation, by performing a specific game operation different from the predetermined game operation (shooting operation performed to cause the variable winning device 65 to win), the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, characterized in that it is configured such that a privilege can be obtained more easily than through a game operation, or an advantageous privilege can be obtained.

According to the above configuration, in order to obtain a privilege when a special state occurs, a specific operation different from a predetermined game operation is required. Monotonicity is suppressed. In addition, since the player can naturally stop the continuation of the predetermined game operation, the state in which the cycle of the game operation is the second cycle can be ended, and it is preferable that this state persists. can be avoided.

Feature D6. By performing the specific game operation when the special state occurs, it is easier to obtain benefits than performing the predetermined game operation when the cycle of the predetermined game operation is the second cycle. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to feature D5 is configured to obtain advantageous benefits.

According to the above configuration, when the special state occurs, it becomes easier to obtain a privilege than in a state where the cycle of the game operation is the second cycle, or the privilege becomes more advantageous. It can be used as a promotional element from a certain state, and it becomes possible to improve interest. In addition, since the state can be terminated in exchange for the occurrence of a special state that is more advantageous than the state of the second period, the player's understanding can be improved compared to the case where the state of the second period only ends. is easily obtained, and it becomes possible to reduce dissatisfaction and disappointment of the player.

Feature D7. Equipped with a movable body (receiving member 245 of the electric accessory 66) with which the game ball can come into contact,
The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the predetermined game action is the action of the movable body.

According to the above configuration, it is possible not only to correlate the periodic motion and the likelihood of obtaining the privilege, but also to construct a correlation between the movement and flow of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention not only to the movement cycle of the movable body, but also to the movement and flow of the game ball, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D8. A ball entry portion (second operating port 63) into which a game ball can enter,
A first state (open state) having the movable body and displacing the movable body so that the ball entering portion can or easily accepts a game ball (open state), and a game ball cannot be accepted by the ball entering portion or the A second state (closed state) that is harder to accept than the first state, and a variable receiving means (electric accessory 66) that can be switched to,
The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the privilege imparting means comprises means for imparting a privilege (payout of game balls) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering section.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the ease with which a game ball enters the ball entrance portion according to the operation cycle of the movable body, and accordingly it is possible to change the ease with which benefits are awarded. This makes it possible to realize the configuration related to the feature D1 in a practically preferable manner.

For each configuration of the features D1 to D8, features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C12, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F14, features G1 to G13, features H1 to H10, features It is also possible to apply the technical role ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I12, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K13, and features L1 to L9 individually, and each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A ball entry section (through gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
Acquisition means for acquiring determination information (normal pattern reservation information) based on the game ball entering the entering ball portion (function for executing through winning processing by main control device 162);
a storage means (reservation area for electrical work Rc) for storing the determination information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
determination is made as to whether or not the determination information stored in the storage means corresponds to the addition information; On the other hand, grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination (function for executing general figure propriety determination processing by main control device 162),
Based on the provision determination by the provision determination means, a game rotation operation is started by a predetermined notification means (accessory display unit 44), and a game is played as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means. The predetermined notifying means is controlled so that the game round motion of each game round is performed in accordance with the judgment information stored in the storage means, with the end of the round motion as one of the game rounds. Game round control means (function for executing the normal game round control process by the main control device 162),
with
The game round control means, when the number of determination information stored in the storage means is a first number, performs the game round operation more than when the number is a second number smaller than the first number. Execution period means for lengthening the execution period (When the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is 0, the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to 0.05 sec, and when the normal pattern reserved memory number FN is 4, the normal pattern fluctuation display time is set to 0.6 sec).

By storing judgment information separately from the game round that is being executed, the execution of judgment processing and game rounds after the next time is guaranteed, so in general, the more judgment information is stored, the more the game will continue It becomes possible to give a sense of security. Under such circumstances, the above-described configuration is configured such that the execution period of the game replay action increases as the number of pieces of determination information stored increases. For this reason, it is possible to maintain or increase the number of memories simply by continuing the natural firing operation. That is, since no special operation is required, even a non-skilled player can easily maintain or increase the number of memories, and anyone can play the game without worry.

Feature E2. In a predetermined case (when the number of normal figure pending storage FN is 1 or more), the second game state (second normal It is configured to be a game state, medium frequency support mode),
Means for continuing the second game state under the condition that, when the second game state is reached, the number of memories is equal to or more than a predetermined number equal to or less than the first number (normal pattern holding memory number FN is 1 or more The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it has a function of continuing the second normal game state or the medium frequency support state as long as it is.

When the number of memories reaches the first number, it is possible to easily maintain the number after that. The configuration is such that the second game state continues. In this case, it is possible to maintain the stored number with a margin for the predetermined number, which is the continuation condition of the second game state, and to easily continue the second game state. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to create an advantageous state in which it is difficult to get out of the game once it enters the game, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature E3. a specific ball-entering portion (second operation port 63) different from the ball-entering portion, into which a game ball can be entered;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry portion (function of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode for the second operation opening 63 by the main control device 162, payout control device 181 A prize ball function based on winning to the second operation port 63 by
with
The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein in the second gaming state, the difficulty level of ball entry into the specific ball-entering section is lower than in the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, by changing the game state from the first game state to the second game state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the specific ball entering portion, and it becomes easier to obtain a privilege based on the entering ball. That is, according to this configuration, the second game state can be stably continued, so that the state in which it is easy to obtain the privilege based on the ball entering the specific ball-entering portion can be easily continued. As a result, it is possible to favorably provide the opportunity to obtain the privilege, and the interest is improved.

Feature E4. As the execution period means, the average period of the execution period of the action for the game cycle set when the number of determination information is the first number is set to the second number of determination information. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, further comprising means for making the execution period of the game-playing motion longer than an average period set in the case of a number.

According to the above configuration, the execution period of the game-playing action is not extended only in special cases under the condition that the number of memories is the first number, but the number of memories is the first number throughout the entire game. As a result, the execution period of the game-playing motion becomes longer. That is, according to this configuration, the effect brought about by the configuration of the feature E1 is always ensured, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Feature E5. The execution period means executes the action for the game turn set when the number of stored judgment information is the second number and the number is the first number based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized by comprising means for setting an execution period longer than the average period of the periods (function for setting normal pattern fluctuation display time of 10 sec).

According to the above configuration, even when the memory number is the second number, the execution period of the game-playing action is lengthened by satisfying the predetermined condition. As a result, it is possible not only to suitably provide an opportunity to increase the memory number, but also to suppress the monotony of the game by diversifying the time length of the game-playing motion when the memory number is the second number. .

Feature E6. The ball-entering portion is provided as a first ball-entering portion,
a second ball-entering portion (first actuation opening 62) different from the first ball-entering portion, into which a game ball can be entered;
Second acquisition means for acquiring the second determination information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry portion (function for executing the winning process for the operation opening by the main controller 162);
A second storage means (second 1 result display area reservation area Ra);
Attachment determination is performed as to whether or not the second determination information stored in the second storage means corresponds to the attachment information, and if a plurality of pieces of second determination information are stored in the storage means, they are stored. Second grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination with respect to a plurality of second determination information (function for executing the propriety determination process for the first special figure by the main control device 162);
Based on the grant determination by the second grant determination means, a predetermined notification means or a notification means (symbol display device 75) different from the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) is used to start the second game rotation operation. As a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the second grant determination means, the end of the second game cycle operation is regarded as one game cycle, and according to the second determination information stored in the second storage means Second game round control means for controlling the predetermined notification means or the different notification means so that the second game round operation of each game round is performed (game round control processing for the first special figure by the main controller 162 function) and
with
When the number of second determination information stored in the second storage means is a first type number, the second game round control means is a second type number smaller than the first type number. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized by comprising means for shortening the execution period of the second game-turning action.

The above configuration is provided with a second lottery system in which the relationship between the number of memories and the time length of the action for game rotation is reversed. There are players who want to enjoy one game for a long time, and there are players who want a game that prioritizes time efficiency. can be done.

In applying the feature E6 to the feature E1, the "determination information", the "acquisition means", the "storage means", the "grant determination means", the "game-turn operation" and the "game-turn control means" of the characteristic E1 ' are respectively defined as ``first determination information'', ``first acquisition means'', ``first storage means'', ``first grant determination means'', ``first game round operation'', and ``first game round control means''. can be read as This is the same when applying feature E6 to features E2 to E5. Also, in applying the feature E6 to the feature E3, the "second ball-entering portion" of the feature E6 may be read as "the specific ball-entering portion".

Feature E7. The game spin control means executes a first game spin action as the game spin action,
The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein one of the first game-playing action and the second game-playing action is executed while the other is executable.

In the above configuration, since the first and second game-time motions can be executed in parallel, when an opportunity to execute the second game-time motion occurs during execution of the first game-time motion, In addition, the second game-play motion can be started without waiting for the end of the first game-play motion. Therefore, even if the execution period of the first game-playing operation is lengthened based on the number of stored first determination information becoming the first number, and the pace of the game progressing becomes slow, the game can be played. The inconvenience that the player has to wait for a long time for the start of the motion for the second game cycle is avoided, and the slow impression is suppressed.

Feature E8. The grant determination means is provided as a first grant determination means,
Characteristic E7 characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player to perform grant determination by the second grant determination means than to perform grant determination by the first grant determination means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the grant determination by the second grant determination means is more advantageous than that by the first grant determination means, so the player's mind is more likely to be directed to the second game turn motion. As a result, the player pays less attention to the first game-time motion, and even if the execution period of the first game-time motion becomes longer, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice it. Combined with the fact that the first game-playing motion and the second game-playing motion can be executed in parallel, it is possible to more preferably suppress giving an impression of sluggishness.

Feature E9. A shooting operation means (game ball shooting handle 41) for performing a predetermined shooting operation by a player;
Shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for shooting a game ball into a game area based on the execution of the predetermined shooting operation;
with
The shooting means shoots a game ball such that the game ball flows down a first area (left route) in the game area when a shooting operation is performed on the shooting operation means with a first operation amount. , when a shooting operation is performed on the shooting operation means with a second operation amount, the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down a second area (right route) in the game area;
The gaming machine according to feature E7 or E8, wherein the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section are provided in the first area.

According to the above configuration, if the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the first area, the game ball is naturally allowed to enter both the first ball entering part and the second ball entering part. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which only the action for the first game cycle is executed, and it is possible to preferably exhibit the effect of the feature E7 or E8.

For each configuration of the features E1 to E9, features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D8, features F1 to F14, features G1 to G13, features H1 to H10, features It is also possible to apply the technical role ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I12, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K13, and features L1 to L9 individually, and each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) capable of shooting a game ball;
a first ball-entering portion (second operating port 63) and a second ball-entering portion (through gate 35) into which game balls fired by the shooting means can enter;
It is possible to switch between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball can or easily enter and a second mode (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. a variable ball winning unit (second variable winning device 500);
A lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering section (a function of executing a special figure propriety determination process by the main control device 162);
Based on the lottery result of the lottery means becoming a predetermined result (special winning result), the variable ball entrance control is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then changed to the second mode. Variable ball entry control means to be executed (function for executing game state transition processing by main control device 162);
A special game for executing a special game (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the V jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of a specific event (V prize) that occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry portion. Execution means (function for executing game state transition processing by main control device 162);
with
As the game state, a first game state (first normal game state) and a second game state (second normal game state) in which the difficulty level of the game ball entering the first ball entering portion is relatively high and low are provided. has
Specific number means for changing specific numerical information (normal pattern reserved storage number FN) based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section (function to execute through winning processing by main controller 162) and,
Based on the value of the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value, the game state is the second game in which the difficulty of entering the ball into the first ball entering portion is lower than that of the first game state from the first game state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a state means (a function for setting the second normal game state when the number FN of holding memory for the normal pattern is 1 or more) for setting the state.

In the above configuration, the lottery process is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section, and the variable ball entry section is switched from the second state to the first state according to the result. A specific event can occur when a game ball enters the variable ball entry portion, and a special game is executed when the specific event occurs. For this reason, entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section is essential for causing the special game. Generally, in a gaming machine having a first game state and a second game state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entering portion, the first game is triggered by a special game result such as a big win. It is configured such that a transition from the state to the second game state occurs. In this case, since it is difficult to expect the ball to enter the first ball-entering section unless the special game result is obtained, the player's interest may be concentrated only on the special game result. It is feared that a player who cannot obtain a special game result will be forced to finish the game without experiencing true fun. In this regard, in this configuration, the specific numerical value information changes based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering portion, and the second game state is generated based on the value of the information becoming a predetermined value (predetermined number). is configured to be Therefore, it is possible to provide an opportunity to play a game in the second game state even if a special game result is not obtained, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience. Moreover, since the specific numerical information is configured to change according to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering portion, the player is given the impression that the occurrence of the second game state has been obtained by his own skill. It becomes easy to give it to, and improvement of interest is achieved.

Feature F2. The state means is means for temporarily changing the game state to the second game state (temporarily changing the second normal game state) based on the value of the specific numerical information becoming the predetermined value. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that it has a function to generate

According to the above configuration, since the second game state is only temporary, it is possible to add a restriction so as not to make the occurrence of the special game too simplistic or otherwise excessively advantageous. In addition, in this configuration, even if the second game state is entered, the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry portion and the occurrence of the specific event are not guaranteed. It is possible to play the game under the tension that the game may end, and it is possible to improve the amusement.

Feature F3. When the game state is the second game state, the state means is based on the fact that the value of the specific numerical information is less than the number as the predetermined value or a number smaller than the number as the predetermined value. means for making the game state become the first game state (the function of terminating the second normal game state based on the fact that the predetermined value is 1 and the normal figure reservation storage number FN becomes 0) The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, a configuration suitable for practical use of the configuration of the feature F1 or F2 can be obtained. Furthermore, according to this configuration, the execution period of the second game state is not predetermined, but fluidly changes according to the state of ball entry into the second ball entry section. That is, during the second game state, it is difficult for the player to predict how long the state will continue, so that the sense of tension can be further heightened, and the interest can be further improved.

Feature F4. Specific game execution means for executing a specific game (normal game round, normal game) based on the entry of the game ball to the second entering ball section (normal game round control processing by the main control device 162, normal game function to execute game state transition processing),
The specific number means is
Means for increasing the value of the specific numerical information based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering portion (function for executing through winning processing by the main controller 162);
Characteristic F3, characterized in that it comprises means for reducing the value of the specific numerical information based on the execution of the specific game (function for executing normal figure data setting processing by the main control device 162) game machine.

For example, if the player cannot or is difficult to grasp the regularity of the change of the specific numerical information, what should the player do to make the specific numerical information a predetermined value? It is feared that the player does not know what to expect, and that the game before the second game state becomes less interesting, or that the player is forced to grasp the game characteristics and the game method in advance. In this regard, in this configuration, after performing the specific game based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry part, It is configured to allocate an increase and a decrease in the value of the specific numerical information. This makes it easier for the player to perceive the regularity of the change in the specific numerical value information while playing the game, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature F5. The specific game execution means sets the execution period of the specific game to a period (10 sec or 10.5 sec. ) (a function of setting the normal pattern fluctuation display time to 10 sec).

According to the above configuration, the execution period of the specific game is made longer than the period corresponding to the firing cycle of the game ball, so that the ball entry interval of the game ball to the ball entry section becomes shorter than the execution interval of the specific game. , the change tendency of the specific numerical information is on the increase side. For this reason, it is possible to appropriately secure an opportunity for the specific numerical value information to reach the predetermined value, and to avoid the non-reaching state from being perpetuated.

Feature F6. When the game state is the second game state, the specific game execution means sets the execution period of the specific game to a period (0.05 sec or 0 55 sec) (function for setting the normal pattern fluctuation display time to 0.05 sec).

According to the above configuration, the execution period of the specific game is made shorter than the period corresponding to the firing cycle of the game ball, so that the execution interval of the specific game becomes shorter than the ball entry interval of the game ball into the ball entry section, The value of the specific numerical information becomes easier to decrease. As a result, after the value of the specific numerical information reaches the predetermined value and the second game state is entered, the value can be naturally decreased to return to the first game state. In this case, if the game ball is refrained from being fired, the frequency with which the game ball enters the ball entry portion becomes lower than when the shooting operation is continued. The game state ends early. As a result, the desire to perform the shooting operation is strongly aroused, and it is possible to favorably promote active participation in the game.

Feature F7. When the value of the specific numerical information reaches the predetermined value, the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) performs a predetermined notification (character display 522) to prompt execution of the firing operation. The gaming machine according to feature F6, further comprising notification control means for controlling the notification means (function for executing special effect processing by the notification/effect control device 143).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from refraining from the shooting operation without noticing that the value of the specific numerical information has reached the predetermined value, in other words, that the game state is the second game state. be. As a result, unreasonable early termination of the second game state is suppressed, and playability is improved.

Feature F8. A game ball fired by the shooting means can be entered, and a third ball entry section (first operation opening 62) different from the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section is provided,
The lottery means is configured to execute a lottery process based on occurrence of a game ball entering either the second ball entering section or the third ball entering section,
As the game state, the first type game state (low frequency support mode) and the second type game state (high frequency support mode) in which the difficulty of entering the ball into the first ball section is lower than the first type game state. has
The game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state based on the fact that the result of the lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the third ball entering portion is a specific result (jackpot result). Game state transition means for transition (function for executing transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode by the main control device 162),
The first game state includes the first game state and the second game state, and the second game state is more likely to enter the first ball entering section than the second game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that the difficulty of entering a ball is low.

According to the above configuration, the specific numerical information In addition to the first route that is triggered when the value of . As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode of transition to an advantageous game state, and to expand the range of ways to enjoy the game. Furthermore, since the first game state includes the second game state, it is possible to provide an opportunity to play a game in a state in which the game ball can easily enter the first ball-entering portion even if no special game result is obtained. In addition, the degree of advantage in the second game state transitioning through the first route (ease of ball entry into the first ball entry section) is kept lower than that in the second game state transitioning through the second route. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to expand opportunities to play games in a state in which the game ball easily enters the first ball entry portion while suppressing the reduction in the attractiveness of winning the specific result.

Feature F9. A passage portion through which a game ball can pass is provided as the second ball entry portion,
The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein a game ball that has passed through the passing portion can enter the third ball entering portion.

According to the above configuration, the game ball can be entered into the third ball entering portion while passing through the passing portion. In this case, there are two types of games: one is a game in which the game ball is passed through the passage portion and the specific numerical information is aimed to reach a predetermined value, and the other is a game in which the game ball is entered in the third ball entry portion and the game is aimed at winning the specific result. It is possible to run in parallel. As a result, a plurality of types of games with different game characteristics can be enjoyed at the same time, and the amusement is improved.

Feature F10. The gaming machine according to feature F8 or F9, wherein the probability of a game ball entering the second ball entering section is higher than the probability of a game ball entering the third ball entering section.

According to the above configuration, the entry of the game ball to the second ball entry part is simplified compared to the entry of the game ball to the third ball entry part, so that the former is made routine and the game to the second ball entry part is performed. It can reduce the attention of the person. Accordingly, it is possible to make it easier for the player to turn his or her attention to the third ball-entering section, and as a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the specific numerical information has reached a predetermined value and the process up to that point. . As a result, the impression that the second game state has suddenly occurred can be easily given to the player, and the surprise and joy of the player can be suitably realized.

Feature F11. Based on the fact that the value of the specific numerical information becomes the predetermined value, the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the predetermined notification means (the pattern display device 75) performs the specific notification (character displays 523, 525). The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, characterized by comprising specific notification control means (function for executing special effect processing by the notification/effect control device 143).

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to easily notice that the specific numerical value information has reached a predetermined value, in other words, that the game state has changed to the second game state. Note that when this feature is applied to feature F10, it is possible to encourage the player's awareness while the player's consciousness tends to be directed to the third ball-entering section, and the effect of this feature is more beneficial. can be

Feature F12. A first result and a second result different from the first result are set as the predetermined result,
The variable ball entry control means executes the variable ball entry control in a first mode (high distribution mode) based on the lottery result of the lottery means becoming the first result (advantageous special winning result), Means ( A function to execute the big winning opening opening and closing process by the main control device 162),
Feature F1 characterized in that the possibility of occurrence of the specific event differs between when the variable ball entry control is executed in the first mode and when the variable ball entry control is executed in the second mode. The game machine according to any one of F11.

According to the above configuration, since the likelihood of occurrence of the specific event changes according to the execution mode of the variable entrance control, the result of the lottery process based on the entrance of the game ball to the first ball entrance section, the variable entrance The player's interest in the execution mode of ball control is heightened, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F13. Distributing means (shutter 508 ),
When the variable ball entry control is executed in the first mode, the specific game ball is more likely to be distributed to the first area than the second area by the distribution means, and the variable ball entry control is performed in the first area. When executed in two modes, the specific game ball is more easily distributed to the second area than the first area by the distributing means,
The gaming machine according to feature F12, wherein the specific event is caused by allocating the specific game ball to the first area.

According to the above configuration, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entering portion, the specific event does not necessarily occur. As a result, the player is relieved when the game ball enters the variable ball entry portion, and the subsequent loss of interest in the game ball is suppressed, thereby increasing the attention to the game. In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature F2 through the feature F12, it is possible to further heighten the sense of tension that the second game state may end without the occurrence of the specific event. As a result, the feeling of accomplishment and fulfillment when the specific event occurs is enhanced, and it becomes possible to contribute to the further enhancement of interest.

In these cases, a further feature that "the player can visually recognize the sorting means" may be added. As a result, the player can visually grasp the state of the sorting means, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering portion. Also, in place of or in addition to the above additional feature, a feature of "at least part of the first area is visible to the player" may be added. As a result, the player can visually grasp whether or not the game ball that entered the variable ball entry portion has been distributed to the first area, and the degree of attention to the game ball that entered the variable ball entry portion is suitable. can be increased to

Feature F14. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) capable of shooting a game ball;
a first ball-entering portion (second operating port 63) and a second ball-entering portion (through gate 35) into which game balls fired by the shooting means can enter;
It is possible to switch between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball can or easily enter and a second mode (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. a variable ball winning unit (second variable winning device 500);
A lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering section (a function of executing a special figure propriety determination process by the main control device 162);
Based on the lottery result of the lottery means becoming a predetermined result (special winning result), the variable ball entrance control is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then changed to the second mode. Variable ball entry control means to be executed (function for executing game state transition processing by main control device 162);
A special game for executing a special game (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the V jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of a specific event (V prize) that occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry portion. Execution means (function for executing game state transition processing by main control device 162);
with
As game states, there are a first game state (first normal game state) and a second game state (second normal game state) in which the likelihood of occurrence of the specific event is different,
Specific number means for changing specific numerical information (normal pattern reserved storage number FN) based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section (function to execute through winning processing by main controller 162) and,
Based on the value of the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value, the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state in which the specific event is more likely to occur than in the first game state. A game machine characterized by comprising state means (a function for setting a second normal game state when the number FN of holding memory for a normal pattern is 1 or more).

According to the above configuration, an effect similar to that of the feature F1 is expected. Note that each configuration described in any one of the features F2 to F13 may be applied to the feature F14.

For each configuration of the features F1 to F14, features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features G1 to G13, features H1 to H10, features It is also possible to apply the technical role ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I12, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K13, and features L1 to L9 individually, and each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (fourth operation port 720, fifth operation port 730) into which the game ball fired by the shooting means can enter;
Special information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering section;
special information storage means (holding ball storage area 642) for storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as the upper limit;
A variable entry switchable between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter and a second mode (closed state) in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the first mode. ball means (lower variable winning device 700, upper variable winning device 710);
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control to the second mode (the main controller 162 performs the big winning opening opening and closing process function) and
Transition determining means ( A function of executing the first special figure fluctuation start process and the second special figure fluctuation start process by the main controller 162),
Game state transition means (main a function of executing game state transition processing by the control device 162;
Payout means (payout control device 181) for paying out a specific number of game balls based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising
a special ball entry section (through gate 35) into which game balls launched by the launching means can enter;
Receiving means (electric accessory) displaceable between a first state (receiving state) for receiving a game ball to the starting ball entry portion and a second state (non-receiving state) in which the game ball is more difficult to receive than the first state 66) and
has
A process performed based on the game ball entering the special ball entering section, comprising a specific means for executing a specific process related to the control of the receiving means,
As the transition response result, a first transition response result (jackpot result) so that the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and a second transition response that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first transition response result. Result (special hit result) and are set,
A special game state (easy winning state in the fourth embodiment) is set in which the determination result by the transition determination means is more likely to be the second transition corresponding result than in the normal game state,
The specifying means, based on the specified processing, state means for causing the game state to become the special game state (in the main control device 162, the variable display time when the normal figure reservation storage number FN is 4 A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing a setting process).

According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the special ball entering portion, the acceptance rate of the game ball to the starting ball entering portion can be improved. In a configuration in which a transition is made to a special state in which a game ball can be entered into the ball means, and prize balls based on the entered ball are paid out by the payout means, the special state has a relatively high or low advantage. A transition correspondence result (so-called big winning result) and a second transition corresponding result (so-called small winning result) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first transition corresponding result are set, and a special game state in which the small winning result is likely to occur. is set, even if it does not result in a big hit like a conventional game machine, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by variable ball entry control based on the result of a small hit that can occur frequently. sexuality is realized.

On the other hand, if it is configured to shift to a special game state that is likely to result in such a small hit, based on the result of the transition determination as to whether the result will be a big hit or a small hit, the conventional method of waiting for the big hit result There is not much difference from the game performance of , and it can be a game performance lacking in novelty. Moreover, if it is configured to shift to the special game state according to the result of the transition determination, normally, it will shift to the special game state via the variable ball entry control, so the variable ball entry control based on the jackpot result is particularly effective. If it is intervened, there is a possibility that it will be difficult to feel the value of the special game state, which makes it easier to shift to a more disadvantageous special state.

Therefore, as in the above configuration, it is possible to shift to the special game state regardless of the result of the transition determination, It is possible to provide novel game characteristics that are completely different from conventional game characteristics.

Regarding the first transition response result and the second transition response result, "as the transition response result, the degree of advantage for the player of the control mode of the variable ball entry control performed during the special state is relatively high or low. A first transition response result (jackpot result) and a second transition response result (special winning result) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first transition response result are set so that can be expressed. In addition, "the special state is set so that a round game can be performed a predetermined number of times, with one end condition being that a predetermined number (10) of game balls have entered. "," and "as the transition response result, a first transition response result (jackpot result) in which the round game can be performed multiple times, and a second transition response result in which the round game is performed once (special winning result) and are set, and may be expressed as ".

Feature G2. The identifying means, as a means for executing the identifying process,
Acceptance information acquisition means for acquiring acceptance information based on the game ball entering the special ball entering section (function for executing through winning processing by the main controller 162);
acceptance information storage means (electrical work holding area 643) for storing the acceptance information acquired by the acceptance information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
acceptance control means (a function of executing electric support processing by the main controller 162) for executing acceptance control to change the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
For the acceptance information stored in the acceptance information storage means, acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the acceptance control is to be performed by the acceptance control means a function to execute the pass/fail judgment process);
with
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the means for state changes the game state to the special game state based on at least a part of the specific processing.

According to the above configuration, the specific configuration of the specific process is clarified in the configuration of feature G1.

Feature G3. The means for state, compared with the normal game state, the acceptance determination result of the acceptance determination means so as not to change the probability of becoming an acceptance result that causes the acceptance control to be performed by the acceptance control means The game machine according to feature G2, characterized in that it is in a special game state.

According to the above configuration, the game state becomes the special game state without changing the probability that the result of the acceptance determination by the acceptance determination means is the acceptance result. By doing so, the degree of freedom when entering the special game state is improved. In other words, when changing the probability of acceptance judgment, it is preferable from the viewpoint of transparency of the game to change the result of the transition judgment side as a trigger. If the change is made, eventually, the game performance may not be so different from the conventional game in which the result of the transition determination is awaited. Therefore, as in the above configuration, if it is configured to be in a special game state without requiring a change in the probability of acceptance determination, the relationship with the transition determination side can be weakened, and the acceptance determination side can take its own route It is possible to enter a special game state.

Feature G4. The feature G2 or feature G3, characterized in that the means for the state sets the special game state so that the mode of the acceptance control by the acceptance control means does not change compared to the normal game state. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the game state becomes the special game state without changing the mode of acceptance control. By doing so, the degree of freedom when entering the special game state is improved. In other words, when the mode of acceptance control differs between the normal game state and the special game state, it is preferable from the viewpoint of the transparency of the game to change the result of the transition determination side as a trigger, and on that premise, the special game state In this case, if the mode of acceptance control is changed, eventually the game performance may not be much different from the conventional game in which the result of the transition determination is awaited. Therefore, as in the above configuration, if it is configured to be in a special game state without requiring a change in the mode of acceptance control, the relationship with the transition determination side can be reduced, and the unique route of the acceptance determination side , it is possible to enter a special game state.

Feature G5. Based on the transition determination by the transition determination means, a game round effect is started by a predetermined effect means, and after the effect period elapses, a result corresponding to the result of the transition determination is reported, and the game round effect is performed. A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process by the main control device 162) for ending the
When the game round production is performed by the game round control means, production period setting means for setting the production period according to the result of the transition determination (function for executing the variable display time setting process by the main controller 162) and,
with
According to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that when the special game state is set by the state means, the effect period set by the effect period setting means does not change from the normal game state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the special game state is likely to result in a so-called small winning result as a result of the second transition correspondence, the length of the presentation period of the game round presentation associated with each transition determination does not change from that in the normal game state. When creating a special game state in which a small winning result is more likely to occur than in a normal game state, for example, the performance period of a game round performance in which a small winning result is likely to occur in the normal game state is lengthened so that the game round performance does not end. It is also conceivable to make it possible to receive the benefit of the small winning result by shortening the performance period of the game round performance that results in the small winning result in the special game state while preventing the benefit of the small winning result. However, with such a configuration, even if the player tries to end the game, there are scenes where the game round production based on the result of the small win is not completed due to the longer production period in the normal game state as described above. There may also be a problem that it becomes difficult to quit because the number of users increases. Therefore, as in the above-described configuration, the above-described problem does not occur if a configuration is adopted in which it is easy to receive the benefit of the small winning result without using the length of the performance period of the game round performance.

Feature G6. Based on the specific process, means for ending the special game state to the normal game state (in the main control device 162, setting the variable display time when the number FN of the normal game reservation storage is 3 or less A game machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, the special game state is entered based on the specific processing relating to the control of the receiving means, and the special game state ends based on the specific processing. By doing so, the processing on the side of the starting ball-entering section is not involved in the transition to and termination of the special game state, and it is possible to take a completely independent route on the side of the receiving means.

Feature G7. The identifying means, as a means for executing the identifying process,
Acceptance information acquisition means for acquiring acceptance information based on the game ball entering the special ball entering section (function for executing through winning processing by the main controller 162);
acceptance information storage means (electrical work holding area 643) for storing the acceptance information acquired by the acceptance information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
acceptance control means for executing acceptance control to change the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (a function of executing electric support processing by the main controller 162);
For the acceptance information stored in the acceptance information storage means, acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the acceptance control is to be performed by the acceptance control means a function to execute the pass/fail judgment process);
with
The means for state is for changing the game state to the special game state based on at least a part of the specific processing,
Any one of the characteristics G1 to G6, wherein the means for state is for making the special game state by using the number of the information for acceptance stored in the means for storing the acceptance information. The gaming machine described in .

In a game in which acceptance information is acquired based on the ball entering the special ball entry section and acceptance judgment is made based on the acceptance information, the acceptance information waiting for acceptance judgment (waiting for digestion) is stored as acceptance information. It becomes the information for acceptance stored in the means, and if the balance between the speed of entering the special ball entrance section and the digestion of the information for acceptance tilts toward the entrance side, the number of memories increases, and if it tilts toward the digestion side, the number of memories increases. Decrease. Based on this premise, with the above configuration, it is possible to shift to the special game state by utilizing the balance between the speed of entering the ball into the special ball entry section and the digestion of the information for acceptance, and the special entry. It is possible to greatly increase interest in entering the ball and digesting information for acceptance.

Feature G8. When the shooting operation by the player is in a predetermined mode, the game ball shot from the shooting means reaches the special ball entry section,
The means for the state, in the situation that the firing operation of the predetermined mode is continued, a predetermined condition (normal figure retention storage number FN is 1 to 3 in the situation that a long fluctuation display time is selected ) is established, means for facilitating the number of the acceptance information stored in the acceptance information storage means to become a predetermined specific number (4). function to execute processing to obtain information),
The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the special game state can be entered when the number of the reception information stored in the reception information storage means reaches the specific number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of acceptance information stored in the acceptance information storage means reaches a specific number, a special game state is entered in which a so-called small winning result is likely to occur. In this case, since the configuration does not reach the specific number unless the predetermined condition is satisfied while the firing operation in the predetermined manner is continued, the continuation of the firing operation in the predetermined manner is encouraged. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a so-called stopping shot, in which firing and stopping are repeated, or a firing operation aimed at a location unintended by the designer.

Feature G9. Based on the acceptance determination by the acceptance determination means, the acceptance performance is started by the predetermined performance means, and after the acceptance performance period has elapsed, the result corresponding to the acceptance determination result is notified and the acceptance performance is performed. Acceptance effect control means to end (function to execute normal figure game round control processing by the main control device 162),
When the acceptance effect by the acceptance effect control means is performed, the acceptance effect period setting means for setting the acceptance effect period according to the result of the acceptance determination (the main controller 162 sets the normal pattern fluctuation display time function) and
with
The means for status determines that the predetermined acceptance effect period is set by the acceptance effect period setting means as the establishment of the predetermined condition, and can cause the acceptance information storage means to store the specific number of the information for acceptance. The gaming machine according to feature G8, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the number of pieces of information for acceptance stored in the acceptance information storage means changes according to the setting of the acceptance effect period of the acceptance effect based on the acceptance determination, and a specific number of pieces of information are stored. In this way, it is possible to shift to the special game state by setting the reception performance period, and by making good use of the existing configuration, it is possible to realize a novel game property without requiring a large design change.

Feature G10. Characteristic feature G8 characterized in that the number of the receiving information stored in the receiving information storage means can become the specific number by continuing the firing operation in the predetermined mode when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Or the gaming machine according to feature G9.

According to the above configuration, the special game state is not entered simply by satisfying the predetermined condition, and the special game state is not entered unless the shooting operation of the predetermined mode is continued. By doing so, the player's game operation (shooting operation) and the transition of the game state are closely associated with each other compared to a configuration in which the game machine shifts by a one-sided lottery, and interest is enhanced.

Feature G11. The means for the state, in a situation in which the firing operation of the predetermined mode is continued, a predetermined condition (normal figure retention memory number FN is 1 to 3 in the situation that a long fluctuation display time has been selected ) is not established, the means for limiting the number of the acceptance information stored in the acceptance information storage means from reaching the specified number (relationship between the short fluctuation display time on the general map side and the firing cycle) The game machine according to any one of features G8 to G10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature G8 can be more favorably exhibited. More specifically, since the number of pieces of acceptance information stored is restricted to a specific number without satisfying the prescribed condition, the special game state is not entered without the prescribed condition being established. As a result, it is possible to avoid the event of entering a special game state in a route not intended by the designer, and to suppress the act of intentionally creating the route.

Feature G12. In the special game state, the special game state continues in a situation where the number of the acceptance information stored in the acceptance information storage means is a predetermined number (3) or more. The gaming machine according to any one of features G7 to G11.

According to the above configuration, even after the special game state is established using the number of stored information for acceptance, the special game state ends unless the number of stored information is maintained at a predetermined number or more. In this way, by associating the start condition and continuation condition of the special game state with the number of pieces of information for acceptance stored, it is possible to make a novel game by making good use of the processing information on the acceptance determination side.

In addition, when applying the "predetermined number" to the feature G8, more specifically, it may be expressed as "a predetermined number that is smaller than the specific number."

Feature G13. Means for causing an event to reduce the number of the acceptance information stored in the acceptance information storage means based on the result of the migration determination by the migration determination means (execution of the main controller 162 for opening and closing the big winning gate) The game machine according to any one of features G8 to G12, characterized by comprising a function of

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a special game state occurs when the number of stored information for acceptance increases (becomes a specific number), the number of stored information for acceptance can decrease depending on the result of transition determination. Therefore, regarding the number of pieces of acceptance information stored, not only the speed balance between the entry of a ball into the special ball entry section and the digestion of the acceptance information, but also the result of the transition determination can be involved, which leads to the diversification of games. be done.

For each configuration of the features G1 to G13, features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F14, features H1 to H10, features It is also possible to apply the technical role ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I12, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K13, and features L1 to L9 individually, and each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (fifth operation port 730) into which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter;
Special information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering section;
special information storage means (holding ball storage area 642) for storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as the upper limit;
Regarding the special information stored in the special information storage means, grant determination means (first special figure fluctuation start processing and second special figure fluctuation start processing by main controller 162) a function to execute the validity determination process in the fluctuation start process);
Privilege granting means (game by main controller 162) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player function to execute state transition processing),
a special ball entry section (through gate 35) into which game balls launched by the launching means can enter;
Receiving means (electric accessory) displaceable between a first state (receiving state) for receiving a game ball to the starting ball entry portion and a second state (non-receiving state) in which the game ball is more difficult to receive than the first state 66) and
Acceptance information acquisition means for acquiring acceptance information based on the game ball entering the special ball entering section (function for executing through winning processing by the main controller 162);
acceptance information storage means (electrical work holding area 643) for storing the acceptance information acquired by the acceptance information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
acceptance control means for executing acceptance control to change the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (a function of executing electric support processing by the main controller 162);
For the acceptance information stored in the acceptance information storage means, acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the acceptance control is to be performed by the acceptance control means a function to execute the pass/fail judgment process);
with
A first mode in which a game ball can be entered into the special ball entry portion at a position where the game ball fired by the launching means reaches earlier than the special ball entry portion (for example, if the upper variable winning device 710 closed state), and a second mode (for example, the upper variable winning device 710 is open state) in which the game ball cannot be entered into the special ball entry portion or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. A gaming machine characterized in that a movable accessory (for example, an upper variable winning device 710) is provided.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which acceptance control is performed in which the rate of ball entry into the starting ball entry section where determination of awarding of benefits is performed based on the ball entry into the special ball entry section is changed, the special ball entry section If the movable accessory is in the first mode, the ball is allowed to enter the special ball-entering section. Entry into the ball is restricted. Therefore, the rate of ball entry into the starting ball entry section changes not only according to the result of the acceptance determination based on the entry into the special ball entry section, but also according to the state of the movable accessory. In this way, for example, even if the probability that the result of the acceptance determination results in the execution of the acceptance control does not change, the change in the state of the movable accessory causes the rate of ball entry into the special ball section, that is, the acceptance determination. It is possible to change the execution frequency, and it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such as changing the ball entry rate to the starting ball entry section without changing the probability of acceptance determination or the mode of acceptance control. .

Feature H2. The movable accessory and the special ball-entering portion are provided such that the distance between the movable accessory and the special ball-entering portion is less than the diameter of the game ball when the movable accessory is in the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature H1.

According to the above configuration, when the movable accessory is in the second state, the phenomenon of the game ball slipping between the movable accessory and the special ball-entering portion and entering the special ball-entering portion does not occur. become. As a result, when changing the execution frequency of the acceptance determination according to the state change of the movable accessory, it is possible to avoid the execution frequency different from the designed one due to the falling of the game ball.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, wherein the acceptance determination means is configured to be able to perform the acceptance determination even when the movable accessory is in the second mode.

According to the above configuration, if the movable accessory is in the second mode, the ball does not enter the special ball entrance section, and although the acceptance information is not acquired, the acceptance determination is performed. Therefore, the acceptance information storage means Only the digestion of the acceptance information stored in the memory is performed, and the replenishment is not performed. By doing so, for example, when it is desired to reduce the number of information for acceptance stored in the acceptance information storage means, the number of information for acceptance can be reduced by setting the movable role in the second mode. It is possible to adjust using objects.

Feature H4. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the movable accessory periodically operates in the first mode and the second mode from a predetermined start trigger.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the ball-entering rate to the special ball-entering portion changes due to the movement of the movable accessory, the operation timing of the movable accessory is periodic, so it is compared with the non-periodic one. As a result, the transparency of the game is guaranteed. That is, if it is non-periodic, for example, the movable accessory suddenly changes to the second mode and special If an event disadvantageous to the player occurs, such as the ball being blocked from entering the ball-entering section, it may cause a sense of distrust that the movement of the movable role is intentionally set up. do not have. Therefore, by making the operation periodic as in the above configuration, it is possible to change the rate of ball entry into the special ball entry section without giving the player a sense of distrust.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the period in which the movable accessory operates in the first mode and the second mode is a period shorter than the period in which the game ball is shot by the shooting means.

According to the above configuration, since the operation cycle of the movable accessory is shorter than the firing cycle, it is difficult to aim for the state where the movable accessory is in the first mode and the ball can be entered into the special ball-entering section. can do.

In addition, regarding the "period in which the movable accessory moves between the first mode and the second mode", "the period in which the movable accessory moves from the first mode to the second mode, the first mode It can also be expressed as "the cycle until it operates to

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the movable accessory is in the second mode when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means.

According to the above configuration, when it is determined that the award is granted based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section, the movable accessory is in the second mode, so the pleasure of being granted the privilege and the sadness of not being able to enter the special ball-entering section at the same time can be provided through the grant determination. By doing so, in particular, when the ball does not enter the special ball entering section, the acceptance judgment will not be performed, so as a result, the ball entering the starting ball entering section will also decrease, and the next time As a result, the privilege grant of is far away. In this way, by making good use of the relationship between the award judgment based on the entry into the starting ball entry section and the entry rate into the special entry section, the image of the privilege given based on the result of the award judgment It can be made new and unconventional.

Feature H7. When the movable accessory is in the second mode, a game ball can be entered, and when it is in the first mode, a game ball is less likely to enter than in the second mode. has a winning opening 710a),
Characteristic feature H6 characterized by comprising a payout means (payout control device 181) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion of the movable accessory. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter the game ball into the ball entry portion of the movable accessory based on the award of the privilege by the privilege granting means, and to obtain the prize ball of payout of the predetermined number of game balls. be able to. Therefore, based on the granting of benefits, balls will not enter the special ball section, but balls will enter the movable accessory, and information for acceptance will not be acquired, but prize balls will be obtained. It becomes possible. By doing so, it is possible to strike a balance between the loss of the ball not entering the special ball-entering portion and the benefit obtained by the movable accessary being in the second mode.

Feature H8. Based on the granting of the privilege by the privilege granting means, the movable accessory is changed from the first mode to the second mode, and thereafter, the unit motion to be changed to the first mode is performed a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to feature H7, characterized in that it is configured to transition to a specific game state that becomes executable.

According to the above configuration, when shifting to the specific game state, a plurality of unit actions are performed. In this case, since there is a timing in which the movable accessory becomes the first mode between the unit motions, the ball entering the special ball-entering section is more difficult than the configuration in which the second mode is maintained. There is room for it to occur. As a result, it is possible to cause a ball to enter the special ball-entering section while paying out prize balls as a privilege.

Feature H9. The gaming machine according to feature H8, wherein a waiting period between the unit actions during the specific game state may be longer than a game ball shooting cycle by the shooting means.

According to the above configuration, even during the special game state in which the movable accessory is in the second mode, a ball can enter the special ball-entering section during the waiting period between unit actions. becomes. As a result, the entry of the ball into the movable accessory, which triggers the payout of prize balls as a bonus, and the entry of the ball into the special ball section, which triggers the acquisition of information for acceptance, are performed at different times during the specific game state. each can be generated.

Feature H10. During the specific game state, after the movable accessory changes from the first mode to the second mode in one unit motion, the movable accessory changes from the first mode to the second mode in the next unit motion. The period until it becomes two modes is predetermined,
The movable accessory operates to the first mode when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball-entering portion of the movable accessory after being in the second mode. The gaming machine of characterizing feature H9.

According to the above configuration, since the period from the second mode to the next second mode is fixed, the predetermined number of balls entered as early as possible after the movable accessory changes to the second mode. is generated to set the first mode, the period of the first mode becomes longer. In other words, the earlier a predetermined number of balls are made to enter the movable accessory, the easier it is to cause the ball to enter the special ball-entering portion later. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game property in which the ball entering the movable accessory and the ball entering the special ball entering portion are associated with each other during the specific game state.

For each configuration of the features H1 to H10, features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F14, features G1 to G13, features It is also possible to apply the technical role ideas shown in the configuration of any one of I1 to I12, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K13, and features L1 to L9 individually, and each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. Variable ball entry means (upper variable winning device 710) capable of switching between a first mode (open state) in which game balls can enter and a second mode (closed state) in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first mode )and,
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 162) function) and
Specific state transition means (game by main controller 162) for shifting the game state to a specific state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry means based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition function to execute state transition processing),
Payout means (payout control device 181) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
In a gaming machine comprising
Based on the variable ball entry means being set to the first mode by the variable ball entry control means, it is possible to cause a specific event that is more disadvantageous than when the variable ball entry means is not set to the first mode. A game machine characterized by having a possible specific event means (a function of executing a normal game turn control process by the main controller 162).

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means that controls opening and closing like a so-called electric chew or an attacker, the variable ball entry means is the first. Aspects can occur that are more disadvantageous with the aspect than without the first aspect. In other words, when the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, it is possible to obtain prize balls, but a specific disadvantageous phenomenon occurs, so the player has complex feelings of happiness and sadness. can be. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game property that is greatly different from the conventional game property of simply obtaining a prize ball based on the result of a big win.

It should be noted that "specific event means (main controller) capable of causing a specific event that is disadvantageous to the player based on the variable ball entry means being set to the first mode by the variable ball entry control means. 162)", the variable ball entry means is set to the first mode by the variable ball entry control means. It may be expressed as "specific event means that can cause a specific event that is more disadvantageous than when it is not taken as one mode (the function of executing the normal game round control process by the main controller 162)".

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the specific event means causes the specific event during the specific state in which the variable ball-entering means is in the first mode.

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs during the specific state, and compared with the configuration in which the disadvantageous event occurs after the specific state, the complex emotions of happiness and sadness shown in feature I1 are more easily expressed. It is possible to hold it comfortably. In other words, the variable ball entering means is in the first mode, and a game ball is entered into the variable ball entering means to obtain a prize, but at the same time, a disadvantageous specific event occurs. By doing so, it is possible to realistically experience the occurrence of a specific phenomenon that is disadvantageous while winning a prize ball, and it is possible to make the game feel novel.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the specific event means causes the specific event according to the length of the period in which the variable ball-entering means is in the first mode.

According to the above configuration, a specific event can occur depending on the length of the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the first mode and the winning ball is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to more closely associate specific events that are disadvantageous to the player if the number of winning balls obtained is large or small.

Feature I4. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the specific event means is more likely to cause the specific event as the period in which the variable ball-entering means is in the first mode is longer.

According to the above configuration, the more prize balls that can be obtained, the more likely the specific event disadvantageous to the player will occur. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously provide contradictory feelings such as a feeling of being pleased with the number of prize balls and a feeling of sadness that the more the number of prize balls, the more disadvantageous specific events are likely to occur, and a game with a novel sense. can be gender.

Feature I5. The specific event means is capable of preventing the specific event from occurring when the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the first mode is shorter than a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or feature I4.

According to the above configuration, when the period in which the first mode is set is shorter than the predetermined period, the specific event disadvantageous to the player does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent a specific disadvantageous event from occurring even when the number of prize balls to be obtained is small, and to avoid an event that would be extremely disadvantageous to the player.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the predetermined period is longer than a game ball shooting cycle.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined period is a period during which at least one ball can enter the variable ball entering means. In other words, there is a scene where the specific event does not occur even though the prize ball is obtained. By doing so, it is possible to provide a specific state in which a specific event occurs and a specific event in which a specific event does not occur while awarding prize balls, thereby greatly contributing to the diversification of games.

Feature I7. Privilege giving means (main control device 162 function to execute normal game round control processing),
A high granting state (easy win state) and a low granting state (normal game state) are set so that the easiness of granting the privilege by the privilege granting means is relatively high and low,
Provided state setting means for changing from the high grant state to the low grant state and from the low grant state to the high grant state (general figure holding storage number FN stored in the electric officer holding area 643),
The grant state setting means is configured to be the high grant state or the low grant state independently of the specific state transition means,
The predetermined granting condition can be established during the specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, wherein the specific event is an event in which the high grant state transitions to the low grant state during the specific state.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined granting condition can be satisfied even during the specific state, the likelihood of fulfillment of the predetermined granting condition during the specific state changes during the specific state. By doing so, in one specific state, it is possible to change the easiness of giving a privilege without changing the easiness of entering a ball into the variable ball-entering means, thereby creating a novel specific state. becomes possible.

Feature I8. Equipped with a special ball entry section (through gate 35) that allows game balls to enter,
The imparted state setting means is capable of continuing the high imparted state on condition that the ball enters the special ball-entering portion at a predetermined frequency,
The gaming machine according to feature I7, wherein the specific event occurs due to a decrease in the frequency of ball entry into the special ball entry section during the specific state.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the high award state continues as long as the ball enters the special ball-entering portion at a predetermined frequency, when the frequency of entering the special ball-entering portion decreases during the specific state, a specific event occurs. It will be in a low grant state. In this way, by associating the specific event and the high award state/low award state with an event that is easy for the player to recognize, such as entering a ball into the special ball entry section, the degree of comprehension of the game is improved, and thus the feature I1 It is possible to fully enjoy the novel playability of.

Feature I9. The special ball-entering unit is capable of entering a ball when the variable ball-entering means is in the second mode, and when the variable ball-entering means is in the first mode, the special ball-entering section is in the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature I8, characterized in that it has a structure in which it is difficult to enter a ball.

According to the above configuration, in the specific state, when the variable ball-entering means is in the first mode and ball-entering becomes possible, it becomes difficult to enter the special ball-entering portion, and the frequency of entering a ball is reduced. In this way, by using the displacement of the variable ball-entering means for the frequency of entering the special ball-entering section, the variable ball-entering means can be used not only for obtaining prize balls in a specific state, but also for the special ball-entering section. There is no need to newly set up a structure to change the frequency of entering the ball on the side of the special entering section. It is possible to reduce the installation area.

Features I10. Variable ball entry means (lower variable winning device 700) capable of switching between a first mode (open state) in which game balls can enter and a second mode (closed state) in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first mode , upper variable winning device 710),
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (executing the big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 162) function) and
Specific state transition means (game by main controller 162) for shifting the game state to a specific state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry means based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition function to execute state transition processing),
Payout means (payout control device 181) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
In a gaming machine comprising
Having a plurality of variable ball entry means,
The variable ball entry control means includes a first means for performing the variable ball entry control by a first variable ball entry means (lower variable winning device 700) among the plurality of variable ball entry means in the specific state, and a plurality of A second means for performing the variable ball entry control by a second variable ball entry means (upper variable winning device 710) different from the first variable ball entry means of the variable ball entry means, the first means and the setting means for setting which of the second means to perform the variable ball entry control (function for executing the big winning opening opening and closing process by the main controller 162);
A specific event that is disadvantageous to the player is not caused when the variable ball entry control is performed by the first means by setting the variable ball entry means to the first mode, while the second means A game machine characterized by comprising a specific event generation means (a function of executing a normal game turn control process by the main controller 162) that can be generated when the variable ball entry control is performed.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means that controls opening and closing like a so-called electric chew or an attacker, the first variable ball entry means Although a specific event disadvantageous to the player does not occur in the first mode, the same specific event may occur when the second variable ball entry means is in the first mode. In other words, when the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, it is possible to obtain a prize ball, but the variable ball entry means in the first mode may or may not cause a disadvantageous specific event. As a result, although it is basically happy that the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, depending on the variable ball entry means that is in the first mode, the player has complex emotions that are intricately mixed with the happy feeling and the sad feeling. can be a thing. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game property that is greatly different from the conventional game property of simply obtaining a prize ball based on the result of a big win.

Feature I11. Variable ball entry means (upper variable winning device 710) capable of switching between a first mode (open state) in which game balls can enter and a second mode (closed state) in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first mode )and,
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control of the second mode (execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 162) function) and
Specific state transition means (game by main controller 162) for shifting the game state to a specific state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry means based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition function to execute state transition processing),
Payout means (payout control device 181) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
In a gaming machine comprising
The variable ball-entering control means is capable of maintaining the variable ball-entering means in the first state for a first period in the predetermined specific state, can be maintained as the first mode over a second period shorter than
The case where the variable ball entry means is maintained as the first mode over the second period is better than the case where the variable ball entry means is maintained as the first mode over the first period. , a gaming machine that is advantageous to the player.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that a ball can be entered into the variable ball entering means by changing the variable ball entering means to the first mode, and prize balls are paid out according to the entering ball. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to use the second period in which the period of the first mode is shorter than the open state of the first period. In other words, the ease with which prize balls are paid out conflicts with the degree of advantage for the player. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game property that is greatly different from the conventional game property of simply obtaining a prize ball based on the result of a big hit.

Feature I12. Based on a predetermined start opportunity, a special effect by a predetermined effect means is started, and a special effect means that ends the special effect based on the lapse of a preset effect continuation period (normal figure game round by the main control device 162 function to execute control processing) and
Based on a predetermined first trigger, it is switched to a first mode (open state) in which a game ball can enter, and based on a predetermined second trigger, a second mode in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the first mode. Variable ball entry means (upper variable winning device 710) that is switched to two modes (closed state),
a payout means (payout control device 181) for executing a payout of a predetermined number of game balls based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
with
The effect continuation period of the special effect that is executed in a situation where the predetermined first event occurs is the first mode duration from the occurrence of the predetermined first event to the occurrence of the predetermined second event. is more advantageous to the player when the remaining period is shorter than the remaining period.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, and the first mode continues. Advantages and disadvantages are set for the period in relation to the remaining period of the performance continuation period of the special performance, and it is easier for the player when the first mode continuation period is shorter than the remaining period of the special performance than when it is longer than the remaining period. be advantageous. In other words, originally, the longer the duration of the first mode is, the more likely it is that a prize ball will be awarded, which is advantageous for the player. may be more advantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game property that is greatly different from the conventional game property of simply entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means to obtain a prize ball.

It should be noted that each of the features I1 to I9 may be individually applied to the features I10 to I12, or may be applied in combination.

Further, for each configuration of the features I1 to I12, features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F14, features G1 to G13, features It is also possible to apply the technical role ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H10, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K13, and features L1 to L9 individually, and each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. a shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for shooting a game ball based on a shooting operation by a player;
a special ball entry section (upper variable winning device 710, through gate 35) into which game balls launched by the launching means can enter;
Predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75);
Effect execution means (notification/effect control device 143) for executing the notification effect by the predetermined notification means,
A gaming machine comprising
A special state (opening/closing execution mode) is set in which the probability of entering the special ball section changes,
The production executing means is
During the special state, after executing a predetermined effect (battle effect), an advantageous content (victory effect) that suggests that the player is advantageous, and a disadvantageous content (defeat effect) that suggests that the player is disadvantageous ), which selects and notifies any one of a plurality of types of result contents including the first special effect execution means (battle effect by the notification / effect control device 143) that can be executed by the predetermined notification means function to execute processing for
The predetermined notification means or Second special effect execution means (function to execute the normal figure game round control processing by the main control device 162) that can be executed by the notification means different from it,
Advantageous means for making it easier to select the advantageous content as the result content in the first special effect based on the occurrence of a ball entering the special ball entry section Processing to generate effects: a function of executing S3708 to S3713, HP display setting processing according to the number of reservations based on the winning to the through gate 35: a function of executing S3706),
Disadvantage means for making it easier to select the disadvantageous content as the result content in the first special effect according to the lapse of the execution period of the second special effect being executed during the first special effect (normal pattern reservation storage Processing for generating HP reduction effect according to the number FN and the changing situation: a function of executing S3714 to S3718);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, by entering the game ball into the special ball entry section during the first special effect, advantageous contents are likely to be selected as result contents in the first special effect. On the other hand, disadvantageous contents are likely to be selected as result contents in the first special effect according to the lapse of the execution period of the second special effect being performed during the execution of the first special effect. In other words, when the first special effect occurs during the special state, it is not enough to simply enter the game ball into the special ball entry section, and a time element is also added, so the playability during the special state is greatly improved. can be improved to

In particular, since the temporal element is the elapse of the execution period of the second special performance, which is started with a start opportunity different from that of the first special performance, it has nothing to do with the elapse of the execution period of the first special performance. Elements can make it easier to select disadvantageous content. Therefore, even if the ball has not entered the special ball-entering section before the end of the first special performance, it is possible to select the advantageous contents if the second special performance has not ended, and the first special performance can be selected. Even if a ball is entered into the special ball-entering part, it is possible to select disadvantageous content if the second special effect is completed.

By doing so, the first special effect during the special state is not a performance like a so-called performance race in which the result is determined in advance, but an effect in line with the game content during the special state can be achieved. It is possible to greatly improve the playability inside.

Feature J2. Characteristic J1 characterized in that the second special effect executing means is configured to start the second special effect based on the fact that the game ball shot by the shooting means enters a predetermined ball entering portion. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion, the second special effect is started in which the disadvantageous content is likely to be selected in the first special effect. Since the disadvantageous contents are likely to be selected according to the lapse of the execution period of the second special effect executed during the first special effect, it is better to start the second special effect at as late a timing as possible so that the disadvantageous contents can be obtained. Since it becomes difficult to be selected, it is preferable that the timing of the ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion, which triggers the start of the second special effect, be late. On the other hand, when a ball enters the special ball-entering portion, it becomes easier to select advantageous content, so that the selected result content can be made different by using the respective ball-entering timings.

Feature J3. A starting ball entry portion (first operation port 62, fifth operation port 730) into which a game ball fired by the shooting means can enter;
Based on the fact that the game ball entered the starting ball entering section, the transition determination means (first special figure fluctuation start processing by the main controller 162 and the second 2 Function to execute the success or failure determination process in the special figure fluctuation start process) and
A variable ball entry that can be displaced between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball fired by the shooting means can enter and a second mode (closed state) in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the first mode. Means (upper variable winning device 710);
a special control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 162) for executing special control for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then changing the variable ball entry means to the second mode; ,
with
The special state is a configuration in which the special control is executed by the special control means,
Receiving means (electric accessory) displaceable between a first state (receiving state) for receiving a game ball to the starting ball entry portion and a second state (non-receiving state) in which the game ball is more difficult to receive than the first state 66) and
acceptance control means for executing acceptance control to change the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (a function of executing electric support processing by the main controller 162);
Acceptance information acquisition means for acquiring acceptance information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entering section (a function of executing through winning processing by the main controller 162);
For the information for acceptance acquired by the acceptance information acquisition means, acceptance determination means for executing acceptance determination whether or not to execute the acceptance control by the acceptance control means (ordinary figure game round control processing by the main controller 162 a function to execute the pass/fail judgment process in
with
The second special effect execution means starts the second special effect based on the acceptance determination by the acceptance determination means, and the result of the acceptance determination based on the elapse of the predetermined execution period. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the second special effect is terminated by announcing .

According to the above configuration, the transition determination is performed based on the ball entering the starting ball entering portion, and if the transition to the special state is made based on the result of the transition determination, the ball is likely to enter the variable ball entering means. , the first special effect executed during the special state is started based on the entry into a predetermined ball entry section that triggers the acceptance determination that changes the entry rate into the starting ball entry section. 2 Disadvantageous contents are likely to be selected according to the lapse of the execution period of the special performance. In this way, by associating the first special effect in the special state based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section with the second special effect on the acceptance determination side, simply causing the ball entering the variable ball entering means. Not only is it good, but the advantage and disadvantage will change depending on the second special performance on the acceptance judgment side, so it will play a new role beyond the role of changing the ball entry rate to the starting ball entry section for acceptance judgment. It is possible to make it possible to make it a novel game property that has not existed in the past.

Feature J4. The special state is a configuration in which the special control by the special control means is executed a plurality of times,
The predetermined ball-entering portion becomes capable of entering a ball when the variable ball-entering means is in the second mode, and the variable ball-entering means is in the first mode so that the ball is more likely to enter than in the second mode. The game machine according to feature J3, characterized in that it has a configuration in which it is difficult to play.

According to the above configuration, during the special state in which the ball is allowed to enter the variable ball-entering means, the predetermined ball-entering portion that triggers the execution of the second special effect related to the disadvantageous content of the first special effect: A ball can be entered when the variable ball-entering means is in the second mode, and is difficult to enter when the variable ball-entering means is in the first mode. By doing so, while the first special effect is closely related to the second special effect, the timing at which the ball is likely to enter the variable ball entering means and the predetermined timing that triggers the start of the second special effect. It is possible to separate the timing at which the ball is likely to enter the ball-entering portion. As a result, in a configuration in which the points to be noticed are respectively different, the timings to be noticed can be divided respectively, and it is possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon that the degree of attention is dispersed due to the attention being paid to a plurality of points at the same time. .

Feature J5. Having a first special ball-entering portion (through gate 35) as the special ball-entering portion,
the predetermined ball-entering portion is the first special ball-entering portion;
The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics J2 to J4, wherein the advantageous means can facilitate selection of the advantageous contents based on the ball entering the first special ball entering section. .

According to the above configuration, the second special effect is started based on the ball entering the first special ball entrance section for acceptance determination, and the second special effect is disadvantageous in the first special effect according to the elapse of the execution period of the second special effect. In a configuration in which content is easily selected, advantageous content is also easily selected when a ball is entered into the first special ball entry section. In this way, the content of the result of the first special effect in the special state in which the ball is allowed to enter the variable ball entering means is changed to the advantageous content by the element based on the ball entering the first special ball entering section for acceptance determination. By making the special state into a disadvantageous content, it is possible to make the special state a novel game that is completely different from the game property that only causes the ball to be entered into the variable ball entering means.

Feature J6. A starting ball entry portion (first operation port 62, fifth operation port 730) into which the game ball fired by the shooting means can enter;
Based on the fact that the game ball entered the starting ball entering section, the transition determination means (first special figure fluctuation start processing by the main controller 162 and the second 2 Function to execute the success or failure determination process in the special figure fluctuation start process),
with
Having a second special ball-entering portion as the special ball-entering portion,
The second special ball entry portion is displaceable between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the first state. and
The second special ball-entering section is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then special control means for executing special control to change it to the second mode (a function of executing the big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 162) ),
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the special state is a configuration in which the special control is executed by the special control means.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the transition to the special state in which the ball is allowed to enter the second special ball-entering portion according to the result of the transition determination based on the ball entering the starting ball-entering portion, the second ball in the special state In the 1 special performance, when a ball is entered into the second special ball-entering portion, advantageous contents are likely to be selected. On the other hand, since disadvantageous contents are likely to be selected according to the lapse of the execution period of the second special performance, the entry to the second special ball entry section is generated as early as possible in consideration of the second special performance. As a result, it becomes possible to make it easier to select advantageous content and to make it difficult to select disadvantageous content. By doing so, it is possible to make the significance of entering the ball into the second special ball entry section during the special state more than simply obtaining a prize ball based on the entry, and during the special state. It is possible to improve the playability of.

Feature J7. In the special state, the number of balls entering the second special ball-entering section, which is the first mode, reaches a predetermined number, or a predetermined period of time has passed since the first mode. Ending means (function of executing the big winning opening closing process by the main controller 162) for setting the second special ball entry portion to the second mode based on the fact that the
The disadvantageous means is that even if the number of balls entering the second special ball-entering portion set in the first mode by the ending means reaches the predetermined number, the execution period of the second special effect has elapsed. The gaming machine according to feature J6, wherein the disadvantageous content can be selected according to.

As in the above configuration, in the special state, when the number of balls entering the second special ball-entering portion reaches a predetermined number or a predetermined period of time elapses, the second special ball-entering portion is in the second mode. Even if the number of entering balls reaches a predetermined number, advantageous content may not be selected and disadvantageous content may be selected depending on the lapse of the execution period of the second special effect. As a result, it is possible to add a game in which a ball is entered in a balance with the execution period of the second special effect to the game in which a predetermined number of balls are entered in the special state, thereby improving the playability. It becomes possible.

Feature J8. A starting ball entry portion (first operation port 62, fifth operation port 730) into which a game ball fired by the shooting means can enter;
Based on the fact that the game ball entered the starting ball entering section, the transition determination means (first special figure fluctuation start processing by the main controller 162 and the second 2 Function to execute the success or failure determination process in the special figure fluctuation start process) and
Receiving means (electric accessory) displaceable between a first state (receiving state) for receiving a game ball to the starting ball entry portion and a second state (non-receiving state) in which it is more difficult to receive a game ball than the first state 66) and
an acceptance control means (a function of executing an electrician support process by the main controller 162) that executes acceptance control to change the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
with
As the special ball entry portion, a first special ball entry portion (through gate 35) and a second special ball entry portion (upper variable winning device 710) different from the first special ball entry portion are provided,
Acceptance information acquisition means for acquiring acceptance information based on the game ball entering the first special ball entering section (function for executing through winning processing by main controller 162);
For the information for acceptance acquired by the acceptance information acquisition means, acceptance determination means for executing acceptance determination whether or not to execute the acceptance control by the acceptance control means (ordinary figure game round control processing by the main controller 162 a function to execute the pass/fail judgment process in
with
The second special effect execution means starts the second special effect based on the acceptance determination by the acceptance determination means, and the result of the acceptance determination based on the elapse of the predetermined execution period. to end the second special effect,
The second special ball entry portion is displaceable between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the first state. and
The second special ball-entering section is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then special control means for executing special control to change it to the second mode (a function of executing the big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 162) ),
The special state is a configuration in which the special control is executed by the special control means,
The advantageous means facilitates selection of the advantageous content based on the ball entering the first special ball-entering section or the second special ball-entering section,
Any of the features J1 to J7, wherein the disadvantage means facilitates the selection of the disadvantage according to the lapse of the execution period of the second special effect based on the ball entering the first special ball entering section. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the transition determination is performed based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section, and if the transition to the special state is made based on the result of the transition determination, the ball is more likely to enter the second special entering section. In this configuration, the first special effect executed during the special state is based on the ball entering the second special ball entering section and the ball entering the first special ball entering section that triggers the acceptance determination. Advantageous contents are easily selected, and disadvantageous contents are easily selected in accordance with the lapse of the execution period of the second special performance which is started based on the ball entering the first special ball entering section. In this way, by associating the first special effect in the special state based on the ball entering the starting ball entering part with the second special effect on the acceptance determination side, the ball entering the second special ball entering part is simply caused. In addition, it is possible to change the advantage/disadvantage in consideration of the ball entering the first special ball entering section on the acceptance determination side and the second special performance based on the ball entering. As a result, it is possible to play a new role beyond the role of changing the rate of ball entry into the starting ball entry section regarding the acceptance determination, and it is possible to achieve novel game characteristics that have not existed in the past.

For each configuration of the features J1 to J8, features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F14, features G1 to G13, features It is also possible to apply the technical role ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H10, features I1 to I12, features K1 to K13, and features L1 to L9 individually, and each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player;
A ball entry section (through gate 35, second through gate 850, etc.) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering section (function for executing through winning processing by the main control device 162);
information storage means (electrical worker reservation area 643) for storing the information for determination acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Specific determination means for performing a specific determination as to whether or not specific control is to be executed with respect to the determination information stored in the information storage means (a function of executing a normal figure game round control process in the main controller 162);
A gaming machine comprising
As the ball entry portion, a first ball entry portion (through gate 35) and a second ball entry portion (second through gate 850) are provided,
The game area is provided with a first route through which one game ball shot from the shooting means can enter the second ball entering section after entering the first ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when one game ball shot from the shooting means flows down along the first route, the determination information as to whether or not to execute the specific control can be acquired a plurality of times (twice). In this way, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that have not existed in the past, such as double lottery being performed with one game ball.

Moreover, in the above configuration, depending on the number of pieces of judgment information stored in the information storage means, it is not always the case that pieces of judgment information are acquired for the number of balls entered into a plurality of ball-entering sections. For example, in a situation where a predetermined number of pieces of judgment information are stored, even if a ball is entered into a plurality of ball entrances, none of the judgment information is acquired, and judgment information is acquired only for the number of balls entered. In order for it to be done, it is a condition that there is enough space in the number of memories. Then, if there is a vacancy in the number of memories, but the vacancy is less than the number of balls entered, the judgment information is acquired for the vacancy.

In other words, in a configuration in which the ball can enter the second ball entering section after entering the first ball entering section, if there are two vacancies in the number of pieces of determination information stored, the first route is flowed down to allow both balls to enter the second ball entering section. Two pieces of determination information are obtained for the amount of the ball entering the ball. In this configuration, when there is one free space in the number of determination information stored, one determination information is acquired instead of two, and when there is no space in the storage number of determination information, even one determination is made. information is not acquired. In this way, by determining a route that allows a ball to enter a plurality of ball-entering sections, determination information is obtained instead of a 0/1 result, such as whether determination information is acquired or not, depending on the flow of one game ball. is acquired, it is possible to make a difference in the number, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Note that the "first route" may also be referred to as a "specific route".

Feature K2. The game area is provided with a second route in which one game ball shot from the shooting means does not enter the second ball-entering section after entering the first ball-entering section. The gaming machine according to the characterizing feature K1.

According to the above configuration, the number of pieces of judgment information acquired differs between when the first route is flowed and when the second route is flowed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine having the feature K1.

Feature K3. A game ball shot with a predetermined firing strength capable of flowing down the first route is capable of flowing down the second route, and a game ball shot with a predetermined firing strength capable of flowing down the second route is said The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the first route and the second route are set so that the first route can be flowed down.

According to the above configuration, it becomes impossible to target the first route and the second route. As a result, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the user expects that the first route of the first route and the second route will be flowed due to variations in the flow.

Feature K4. The gaming machine according to feature K3, characterized in that, when the game ball is shot with the predetermined shooting intensity, the game ball flows more easily in the second route than in the first route.

According to the above configuration, since the second route is easier to flow down than the first route, the game ball is less likely to enter the second ball-entering portion after entering the first ball-entering portion. As a result, it is possible to realize a playability that makes players expect a flow down to the first route without increasing the acquisition number of determination information unnecessarily and suppressing an increase in the ball put-out rate.

Feature K5. According to the first route, a ball enters the first ball entering section before the specific determination made based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering section and the notification of the result thereof are completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, wherein the game ball entered into the second ball entering section.

According to the above configuration, when the first route is made to flow down, a plurality of judgment information is acquired, but the judgment information acquired based on the previous entry into the first ball entrance section is not digested. After that, when the next information for determination is acquired, such an event does not occur, and it is possible to suitably realize game characteristics utilizing the fact that a plurality of information for determination are stored.

In addition, the above configuration is such that "the first route includes the determination information stored in the information storage means after the specific determination performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section. It may be expressed as "the game ball entering the first ball entering section enters the second ball entering section before the specific determination is made for".

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion in the first route are arranged at an interval shorter than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the above configuration, since the game ball cannot move between the first ball entering part and the second ball entering part, when the first route is made to flow down, the game ball entered the first ball entering part A phenomenon in which the ball does not enter the second ball-entering section or an event in which the ball enters the second ball-entering section without entering the first ball-entering section will not occur. This makes it easier to realize the playability as designed.

Feature K7. A plurality of nails are embedded in the play area, and the configuration is such that the plurality of nails can change the flow of the game ball,
The gaming machine according to feature K6, wherein in the first route, the nail is embedded between the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to diversify the flow-down mode of the first route in which the ball continuously enters the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion. That is, unlike the structure in which the first ball-entrance part and the second ball-entrance part are simply connected, the nail is embedded between the first ball-entrance part and the second ball-entrance part. It is possible to change the movement of the game ball with the nail.

Feature K8. A starting ball entry portion (second operation port 63) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball;
Displaceable between a first state (accepting state) for receiving a game ball to the start ball entry portion and a second state (non-acceptance state) in which it is more difficult to accept the game ball to the start ball entry portion than in the first state Receiving means (electric accessory 66);
Acceptance control means for executing acceptance control for displacing the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (function for executing electric support processing by the main controller 162) and,
with
The specific control is the acceptance control by the acceptance control means,
The receiving means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first route is received after entering the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of K7.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is caused to flow down the first route, the game ball enters the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion, and then is received by the receiving means and enters the starting ball entering portion. You will be able to enter the ball. Thereby, the determination information is acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion, and the receiving means is set to the first state by the specific determination to enter the game ball into the starting ball entering portion. A series of games of making balls can be completed with one ball flowing down. In particular, since the first route is a route in which the game ball enters the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part, the possibility that the game ball flowing down the first route will be accepted by the receiving means is the first It is higher than the case where the ball is entered only in the ball entry portion (the case where the second route is flowed down in the characteristic K2). Therefore, the possibility of completing the above series of games with one game ball also increases, and it is possible to improve the game playability.

Feature K9. Any one of the characteristics K1 to K8, wherein the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means becomes a specific number, which is plural, so that a specific state advantageous to the player is obtained. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the significance of acquiring a plurality of pieces of determination information by flowing down the first route is enhanced. In particular, in a configuration where there is a route for acquiring one determination information, such as the configuration of characteristic K2, after the route is flown down, the determination information is digested before flowing down the route again, In other words, in a configuration in which it is difficult for determination information to accumulate, it is difficult for the number of stored determination information to reach a specific number, and a specific state is unlikely to occur. With such a configuration, if it has a configuration capable of accumulating determination information at once like the first route, it is normally difficult for determination information to accumulate, but if the first route is allowed to flow down, it can be stored. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the destination of the game ball, and to realize the novel playability of the feature K1 while providing the original enjoyment of the game machine of enjoying the flow of the game ball. becomes.

Feature K10. The number of the determination information stored in the information storage means is the number that allows the one game ball to enter the ball entry section when the one game ball is allowed to flow down the first route. Characteristic K1 characterized by comprising a first specifying means for making it easier for a first specified situation (situation where the number FN of the normal pattern reserved storage is 2) to be less than or equal to the number obtained by dividing the predetermined number. The game machine according to any one of K9.

According to the above configuration, in the first specific situation, since there is an empty space in the information storage means for the number of balls entered into the ball entrance section, the number of balls corresponding to the number of balls entered into the ball entrance section is reduced by flowing down the first route. can be acquired. Therefore, if it is a 1st specific situation, it can be said that it is possible to enjoy the merit of flowing down a 1st route to the maximum.

Feature K11. The number of the determination information stored in the information storage means is the number that allows the one game ball to enter the ball entry section when the one game ball is allowed to flow down the first route. A second specifying means for facilitating the occurrence of a second specified situation (situation in which the normal pattern reserved storage number FN is 3) in which the number is greater than the number obtained by dividing the predetermined number and less than the predetermined number The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the second specific situation, although there is no free space in the information storage means for the number of balls entered into the ball-entering section, there is at least one free space. Although it is not possible to acquire the number of determination information corresponding to the number of balls entered into the ball-entering section, it is possible to acquire at least one piece of determination information. Therefore, in the second specific situation, although the merit of flowing down the first route cannot be maximized, at least the significance of flowing down the first route can be secured.

Feature K12. Specific notification means ( A function to execute the normal game round control process by the main control device 162),
When the performance for notification is performed by the specific notification means, period setting means for setting the performance continuation period of the performance for notification (process for setting the normal pattern fluctuation display time in the normal pattern game round control processing by the main controller 162 function) and
with
The specific notification means performs the notification effect over the effect continuation period set by the period setting means,
The first specifying means determines the effect continuation period of the informing effect started in the second specific situation (FN=3) for the informing effect started in the first specific situation (FN=2). The first specific situation is likely to occur by making it likely to be shorter than the effect duration period,
The second specifying means determines the effect continuation period of the informing effect that is started in a situation where the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means is the predetermined number, in the second specific situation (FN Characteristic K10 or K11, characterized in that the second specific situation is likely to occur by making the duration of the effect for notification started at 3) likely to be shorter than the effect continuation period. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to generate the first specific situation and the second specific situation by using the length of the presentation duration. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to change whether or not to acquire the judgment information by changing the rate of ball entry into the ball entry portion, and the effects of the features M10 and M11 can be achieved with a simple configuration. becomes.

Feature K13. A starting ball entry portion (first operation port 62, second operation port 63) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball;
Special information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 162) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering section;
Regarding the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, grant determination means (first special figure fluctuation start processing and second special figure fluctuation start processing by main control device 162) a function to execute the validity determination process in the fluctuation start process);
Displaceable between a first state (accepting state) for receiving a game ball to the start ball entry portion and a second state (non-acceptance state) in which it is more difficult to accept the game ball to the start ball entry portion than in the first state Receiving means (electric accessory 66);
Reception information acquisition means for acquiring reception information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section (a function of executing through winning processing by the main controller 162);
acceptance information storage means (electrical work holding area 643) for storing the acceptance information acquired by the acceptance information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
acceptance control means for executing acceptance control to change the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (a function of executing electric support processing by the main controller 162);
For the information for acceptance stored in the acceptance information storage means, the acceptance determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the acceptance control is to be performed by the acceptance control means (ordinary figure game round control processing by the main controller 162 a function to execute the pass/fail judgment process in
with
The specific control is the acceptance control by the acceptance control means,
The first specific situation in which the effect continuation period is set by the first specifying means and the effect continuation period is set by the second specifying means based on the result of the provision determination by the provision determination means. The gaming machine according to feature K12, further comprising means for executing switching to the second specific situation.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first specific situation and the second specific situation are generated by using the length of the effect duration period, the length of the effect duration period is determined by the lottery system based on the ball entering the ball entering section. It can be switched according to the result of a different lottery system (lottery system based on the ball entered by the starting ball department). In this way, the results of a plurality of lottery systems are related to the first specific situation and the second specific situation, thereby suppressing the monotony of the game and improving the interest.

For each configuration of the features K1 to K13, features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F14, features G1 to G13, features It is also possible to apply the technical role ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H10, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J8, and features L1 to L9 individually. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for shooting a game ball to a game area based on a shooting operation by a player;
A receiving portion provided in the game area and capable of receiving a game ball (for example, a continuous through formed by a tenth through gate 858 and an eleventh through gate 858, a through gate 35 and a second through gate 850, etc.);
Based on the fact that the game ball is received by the receiving unit, grant determination means (general figure by the main controller 162) that executes grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege (opening of the electric accessory 66) to the player A function to execute the win/loss determination process in the game round control process);
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. Function to execute the figure game state transition processing) and
A first execution state (for example, a single lottery state) in which the grant determination by the grant determination means is executed a first number of times based on the reception of one game ball by the receiving unit; and a second execution state (e.g., double lottery state) in which the grant determination by the grant determination means is executed a second number of times greater than the first number of times based on the acceptance of the game ball. Means (the function of executing the normal game round control process by the main control device 162),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the grant determination is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the receiving unit, and the privilege is granted based on the result. An execution state and a second execution state in which the program is executed a second number of times greater than the first number of executions are provided, and switching means switches between the first execution state and the second execution state. A player who desires to be given a privilege is more profitable if the game is executed a second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times. Unlike the conventional game in which a privilege is obtained by simply performing a grant determination, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the number of grant determinations executed in one acceptance is increased.

Feature L2. Information acquisition means for acquiring information for judgment based on the reception of the game ball in the receiving unit (function for executing winning processing for through by main control device 162),
The provision determination means determines whether or not the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means is provision information corresponding to the provision correspondence result for each piece of determination information. It is a configuration for making a judgment,
The information acquisition means acquires a first number of the determination information corresponding to the first number of times in the first execution state, and acquires a second number of the determination information corresponding to the second number of times in the second execution state. The gaming machine according to feature L1, which acquires information for use.

According to the above configuration, not only is the number of addition determinations different between the first execution state and the second execution state, but also the acquisition number of determination information used for determination of addition is different. Therefore, for example, switching between the first execution state and the second execution state is performed without requiring a processing change such as a configuration in which the grant determination is performed a plurality of times using one piece of determination information. It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature L3. The receiving part has a plurality of passing areas (through gates 858, 859, 35, 850),
The information acquisition means is
When the game ball passes through the plurality of passage areas in the first execution state, acquiring the determination information in the first number of passage areas among the plurality of passage areas,
When the game ball passes through the plurality of passage areas in the second execution state, the determination information is acquired in the second number of passage areas among the plurality of passage areas. The gaming machine according to feature L2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch between the first execution state and the second execution state simply by changing the passage area through which the determination information is acquired by passing. By doing so, for example, the effect of the characteristic L1 can be achieved by making good use of the existing configuration without adding a new configuration such as changing the flow path or providing a sorting device for it. be able to.

Feature L4. the receiver has the second number of passage areas (through gates 858, 859, 35, 850);
The information acquisition means is
When the game ball passes through the plurality of passage areas in the first execution state, the determination information is acquired in the first number of passage areas of the second number of passage areas,
It is characterized in that when the game ball passes through the plurality of passage areas in the second execution state, the determination information is acquired in any passage area of the second number of passage areas. The gaming machine described in L3.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch between the first execution state and the second execution state simply by changing the passage area through which the determination information is acquired by passing. By doing so, for example, the effect of feature L1 can be achieved without adding a new configuration, such as changing the flow-down path or providing a sorting device therefor.

In particular, according to the above configuration, the plurality of passage areas is the second number, and the configuration is such that the determination information is obtained by passing through all of the passage areas, and the case is not obtained. Therefore, compared to the feature L3, the difference in acquisition processing between the first execution state and the second execution state can be reduced, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature L5. An information storage means (electrical worker reservation area 643) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
In the first execution state, the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means tends to have a vacant number smaller than the second number, and in the second execution state, the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4, characterized in that the second number of vacancies is likely to occur in the game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the first execution state and the second execution state by using the number of free spaces that can be stored in the information storage means. By doing so, the effect of feature L2 can be obtained without requiring a large change from the existing configuration in which a plurality of determination information are stored. Further, for example, if the first execution state and the second execution state are realized by changing the internal processing of the gaming machine, it may be difficult for a player who cannot understand or know the internal processing to play the game. There is a possibility that it will become something that gives a sense of opacity. In that respect, if the number of empty memories is used, the player can also understand the first execution state and the second execution state, and it is possible to realize the novel gameplay of the feature L2 while eliminating the opacity. becomes.

Feature L6. The switching means obtains the frequency of acquisition of the determination information by the information acquisition means in a situation where the game ball is continuously shot from the shooting means, and the determination information is subject to the provision determination. The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein switching between the first execution state and the second execution state is performed using a relationship between frequency and.

If the acquisition frequency of determination information is high, the number of determination information stored in the information storage means tends to increase. In the above configuration, this relationship is used to set the number of vacancies in the first execution state and the number of vacancies in the second execution state. By doing so, the effect of the feature L5 can be obtained well.

Feature L7. Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a game round performance is executed by a predetermined notification means, and after the performance period has elapsed, the game round performance is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the grant determination result. A game round control means (a function of executing a normal game round control process by the main control device 162),
When the game round production is performed by the game round control means, the production period setting means for setting the production period according to the result of the grant determination (execution of processing for setting the normal figure fluctuation display time by the main controller 162 function) and
with
The production period setting means, as the production period,
In a situation in which the game ball is continuously shot from the shooting means, the target frequency of the judgment information being given is higher than the acquisition frequency of the judgment information being acquired by the information acquisition means. The first production period that becomes higher,
The acquisition frequency of the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means in a situation where the game ball is continuously shot from the shooting means is higher than the target frequency at which the determination information is subject to the grant determination. A second performance period that increases,
can be set, and
The switching means switches between the first execution state and the second execution state using a relationship between the first performance period and the second performance period set by the performance period setting means. The gaming machine according to feature L6.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the configuration of feature L6 by a simple modification such as the length of the presentation period. As a result, there is no need to add complicated control or configuration in order to achieve the effect of feature L6, and excellent effects can be expected with a simple configuration.

Feature L8. The effect period setting means, in the first execution state, when the game time effect is performed by the game time control means in a situation where the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means is the predetermined number, the The performance period is set to the first performance period, and the number of the judgment information stored in the storage number is one more than the number obtained by dividing the second number from the predetermined number, by the game round control means Characteristic feature L7, characterized in that when the game round effect is performed, the effect period is set as the second effect period, and the number of vacant storage numbers is set to be smaller than the second number. game machine.

According to the above configuration, by setting the first effect period and the second effect period respectively, it is possible to reduce the number of empty memory numbers in the first execution state to a number smaller than the second number. More specifically, for example, if the predetermined number is 4, the first number is 1, and the second number is 2, in a situation where the number of memories is 4, the target frequency is higher than the acquisition frequency. The number of memories is made easy to change from 4 to 3 as a period, and in the situation where the number of memories is 3, the number of memories is made difficult to change from 3 to 2 as a second presentation period in which the acquisition frequency is higher than the target frequency. This results in the first execution state in which the number of memories is 3 and one determination information is easily acquired. By doing so, it is possible to realize the first execution state using a simple configuration such as a combination of presentation periods.

Feature L9. The effect period setting means, in the second execution state, when the game time effect is performed by the game time control means in a situation where the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means is the predetermined number, the The performance period is set to the first performance period, and the number of the judgment information stored in the storage number is one more than the number obtained by dividing the second number from the predetermined number, by the game round control means The game according to feature L7 or feature L8, characterized in that when the game round effect is performed, the effect period is set to the first effect period, and the empty number of the memory numbers is set to the second number. machine.

According to the above configuration, by setting the first effect period and the second effect period respectively, it is possible to set the number of vacant storage numbers in the second execution state to the second number. More specifically, for example, if the predetermined number is 4, the first number is 1, and the second number is 2, in a situation where the number of memories is 4, the target frequency is higher than the acquisition frequency. The number of memories is easily changed from 4 to 3 as a period, and the number of memories is easily changed from 3 to 2 as a first presentation period in which the target frequency is higher than the acquisition frequency even in a situation where the number of memories is 3. - 特許庁This results in a second execution state in which the number of stored items is 2 or less and two items of determination information are easily acquired. By doing so, it is possible to realize the second execution state using a simple configuration such as a combination of presentation periods.

For each configuration of the features L1 to L9, features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F14, features G1 to G13, features It is also possible to apply the technical role ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H10, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J8, and features K1 to K13 individually, and each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group L to each configuration of feature group A to feature group L detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

In addition, when the respective technical ideas are applied to each other or in combination as described above, it is preferable to modify the expression of each configuration within the scope of each technical idea before applying.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball shooting handle 41) operated by a player, game ball shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, and A ball path (guide path 103 of the guide rail 100, etc.) that guides the game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and each game part (such as a nail) arranged in the game area. A game machine that provides a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (general prize winning port 61, etc.).

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying the symbol row; A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 35... Through gate, 41... Game ball shooting handle, 62... First operating opening, 63... Second operating opening, 64... Third operating opening, 65... Variable winning device, 65a... Big winning opening, 66...Electric Accessory 75...Design Display Device 75a...Display Screen 77...Guidance Part 78...Buffer Member 162...Main Control Device 500...Second Variable Winning Device 506...V Winning Area 651... Notification/production control device 660 Display control device 710 Upper variable winning device 710a Upper big winning opening 720 Fourth operation opening 730 Fifth operation opening 850 Second through gate 900 Third 4 variable winning device, 910... 3rd variable winning device, PE... game area, RA1... acceptance area, RA2... specific area.

Claims (1)

variable ball entry means capable of switching between a first mode in which a game ball can enter and a second mode in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the first mode;
variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second mode to the first mode, and then executing variable ball entry control to the second mode;
specific state transition means for transitioning a game state to a specific state in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry means based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition;
In a gaming machine comprising
Based on the variable ball entry control means setting the variable ball entry means to the first mode, it is possible to cause a specific event that is more disadvantageous than when the variable ball entry means is not set to the first mode. A game machine characterized by being equipped with possible means.

Images